Home

Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool

1. e x means any 0 or 1 Table 45 Fault Truth table for the Binary Input 2 Input 1 Output A t encoder function block with PUREE 2 inputs in One out of N 0 0 0 1 d ay 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 Output Output Output Fault Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 c B A Hoa 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 More than one input 1 0 0 0 1 Table 46 Truth table for the Binary encoder function block with 8 inputs in One out of N mode Table 47 Fault Truth table for the Binary Input 2 Input 1 Output A t encoder function block with PISSEN 2 inputs in Priority mode 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 X 1 0 146 Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 oe Peet cara ee t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x 1 0 1 0 0 1 X X X X X X 1 1 0 0 1 x x x x x x x 1
2. Table 27 Truth table for OR evaluation with two inputs Table 28 Truth table for OR evaluation with eight inputs Figure 102 Function block diagram for the Exclusive OR XOR function block Table 29 Truth table for XOR evaluation Logic programming Function blocks Truth table for OR evaluation with two inputs Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 0 0 0 1 x 1 x 1 1 Truth table for OR evaluation with eight inputs Chapter 9 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Output 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x x 1 x 1 x x x x x x 1 x x 1 x x x x x 1 x x x 1 x x x x 1 x x x x 1 x x X 1 x x x x x 1 x x 1 x x x x x x 1 X 1 x x x x x x x 1 1 9 7 4 XOR exclusive OR Function block diagram General description The output is High only if both inputs are complementary i e with contrary values one input High and one input Low Truth table The following applies for the truth table in this section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High Truth table for XOR evaluation Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 130 Chapter 9 Figure 103 Function block diagram for the Exclusive NOR XNOR function block Table 30 Truth table for XNOR evaluation Figure 104 Logic connections for the multiple release function block 131 L
3. ccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeneees 232 9 12 Function blocks for press Cycle CONTIOL ccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeetaeeeeeeaaes 240 9 12 1 PRESS SOtUp ss sreviactradeat castes feet yatta ta ects seca ee ta aa trae a 240 9 12 2 Press single Stroke rrer iir T E A T 243 9 12 3 Press atomala sioria i ai a aAA 247 9 12 4 N break press with N PSDI MOde ec cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 250 9 13 User defined function DIOCKS 0 eee eeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeetaeeeeeenaneeeeeaas 258 9 13 1 Grouped function DIOCK cccceceeeeeecceceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeseeennieeeeeeeeneees 258 9 13 2 Customized function block cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 262 9 14 Simulation of the CONfiQgUratION eect eeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 265 9 15 Foce modora haeath care isin aieass tang etl Gisiauieatong mi adieaastertdee 267 10 VO modules sarriena ieee eneeet eed ieee nade a 271 10 1 Dual channel evaluation and discrepancy time monitoring 0 ceee 271 10 2 ON OFF filter and OFF ON filter ecceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeetnaeeeeetnaeeeee 273 10 3 Disabling the test pulses of WSO XTIO outputs eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 273 11 Transferring the system Configuration ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenaees 274 11 1 Transferring project data to the safety Controller ceeeceeeteeeeeeeeteeeeees 274 11 2 Compat
4. Report SICK Mitsubishi Application name CPU1 module CRC Tool 0x6C6C6069 CRC Device 0x00000000 Configuration date and time 4 20 2011 9 39 00 PM 304 Chapter 15 Annex ae E Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM Content Page 2 305 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM 1 Bill of material AL_AZ MITSUBISH Tag name Part Number Page 3 306 Chapter 15 307 Annex Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM 2 Diagnostics No error history available 3 Configuration 3 1 Installed software components Tool Version Basic components Station 130 200 Software component for CPUO and CPU1 main modules 130 200 component for 4RO module 130 200 component for GOC1 Network Modules 130 200 component for GMOD 130 200 Software component for XTDI module 130 200 component for XTIO extension module 130 200 3 2 General Information User group Machine Operator Application name CPU1 module Application Overall Checksum CRC E Configuration state Not vertiied Configuration date 4 20 2011 5 39 PM 5 J Type Code Step WSO CPU1 Vox WS0 XTIO Vix CPU Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM 3 3 1 CPU1 General Information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Memory Address number version version Usage UI Logic WSO CPU1 0000 0000 v2 000 0 00 130 200V2xx 233 392 0 WSO MPL 0601 0000 1 30200 33 2 CPU logic Used
5. Function block e The internal view shows the grouped function block s tag names for its inputs and outputs e The external view shows what is connected to the grouped function block How to transfer a grouped function block to another PC gt Save the project file and open it on the other PC Grouped function blocks contained in the project will be imported automatically e The import of function blocks must be enabled in the Hardware configuration view Settings General tab disable the option Don t ask to import customized function blocks You will be asked to confirm the import when you open the project file Figure 250 Function block diagram for the customized function block Note Figure 251 Edit Function Block Details dialog for the customized function block Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 13 2 Customized function block Once a grouped function block is created it is possible to lock and import it into the function block selection field for use in future project files The resulting function block is called a Customized function block Function block diagram inputi gi s i Output 1 2l Se Input 2 aj R E Output 2 Input 4 aj Machine 1 A customized function block has the following characteristics e Itcan have a maximum of 8 inputs and 8 outputs e t cannot contain the Fast Shut off function block nor another grouped or customized
6. Red 1 Hz with firmware 2 V2 00 0 Red Green 1 Hz e the LEDs of the affected inputs will start flashing Green 1 Hz e the module s Status input data in the logic editor will be Low Resetting the error A discrepancy error timeout or sequence error is reset if the Inactive status has been reached 272 Chapter 10 I O modules 10 2 ON OFF filter and OFF ON filter Several unintentional brief signal changes occur when opening or closing a component fitted with contacts as the result of the bouncing of the contacts As this may influence the evaluation of the input you can use the ON OFF filter for falling edges i e transitions from High to Low and the OFF ON filter for rising edges i e transitions from Low to High to eliminate this effect gt To activate or deactivate the ON OFF filter or the OFF ON filter either click on the checkbox or on the 3D buttons on the right side If the ON OFF filter or the OFF ON filter is active a signal change will be recognized only if it is confirmed by three consecutive identical samples of the input with a sample rate of 4 ms meaning constant signal for at least the duration of the filter time chosen For this purpose the state of the input is evaluated at an interval of 4ms On WS0 XTIO and WSO XTDI with firmware version lt 2 xx the filter time is not adjustable but is fixed at 8 ms uN Consider extended reaction times when using the input filters ATTENTION Due to the mo
7. The double dual channel evaluation synchronization evaluation evaluates the correct sequence of the two input signals for each of the two input pairs as described in Section 9 9 2 Additionally the correct sequence of the two dual channel evaluations in relation to each other is monitored It is expected that if one of the two dual channel evaluations has caused a switching off the other dual channel evaluation will follow accordingly An optional synchronization time can be defined The synchronization time defines for how long the two dual channel evaluations may have not synchronous states without this being considered as an error The synchronization time differs from the discrepancy time It evaluates the relation between the two dual channel evaluations while the discrepancy time applies to an input pair of one dual channel evaluation 190 Chapter 9 Table 82 Double dual channel evaluation synchronization evaluation Note 191 Logic programming Function blocks The following truth table describes the synchronization conditions for double dual channel evaluations 2 pairs 1 2 3 Satus onthe Status orme Synchronization Synchronization Enable Synchronization dual channel dual channel RESE 5 p Z z timer status output error output evaluation pair 1 evaluation pair 1 macie a eee er 0 Inactive 0 Unchanged discrepant discrepant lt Inactive g Active Synchronization Discrepant 0
8. 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 More than one input High or no input 0 Last output combination High for shorter than the set discrepancy time More than one input High or no input High for equal or longer than the set discrepancy time Error output combination Sequence timing diagram Input 1 l l Input 2 et E Output A r oL JF Loo Output 2 mle U Stop Run TDisc Discrepancy time Error output combination All outputs Low e Ifthe inputs of the function block are connected to inputs of an safety I O module which are connected to test outputs and the faulty input combination is the result of a test pulse error stuck at high which leads to a Low input value the test pulse error needs to be reset first e g by briefly interrupting the corresponding input line or test output line If the inputs of the function block are connected to inputs of an safety I O module which are connected to test outputs then a cross circuit between the used inputs is detected only if a user mode is selected that activates one of these inputs 168 Chapter 9 Figure 152 Function block diagram for the Switch synchronization function block Table 73 Parameters of the Switch synchronization function block Note 169 Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 10 Switch synchronization
9. 93 Flexi Link 7 4 Flexi Link functions This section gives a comprehensive overview over the Flexi Link functions in the Setting and Monitoring Tool These functions are divided into Flexi Link system functions and functions that are related to the single stations in a Flexi Link system You can switch between the view for the Flexi Link system and the individual station views using the additional buttons that appear in the toolbar of the Setting and Monitoring Tool if a Flexi Link project is open Flexi Link system Flexi Link station A to D Flexi Link system functions In the Flexi Link system view you can switch between the different Flexi Link system functions using the buttons that are displayed under the menu bar jonitoring Tool 1 3 0 New Project 1 gE f ct WES Transter FE Upload proces cs image B Network settings EF11 2 O EFI Flexi link ID EFL 10274 Flexi Link ID EFL 18275 e The Flexi Link System overview provides information on the configured connected stations and their status See Section 7 4 1 e The Flexi Link process image allows you to monitor the information that is exchanged between the connected Flexi Link stations See Section 7 4 2 e Inthe Flexi Link Network settings view you can scan the Flexi Link network for connected stations view and assign the Flexi Link address to the connected stations and distribute the stations to their individual positions A to
10. Basic components Station 1 3 0 208 Software component for CPUO and CPU1 main modules 1 3 0 208 Software component for 4RO relay module 1 3 0 208 Software component for GCC1 Network Modules 1 3 0 208 Software component for GMOD gateway 1 3 0 208 Software component for XTDI extension module 1 3 0 208 Software component for XTIO extension module 1 3 0 208 General Information User group Authorized client Application name CPU1 module Application description Overall Checksum CRC 0x3B112584 Configuration state Not verified Device state Not verified Configuration date 4 26 2011 4 31 PM O a o o 20 X1 X2 A1 A2 A1 A2 J XI X2 A1 A3 Xt X2 Al AJ wht n 2 8 4 n 28 M n 2 8 M Set device to verified Note The configuration of the connected elements for example EFI sensors is not Figure 264 Upload and verify failed included in the process Their verification is carried out in the same way as the configuration and verification via the serial interfaces of the devices gt If differences between the project data and the read back configuration data are detected a corresponding message including information about possible actions is displayed Verification of the configuration is not possible then Observe the information in the error message for the further procedure Terminate the dialog box by clicking Close EB Upload and verify result Upload and verify of the configuration failed The configuration in
11. Function block diagram for the Cross muting function block with optional input C1 Figure 206 Example of Cross muting with optional input C1 Table 104 Conditions for Cross muting with optional input C1 Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 10 8 Cross muting direction of movement only forwards or backwards Function block diagram Representation of the application Figure 206 shows an example of the sensor layout for the Cross muting function block The optional input C1 is used as an additional protection for the muting system against manipulation Transported material C1 ESPE e g safety light curtain The protective effect of the protective device is muted when the muting sensors are operated in a defined sequence The optional input C1 always has to be activated before both muting sensors of the first sensor pair e g A1 and A2 become High Input conditions for muting sensors Condition Description C1 amp A1 amp A2 Input C1 always has to be activated before both muting sensors of the first sensor pair e g A1 and A2 become High A1 amp A2 Muting applies as long as this condition is fulfilled and the requirement mentioned above existed Equations and prerequisites for calculating the distance L4 gt V X Tin Muting sensor vxt gt L L3 L gt L4 Tin Light curtain lt Tin Muting sensor 222 Chapter 9 Note Figure
12. Function test e No function test e Function test required Discrepancy time pair 1 Can be set separately for the inputs 1A 1B and 2A 2B Discrepancy time pair 2 Values 0 disabled 10 to 30 000 ms in 10 ms steps If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Synchronization time 0 disabled 10 to 30 000 ms in 10 ms steps If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Number of outputs 1to6 Use fault present e With e Without Figure 183 Sequence timing diagram for the Safety gate monitoring function block Category 2 single channel with function test Figure 184 Sequence timing diagram for the Safety gate monitoring function block Category 4 dual channel equivalent 1 pair without function test Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Function test In some applications safeguarding devices require cyclic physical testing in order to verify that the device continues to operate properly If the Safety gate monitoring function block is configured with the Function test required parameter the input signal s must change once per machine cycle in a way that no enable condition exists anymore and back e g as a result of opening and closing of a safety gate Typically the Function test request input is connected to the machine cycle contact If according to the configuration a function test is required this has to be performed under
13. Max signal frequency 12 5 Hz x 4 teeth revolution 50 Hz Smallest tiow 1 50 Hz x 175 360 9 7 ms gt greater than the logic execution time Vv Smallest thigh 1 50 Hz x 175 360 9 7 ms gt greater than the logic execution time Vv Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 gt Determine the time between signal changes for the speed limit Signal frequency for release 0 25 Hz x 4 teeth revolution 1 Hz Max input pattern period 1 1 Hz x 185 360 514 ms Time between signal changes 514 ms 10 ms 524 ms gt Min time between signal changes 530 ms rounded up to multiples of 10 ms Example 2 1 3 gap 180 phase shift 8 teeth per revolution Switching tolerances 2 gt teeth 118 to 122 corresponds to tiow thigh Signal change 118 to 122 corresponds to t to t4 Maximum shaft speed 120 rpm 2 Hz Shaft speed for release 12 rpm 0 2 Hz Logic execution time 16 ms Check the maximum signal frequency for incremental signals Max signal frequency 2 Hz x 8 teeth revolution 16 Hz Smallest tiow 1 16 Hz x 118 360 20 5 ms gt greater than the logic execution time v Smallest thigh 1 16 Hz x 238 360 41 3 ms gt greater than the logic execution time v Determine the time between signal changes for the speed limit Signal frequency for release 0 2 Hz x 8 teeth revolution 1 6 Hz Max input pattern period 1 1 6 Hz x 122 360 212 ms Time between si
14. Note Figure 99 Function block diagram for the NOT function block Table 20 Truth table for the NOT function block 127 Logic programming Function blocks 9 6 Timer values and logic execution time The following has to be observed when selecting time monitoring functions for the discrepancy time synchronization time pulse duration muting time etc The times e have to be greater than the logic execution time e have a precision of 10 ms in the evaluation in addition to the logic execution time The logic execution time depends on the number and type of the function blocks used It is a multiple of 4 ms If the used logic execution time exceeds 100 then the logic execution time is increased by 4 ms The logic execution time is displayed in the logic editor in the FB preview window It has a precision of 100 ppm parts per million Effect of tested sensors During a test signal the signal bit is frozen i e the value that was present prior to the test gap is retained for the duration of the test signal and possibly also the max off on delay As a result a signal change can be delayed by this time i e a pulse can be longer or shorter 9 7 Logic function blocks 9 7 1 NOT Function block diagram General description The inverted input value applies at the output If for example the input is High the output is Low Truth table The following applies for the truth table in this
15. Stop gt Run T lt T lt lt Tiso T2 Tois T 2 TDisc T lt Toisc TDisc TDisc Discrepancy time 196 Chapter 9 Figure 185 Logic connections for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block 197 Logic programming Function blocks 9 9 8 Tolerant dual channel monitor Function block diagram General description The Tolerant dual channel monitor function block can be used to evaluate switches and sensors It offers dual channel monitoring that is less restrictive than the normal dual channel monitor on the input output I O modules e g WSO XTIO or WSO XTDI or the function blocks Switch evaluation Emergency stop Light grid evaluation Magnetic switch Two hand type IIIA and Two hand type IIIC see section 9 9 2 In the case of tolerant dual channel monitor the correct sequence of the two input signals is evaluated During this process it is expected if one of the two signals has caused the switch off that the other signal will follow The tolerant dual channel monitor differs from the normal dual channel monitor in the following points e The switch off condition is allowed to be met on the two inputs with a delay It is not imperative for the switch off condition to be met simultaneously on both inputs at least at one point in time e Optionally an AND mode can be activated to make the evaluation even more tolerant in certain circumstances In this case even switching off only one input is ac
16. Teaching is required Teaching will reset the error bit even if the found station has been already suspended again At least one station in the system is missing To continue operation Teaching is required This means that at least one of the Station X missing status bits see below is High as well Station X missing The station with the Flexi Link address X A B C or D is missing In this case the process image of the corresponding Flexi Link station is set to Low and the EFI I O error bit is set to High This means that the Station missing status bit see above is High as well Station X taught The station with the Flexi Link address X A B C or D is suspended In this case the default process image of the corresponding Flexi Link station is used Using these status bits you can set up your own diagnostic system e g by connecting these status bits to a Log generator function block or by switching on a warning lamp if Teaching is required or active Note After the transition from the Stop state to the Run state a station is considered as missing it it has not been found within 3 minutes 105 For a description of the other CPU status bits see Section 5 6 4 Flexi Link Chapter 7 7 5 Flexi Link troubleshooting This section deals with some common causes for malfunctions of the Flexi Link network and how to diagnose and correct them For an overview of the LED error displays please refer
17. gt On the Interfaces menu click RS 232 0 to open the dialog box for the RS 232 configuration gt Click the MELSEC WS to RS 232 button on the left to display the routing configuration for the input data 4 2 Project Device Extras MH Be H com settings Bf connect f disconnect By transfer Hes upload JB Hardware configuration Logic editor ff Network Modules ES a 2 d Reset to default Clear all jij 19 le data Report g Diagnostics gt gt Data Recorder CPU3 Module ow only available data MoRS292 Input data z o 0 Module 1 XTIONI oo BGGG0880 a Module 1 Tiong 1 Module2 oo BGEG0800 g 2 Module 3 oo GGGG8080 E Module status 3 Module 4 oo GGEG0000 4 Module 5 oo GGE08080 MELSEC As Modslestates 5 Module 6 oo GBE00880 6 oo Gaana 1 oo GEE08080 oo GEGG0880 oo BGGG0800 oo BGEG0800 oo BGGG0800 oo BGEG0200 oo GGE08e80 tw ARANANAM Module 1 DXTIO 1 MiniTwin XTIO 1 1718 tik RE18 RE28 RE2 XTIO 1 1616 Reset XTIO 1 13 E Stop 521 XTIO 1 12 GEe0cogagea pe 2 Input Output Operator 19 Offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified Basically this dialog is divided into three areas Available data 1 RS 232 data 2 and Tag names 3 The upper left corner of the dialog holds the toolbar 4 The toolbar ee H E Reset to default Clear all
18. gt The table of contents lists all functions provided by the Setting and Monitoring Tool Use the table of contents to obtain information about the basic functions 1 4 Scope and version These user s manuals are original manuals These user s manuals apply for the Setting and Monitoring Tool software version V1 2 0 or higher CPUO and CPU1 with firmware version V1 11 or higher and CPU3 with firmware version V3 02 or higher This version of the user s manuals describes version V1 7 0 of the Setting and Monitoring Tool software 18 Chapter 1 19 EDM EFI ESPE OSSD Rev Recommendation Note Action A ATTENTION Menus and commands Key About this document 1 5 Abbreviations used External device monitoring Enhanced function interface Electro sensitive protective equipment e g C4000 Output signal switching device Revolutions 1 Rev 360 1 6 Symbols and notations used Recommendations are designed to give you some assistance in your decision making process with respect to a certain function or a technical measure Note provides special information on a device or a software function Instructions for taking action are shown by an arrow Read carefully and follow the instructions for action ATTENTION An ATTENTION indicates concrete or potential dangers It is intended to protect you from harm and help avoid damage to devices and systems Read warnings carefully and follow them Otherwi
19. i 9 A The toolbar contains buttons for the following actions from left to right e The Load user configuration and Save user configuration buttons allow you to load and or save a configuration in XML format including the used tag names If you load a configuration all previously made changes that have not been saved will be lost You can not undo this action e Using the Import and Export buttons you can import and export the tag names used as a CSV file comma separated values This allows you to import and use the assigned tag names in a Programmable controller program The Import button is only available for the RS 232 to MELSEC WS routing configuration 48 Chapter 5 49 The graphical user interface e Reset to default restores the default routing configuration You will be asked for confirmation If you click Yes all previously made changes that have not been saved will be lost You can not undo this action e Clear all clears the configuration i e deletes all assigned bytes in the RS 232 data area You will be asked for confirmation e Delete routing deletes the currently selected byte in the RS 232 data area e The Undo and Redo buttons allow you to undo or redo changes you made to your configuration Available data This area offers all sources from which data may be routed into the network It is divided in two views holding the available input and output data You can switch between these views using
20. 18 months after manufacturing whichever is less e The onerous repair term after discontinuation of production shall be for four 4 years e Mitsubishi shall mainly replace the product that needs a repair e t may take some time to respond to the problem or repair the product depending on the condition and timing lt Specifications gt e General specifications of the products differ Operating ambient temperature 25 to 55 C 0 to 55 C 0 to 55 C Operating ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH 5 to 95 RH 5 to 95 RH Storage ambient temperature 25 to 70 C 25 to 75 C 40 to 75 C Storage ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH 5 to 95 RH 5 to 95 RH 1 When the WS0 GCC100202 is included in the system operating ambient temperature will be 0 to 55 C e EMC standards that are applicable to the products differ 1 eee MELSEC G MELSEC QS EMC standards EN61000 6 2 EN55011 EN61131 2 e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and AN CAUTION I Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions l N WARNING resulting in death or severe injury l i ae Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions A CAUTIO
21. Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks Parameters of the function block Table 112 Parameter Possible values Parameters of the N break function block Number of breaks 1to8 Mode e Standard e Sweden Max Up Stroke muting time 0 disabled 1 to 7200 s The Upstroke input is available only if the value is not set to 0 PSDI time monitoring 0 disabled 1 to 500s Condition for Release 2 e Without start input e Necessary for first start e Necessary for every start Start of first PSDI pulse e After Top has been reached PSDI input Low High e After the start of upstroke Restart interlock e Always e Deactivation on upstroke only for PSDI e Without Min restart pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Start position e Everywhere Only on top Min break pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Use fault present e With e Without uN Ensure that the transitions of the signals for restarting fulfill the requirements ATTENTION In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Input parameters and input signa
22. Function block diagram Input 1A g Input 1B z Input 2A g Input 2B g Input 3A gi Input 3B g Cascade input gi Fault present General description The Switch synchronization function block was designed to improve the integration of SICK safety scanners e g S3000 It monitors the input signals for changes If a change of any input signal has been detected the function block freezes the values of its outputs until the configurable Hold time for outputs has expired Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Cascade input e With e Without Antivalence check e With e Without If this function is active the optional Antivalence error output can be used Hold time for outputs 10 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms The value has to be greater than the logic execution time Invert input 1A Each input of this function block can be inverted see Section 9 5 2 Invert input 3B Number of inputs or 1to6 Number of outputs Use fault present e With e Without An inverted input will invert the corresponding output signal as well E g if input 1A is High but configured as inverted it will be evaluated as Low and output 1A will be set to Low Hold time for outputs The Hold time for outputs defines the time delay between the first change of any input signal and the latching of the input signals i e the reaction of the outputs This can be used to compensate dela
23. If the configuration is verified the MELSEC WS safety controller will go into the Run state automatically after the voltage supply has been switched on If the configuration is not verified the system must be set into the Run state manually using the Setting and Monitoring Tool 12 2 Behaviour on startup When the MELSEC WS safety controller changes from the Stop state to the Run state e The First logic cycle status bit of the CPU module is High for the logic execution time This status bit is available as a CPU input element in the logic editor All timers and states including the error states of the function blocks are reset 12 3 Software reset of the CPU module It is possible to reset the CPU module via software i e without interrupting the voltage supply if the Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected with the CPU module How to perform a software reset gt In the Hardware configuration view right click on the CPU module in the Configuration area and select the Software reset command from the context menu gt If you are not logged in as Administrator you will be prompted to log in now gt A safety message will appear Click on Yes to reset the CPU module Before you reset the CPU module check whether the system is in a safe state If you reset the CPU module the outputs e g the Enable output could change their status The Software reset command should only be used when the hazardous area has been checked vi
24. Is D IS 2970 5 1 0 modules xTIO Revision Viox eh 8 8 v Out 4 a Parking area 5 Relays E oz OF gt v v bat C4000 Reset and ty swit t E Modules sat Elements info fom ey eet Motor Lamp Fabel Machine Operator 2 Offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified e A double click on the CPU module in the configuration area will open the logic editor e A double click on any network module in the configuration area will open the network module configuration view for the respective network module Switch view bi The Switch view button toggles between an enlarged and a reduced view of the configuration area Settings The Settings button opens a dialog where you can adjust the settings for your project Here you can e create your own tag name format e enable or disable customized elements see Section 5 5 6 e enable or disable the import of customized function blocks e enable or disable RS 232 routing for the CPU e enable additional XT modules see Section 5 5 1 e save the current view and or activate a saved view e change the path for the folders where user defined elements are saved e export the module status bits as a CSV file e g for use in a Programmable controller 30 Chapter 5 Figure 7 Edit tag names button Figure 8 Online edit mode button in the hardware view 31 Exercise The graphical user in
25. Station C The system will detect that these stations are missing and set their process image to failsafe values zeros The remaining stations will show an EFI error EFI LEDs flashing red and their EFI status bits for the switched off station s e g Station C missing will become High and Station missing will become High as well Note Figure 80 Flexi Link system status information in the logic editor Flexi Link Chapter 7 gt Now press the Teach button on any of the remaining stations The system will now continue to operate as if the missing stations were still present Their real process image will however be replaced with the static default values that you have configured before see Section 7 4 5 The EFI status bits of the remaining stations will now show which stations have been suspended e g Station C missing and Station missing will become Low again and Station C taught becomes High gt To bring a missing and consequently suspended station back into operation reconnect its power supply As soon as the station has finished powering up the other stations will detect its presence and show an EFI error The EFI status bit Station C taught remains High while the system status bit Teach required becomes High gt Now press the Teach button again The system will reintegrate the suspended station and continue operation The Teach required system status bit will become Low as well as the respective EFI status bits
26. This is the case if the Release condition fulfilled output is High i e all activated Release inputs are High but the Enable output is still Low Typically this output is used to control a signal lamp Enable output The Enable output becomes High if the Release condition fulfilled output is High and a valid reset pulse has been detected at the Reset input provided that all activated Release inputs remain High The Min reset pulse time defines the minimum required duration of the pulse at the Reset input Valid values are 100 ms and 350 ms If the pulse duration is shorter than the configured minimum pulse time or longer than 30 s the pulse is ignored The Enable output becomes Low if one or more Release inputs become Low A ATTENTION Figure 133 Sequence timing diagram for the Reset function block Figure 134 Function block diagram for the Restart function block Table 64 Parameters of the Restart function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Ensure that the transitions of the signals for resetting fulfill the requirements In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines
27. e The discrepancy time on switching off is activated and has elapsed All error states and error outputs Discrepancy error input A Discrepancy error input B Fault present are reset on a successful change to the active state Release output changes from low to high In addition both inputs must have previously switched off simultaneously Discrepancy time Input A eS 2 es es t Input B Status Enable output t Discrepancy error input A Discrepancy error input B t AND mode If for the Evaluation mode the Dual channel AND mode option has been selected then the two inputs are monitored based either on the tolerant dual channel rules or only as a logic AND depending on the Actuator released input If the AND mode is active then it is possible to change back to the active state by switching off and switching back on only one input without the need for the other input to switch as well If one or both of the inputs switches off in all cases the Release output is also switched off The value for switching off due to Input B is also dependent on the input mode in the AND mode The AND mode is activated if a falling edge transition from high to low occurs on the Actuator released input and the Release output is high If the Release output is high at this point in time then this means that the switch off has been triggered by a different signal path that is also acting on the actuator
28. e g Station C missing remains Low and Station C taught also becomes Low If a station is missing not because its power supply has been switched off but due to an interruption of its EFI connection it will most likely have gone into an error state In this case you will have to reset this station by interrupting its power supply for at least 3 s before it can be reintegrated into the system 7 4 7 Flexi Link teaching status and diagnostics Each CPU in a Flexi Link system signals via status bits whether Teaching is required and which station is missing or is suspended has been taught These status bits are available as inputs of the respective CPU in the logic editor Inputs w A 9 ceur Status EFI 1 Status EFI 2 a Verify status Static 0 Static 1 First logic cycle Station missing B Station C missing B Station B missing i B Station A missing B Station C taught B Station B taught B Station taught B StationB B StationC CPU marker Inputs gt Function block gt Outputs FB preview 104 Chapter 7 Table 16 Meaning of the Teaching status bits Flexi Link CPU status bit Meaning Teach required Station missing A station that has been suspended before has reappeared in the system In this case the process image of the all Flexi Link station is set to Low and the EFI I O error bit is set to High To continue operation
29. gt 3 Reset XTIO 1 13 E Stop E521 XTIO 1 15 1 lt s interlock safety switch Xi Interlock with locking XT f Inductive proximity switcist s Inductive proximity switcist s Sequence timing diagrams Incremental inputs not monitored Drive released Incremental 1 2 3 4 Stop detected Min time between signal changes Ramp down ended Drive released Stuck at low e g broken wire Incremental 1 g Incremental 2 Plausibility error incremental 1 2 Min time between signal changes gt l 4 Ramp down ended Figure 165 Logic connections for the frequency monitor function block Table 78 Parameters for the frequency monitor function block Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 13 Function block diagram Chapter 9 Frequency monitor General description Using the frequency monitor function block the frequency or the period duration of up to two signals can be monitored separately Optionally it is also possible to monitor the pulse duration thigh This feature can be used for instance to evaluate signal sources that output a pulsed signal at a specific frequency as an enable sig
30. if the related Feedback 1 or Feedback 2 input is High and the related Control input changes from Low to High subsequently Output 1a 1b or Output 2a 2b become Low if the related Control input is Low or if a fault is present Feedback error output is High or Directional error output is High The related control input for Output 1a 1b is always Control 1 The related control input for Output 2a 2b depends on the configured valve type e For Double valve Control 1 For Directional valve Control 2 164 Chapter 9 165 A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Feedback error Directional error and Fault present Generally it is expected that the Feedback 1 2 input always takes the inverted value of the related Control input before the configured Max switch on feedback delay Ton or Max switch off feedback delay Torr has expired The Feedback error output becomes High if e the Control input changes from Low to High and the related Feedback input is Low irrespective of Ton and Torr Or e Ton is greater than zero and the Control input changes from Low to High and the related Feedback input does not change from High to Low before Ton has expired Or e Torr is greater than zero and the Control input changes from High to Low and the related Feedback input does not change from Low to High before Torr has expired Or e Continuous monitoring when valve is active is active and the Control input is High
31. 00 PM 284 Chapter 15 Annex ae E Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM Content 285 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM 1 Bill of material oO a 2 a a oga EIES 2 BHM Al A EE 2T XI gt AT A2 MITSUBISHI EAN ws cv XTIO Inputoutput expansion module 1 2 sensor muting 2 sensor muting XTIO gure 1 Interiock Dual channel interock XTIOPZL Q14 112 Page 3 286 Chapter 15 287 Annex aT Title Tag name Intefiock Dual channel interlock XTIO 2 Q24314 Lamp Singe chamei Lamp XTIOP21 03 C4000 Safety Light CAD00 XTIOP ISI xTIO xTIOB Reset Single channel Singe channel NO Single Single channel NO XTIO channel Scanner Type 3 Motor contactor Dual Motor contactor XTIO channel Baia 2 Diagnostics No error history available 3 Configuration Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM Hi 3 1 Installed software components Tool Version Basic components Station Software component for CPUO and CPU1 main modules Software component for 4RO relay module Software component for GCC1 Network Modules Software component for GMOD gateway Software component for XTDI extension module Software component for XTIO extension module 3 2 General Information User group Application name Application description Overall Checksum CRC Configuration state Configuration date 1 3 0 200 1 3 0 200 1 3 0 200 1 3 0 200 1 3 0 200 1 3 0
32. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 57 149 Truth table for the Binary decoder with 3 inputs in Priority mode Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Evaluation of more than three inputs If 4 or 5 inputs are used up to four Binary decoder function blocks can be combined in order to encode binary codes with values from 0 to 31 Figure 124 Combination of four Binary decoder function blocks pall i XTIO 12 XTIONIIS Value range 0 7 XTIO 1 14 XTIO 1 15 s ia Value range 8 15 input Bg Input C Input D Value range 16 23 el Input E Output 1 Output 2 a Output 3 Output 4 ours Value range 24 31 wg ome Output 8 When using multiple Binary decoder function blocks in combination you have to configure the Value range option of each function block for the value range it shall cover This range depends on the values of inputs D and E Table 58 Input D Outputs Value range of the Binary decoder function block 0 0 7 depending on input D 1 8 15 Table 59 InputE InputD Outputs Value range of the Binary decoder function block 0 0 1 7 depending on inputs D and 0 1 8 15 E 1 0 16 23 1 1 24 31 f Input D and Input E are set to the same value as the Value range parameter e g if Input E 1 Input D 0 and Value range is set to 16 23 the function block will behave as shown in the truth tables above depending on the va
33. 100 ms e 350 ms Min reload pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms 136 Chapter 9 137 A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Inputs Up and Down A rising edge Low to High at the Up input increases the value of the internal counter by 1 A rising edge Low to High at the Down input decreases the value of the internal counter by 1 If a rising edge Low to High occurs at the Up input as well as at the Down input applies only to the Up and down event counter function block the value of the internal counter remains unchanged Reset to zero A valid pulse sequence with a Low High Low transition at the Reset to zero input sets the internal counter to O This happens irrespective of whether the Overflow value has been reached or not and also irrespective of whether Reset to zero after overflow has been configured to Manual or Automatic The Min restart pulse time defines the minimum required duration of the pulse at the Reset to zero input Valid values are 100 ms and 350 ms If the pulse duration is shorter than the configured minimum pulse time or longer than 30 s the pulse is ignored Reload A valid pulse sequence with a Low High Low transition at the Reload input sets the internal counter to the configured value of the Reload value parameter This happens irrespective of whether Counter reload has been configured to Manual or Automatic The Min reload pulse time defines the minimum required du
34. 118 Hardware configuration view of inputs and outputs linked to Fast shut off A ATTENTION Notes Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 At this point the selected inputs and outputs are linked to each other such that the output cannot be moved to another position and the inputs must stay on the WSO XTIO module in the hardware configuration The elements which are linked are shown in the hardware configuration in orange o ome X1 X2 A1 A2 gl a nBK Al A2 X1_X2_ A1 A2 MITSUBISHI hepe MS XTIO 6 6 7 i8 A BIA B Qt 2 3 N i5 16 17 18 1 EFI 2 A B AB Q1Q2 Q304 DH These links are broken when the Fast shut off function block is edited or deleted Fast shut off with bypass In some applications it may be necessary to bypass the Fast shut off This could be e g in a safe machine setup mode in which the machine can be operated only in jog mode To this purpose the Fast shut off with bypass function block is available It is used and configured in the same way as the Fast shut off function block The only difference is that one of the inputs of the Fast shut off with bypass function block is used for the Bypass function If the Bypass input is High the Fast shut off with bypass function block is bypassed Ensure the system or machine is in a safe condition when using the bypass function As long as the bypass function is active any stopping condition e g the infringem
35. 5 ng 2 6 A ductive proximity Reset TOTES Motor contactor XTIO naas result 0 6 result 02 4 RS23206 H RS23202 H RS232 1 6 4 RS232 12 H Rs23226 psy py 12 5 12 4 24 5 24 1 15 1 1 25 e recut 05 resuit 0 1 H RS2320 5 H RS2320 1 H RS222 15 H RS232 1 1 H R523225 e4 nza n2g EE 1 4 19 RxD GNO TxD H RS232 0 4 H RS2320 0 H R323214 4 R3232 1 0 H RS23224 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM R3 B Byte 3 B7 1823237 RS23223 RA Ba H RS23236 H RS23222 21 H RS23221 BS H RS23235 Po H Rs23220 B44 RS23234 BO Rs23230 B3 H RS23233 BA HRS23232 BI H Rs2323 1 3 4 O module 3 4 1 XTIO 1 3 4 1 1 General information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Address number version version WSO XTIO 0401 0000 v 1 000 0 00 130 200V 1x 1 3 4 1 2 Inputs Mode Title Tag name 2 we 13 ao Reset Single channel E p 3 ww amp 4 Ee EDM Single channel 7 5 4 w 7 o Inductve proximity swich Single channel NO oy 5 W 18 no Inductve proximity swich Single channel NO z oy 7 x n Intertock Dual channe x2 2 2 8 xi IS ES21 Dual channel z X f E Stop 3413 Outputs Mode Title Tag name 6 i ai 4 intestock Dual channe 9 a ae Motor contactor th ah aaa 3 4 14 Power Supply Title Tag name XTIO 1 Power Supply a 3 4 1 5 Wirin
36. Application is If the error is not eliminated after multiple stopped All outputs are repetition replace the module which switched off displays gt Red 2 Hz If this is not the case use the diagnostic functions of the Setting and Monitoring Tool to narrow down the respective module CV LED Meaning Notes O Configuration in progress Please wait Yellow 2 Hz Storing of configuration data in the memory plug non volatile memory Supply voltage may not be interrupted until the storage process has been completed amp Yellow 1 Hz Yellow Symbol description Unverified configuration Verified configuration Verify configuration with the Setting and Monitoring Tool O LED off LED lights up LED flashes Table 116 Run button and Stop button Note A ATTENTION Note Device states of the MELSEC WS safety controller Chapter 12 12 1 Changing the device state Specific state changes in the MELSEC WS safety controller are carried out manually in the Setting and Monitoring Tool These changes in the device state are e change from Stop to Run e change from Run to Stop In order to change the device state click on the Stop application or Run application button next to the representation of the modules in the hardware configuration Icon Function Description Run Sets the system into the Run state Stop Sets the system into the Stop state
37. B2 B B A A A A A A A A C C1 A A A A A A A A C C C Conveyor A A A A A C A A C C C ESPE A A A A A C C A C C C Override input A A A A A A C A A C A A The specified signals may not be installed in a common wire unless protected wiring is used B The specified signals may not be installed in a common wire unless protected wiring or sequence monitoring is used C The specified signals may be installed in a common wire Not applicable 216 Chapter 9 Table 100 Stop to Run transition behaviour for muting functions Table 101 Error states and information on resetting for Muting function blocks 217 Logic programming Function blocks 9 10 4 State transition from Stop to Run If the MELSEC WS safety controller changes from the Stop state to the Run state the following behavioural patterns can be realized depending on the state of the muting sensors and of the OSSDs of the sensors e g safety outputs of a safety light curtain Table 100 shows details of the system behaviour during the transition from Stop to Run State after the change from the Stop state to the System behaviour e g no object in the protective field Low e g object detected 9 10 5 The muting condition is partially fulfilled The muting condition is fulfilled All muting sensors are Low sequence is possible Muting is blocked Run state Inp
38. CPU in a Flexi Link system signals the current system status via status bits that can be used as inputs in the logic editor see Section 7 4 7 How to configure the Teach function gt Connect a Teach button to the inputs of each station in the Flexi Link system that shall be able to activate the Teach function The Teach button can be e g a dual channel key operated switch gt In the logic editor for these stations use a Restart function block to connect the Teach button input to this station s Teaching output as shown in Figure 79 Teaching A Teach el 4 Dual channel NO XTIO S k Teach nal If the Teach button is pressed the Teaching output will become High for one logic cycle The rising edge Low to High on the Teaching output triggers the Teach function Ensure that the transitions of the signals for Teaching fulfill the requirements In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs How to use the Teach function gt In arunning Flexi Link system switch off the power supply of one or more stations e g
39. Eccentric Param Possible values press contact function block Dynamic cam input e With e Without Min reset pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Reset input e With e Without Disable monitoring input e With e Without Use fault present e With e Without Enable output The Enable output is used to stop the press and is connected to another complementary press function block e g Press setup or Press single stroke If no error was detected the Enable output is High If any error in the contact signal sequence is detected the Enable output changes to Low the corresponding error output changes to High and the Reset required output changes to High A valid reset sequence at the Reset input is then required The Enable output also changes to Low if Monitoring gets disabled Reset input A valid reset sequence at the Reset input is a Low High Low transition with a minimum pulse duration of 100 ms or 350 ms and maximum 30 s Shorter and longer pulses are ignored AN Ensure that the transitions of the signals for resetting fulfill the requirements of ATTENTION the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross ci
40. Function Blocks 3 Execution Time ms 4 3 3 2 1 seite1 No Name Output Settings 0 Reset LO Reset XTIO TH3 0 0 POS 1 Input 2 min Reset Pulse Time 100 ms 11 E Stop ES21 XTI0 1 1506 0 1 Not connected 12 Intestock Safety Swich XTIO 1 1112 2 Not connected 1 EDM LO EDM XTIO TL 0 0 Not connected Max feedback delay 300 ms 1 2 POB O Oulput 0 0 1 Motor contactor XTIO 1 Q304 0 1 POS 2 Input 0 0 2 Not connected 2 Ramp Down 0 POB 1 Output 1 0 0 interock wtih Locking XTIO 1 Q1 Number of incremental Inputs 1 Detection pair of encoder Inputs 11 Inductive proximity swlich XTIO 1 I7 0 1 Not connected Tolerance Time 1000 x 10 ms 1 2 Inductive proximity swdlich XTIO 1 18 Ssmo Heo ay gurage gt ret T eme maeseni E ameeun O Ameo pauey A nre ee one 3 3 3 CPU1 10 Tag name System integrity based on Serial based on check based on Number Configuration Type Key 24v f Ai CPU Power Supply w A2 3 3 3 1 Wiring diagram 308 Chapter 15 309 Annex Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM WS0 CPUT 3 3 4 CPU1 Routing 3 3 41 CPU to RS232 0 99 Byte 0 Module 0 XTIO 1 Inductive proximity r P7 A oT ws p3 EDMXTIO ez Byte 12 Module 0 XTIO 1 127 12 6 n23 n223 Byte 24 Byte 0 PA7 resuto7 24 6 P43 qe resuto3 paz 3 3 4 2 RS232 to CPU 0 3 0 Byte 0 7 Rs23207 p3 41RS23203 1 Byte 1 17 H RS2321 7 3 H RS23213 2 Byte 2 R7 HRS23227 ps py 11
41. I O device J c4o00 xtiop1 112 x mead nh 2B 4K Single channel NOXTIO MUA g Single channel NO XTIO Input 18 nRRBM Enable w Discrepancy error pair 1 The dual channel evaluation evaluates the correct sequence of the two input signals It is expected that if one of the two signals has caused a switching off the other signal will follow accordingly Which values the two signals must have depends on the type of the dual channel evaluation There are two possibilities e equivalent evaluation e complementary evaluation An optional discrepancy time can be configured The discrepancy time defines for how long the two inputs may have discrepant values after one of the both input signals has changed without this being considered as an error 188 Chapter 9 Table 81 Dual channel evaluation Note 189 Logic programming Function blocks The following truth table describes the discrepancy conditions for the dual channel equivalent and the dual channel complementary input evaluation Evaluation Input Input Discrepancy Evaluation Enable output Discrepancy type 1A 1B timer status error output Equivalent 0 0 0 Inactive 0 Unchanged lt Discrepancy 7 2 0 1 i Discrepant 0 Unchanged time lt Discrepanc i 1 0 pansy Discrepant 0 Unchanged time 1 1 0 Active 1 0 2 Discre X X i soled Error 0 1 time timeout Compleme
42. Logic programming Function blocks 9 14 Simulation of the configuration Within the logic editor it is possible to simulate the programmed logic offline Inputs can be set to High or Low and the resulting switching of the outputs can be monitored Additionally the timer and counter values of the used function blocks are displayed on the function blocks while the simulation is running gt Click on the Start simulation mode icon M in the toolbar to activate the simulation mode The background of the logic editor will change to green and the simulation toolbar will appear 1 i a dms 20ms 40ms 200ms 400ms 4 aO To start a simulation of the logic click the green Play button 1 for simulation at full speed near to real time The timer 2 keeps track of the elapsed time The timer can be reset using the blue Reset button 3 To stop a simulation click the red Stop button 5 Time control of the simulation For logic processes which are too fast to see at normal speed there are two possibilities e Use the sliding bar 4 to slow the simulated passage of time e Itis possible to execute a simulation in time increments To do so stop the simulation by clicking on the red Stop button and click on one of the time increment buttons to the right of the sliding bar 6 The following time periods are available by default 4 ms 20 ms 40 ms 200 ms and 400 ms These values will be adapted automa
43. Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 If Restart interlock has been set to Always and upstroke muting is active the Enable output remains High until the Top input becomes High thus indicating that the press cycle has been completed In this case a complete restart sequence is required If Restart interlock has been set to Deactivation on upstroke only for PSDI and the Upstroke input is High the Enable output remains High until Top becomes High thus indicating that the press cycle has been completed In this case a cycle start sequence is required If the PSDI input changes after the Max Up Stroke muting time has elapsed from High to Low and back to High the Enable output also changes from High to Low and back to High The setting for this parameter does not have any effect when the Restart and Upstroke input signals remain unconnected Complete start sequence Release 1 static Release 2 start S 2 s 7 PSDl input 7 UILI y UU y i 1 1 7 Restart input s TL L Enable l l Complete start sequence Release 1 static Release 2 start PSDl input 7 ULUI Y OO 1 Restart input s Enable l 1 t gt Max time for upstroke muting Output signals of the function block Restart required output The Restart required output is High when a valid restart sequence is expected at the Restart input PSDI required output The P
44. RS Flip Flop function block General description The RS Flip Flop function block stores the last value of the inputs Set or Reset It is used as a simple storage cell The Reset signal has a higher priority than the Set signal If Set was High last output Q is High and output Q Q inverted is Low If the Reset input was High last output Q is Low and output Q is High Parameters of the function block Table 33 Parameters of the RS Flip Parameter Possible values Flop function block Invert Set Each input of this function block can be inverted see Section 9 5 2 Invert Reset 132 Chapter 9 Table 34 Truth table for the RS Flip Flop function block Figure 106 Function block diagram for the JK Flip Flop function block Table 35 Parameters of the JK Flip Flop function block 133 Logic programming Function blocks Truth table for the RS Flip Flop function block The following applies for the truth table in this section e 0 means logic Low e 1 means logic High e n 1 references the preceding value e n references the current value C e x means any 0 or 1 9 7 8 JK Flip Flop Function block diagram J input g mo Clock input z Kinput g Set Reset Output Q n1 Output Q n Output Q n 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 x 0 1 1 0 X 1 0 1 1 X 0 1 General description The JK Flip Flop function b
45. The value has to be greater than the logic execution time Number of outputs e 1 Enable output e 2 Enable output and Discrepancy error output Use fault present e With e Without Figure 181 Function block diagram for the Light curtain monitoring function block Note Table 85 Parameters of the Light curtain monitoring function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 9 6 Light curtain monitoring Function block diagram B Discrepancy error g Fault present General description The Light curtain monitoring function block allows the implementation of a semiconductor protective device functionality with ESPE The internal logic of the Light curtain monitoring function block corresponds to the functionality of the Emergency stop function block however with a limited parameter selection The single channel input type cannot be selected in the Light curtain monitoring function block When the evaluation of the complementary inputs is High the Enable output is High see Section 9 9 2 If a corresponding dual channel input element is configured in the hardware configuration of the Setting and Monitoring Tool this function block is no longer required in the logic since the pre evaluation is then carried out directly on the safety I O module e g WS0 XTDI or WS0 XTIO module But if the Fault present output is required for further processing the function bl
46. This bit is only available with a CPU module with firmware version V 3 02 and higher and Setting and Monitoring Tool version 1 7 0 or higher Flexi Link status bits In a Flexi Link system additional CPU status bits are available For a description of these status bits see Section 7 4 7 Status EFI1 and Status EFI2 These inputs are available only with CPU modules with an EFI interface e g WSO CPU1 or WSO CPU3 You will find Status EFI1 and Status EFI2 as well as the equivalent EFI1 is OK and EFI2 is OK on the Diagnostics tab under the main module The inputs are set to Low as default The input is set to High if EFI input and output process data exchange to all EFI devices that are expected according to the configuration for the EFI interfaces EFI1 EFI2 is started and faultless or e no EFI devices are expected according to the configuration The input is set to Low again if an error is detected at the EFI input output process data exchange to any of the EFI devices e g communication interruption 56 Chapter 5 Note Table 5 Meaning of the EFI I O error status bits Table 6 Meaning of the module status bits 57 The graphical user interface With AOPD senders there is no EFI process data exchange Therefore a communication error will not occur with these devices i e a communication interruption can not be detected 5 6 5 EFI I O error status bits in the logic editor An I O error status bit for
47. Too 1 3 0 New Project 1 ial AQ Retresh Report Be orense Report structure Report 4 25 2011 1 23 51 PM Bill of material e000 XT X2 X3 X4 4 Authorized client 2 Otfline Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified The information to be summarized in the report can be selected individually from an expandable selection list on the left hand side The selection is made by activating or deactivating the check boxes The toolbar in the Report view contains the following commands e Save Stores the report in PDF format on a data medium Print Open the report in PDF format To this purpose a PDF viewer e g Acrobat Reader Ver 10 0 or later must be installed on your computer e Refresh report Updates the report after changing the report structure e Change report structure Switches between a hardware oriented and a function oriented report structure Detailed information on using the wiring information at the end of the report is available in the Safety Controller User s Manual You will find example application reports in the annex of this manual see Section 15 1 Exercise for the Report view gt Open the Report view by clicking on the Report button gt Use the Change report structure button to choose one of the two different report structures hardware or function oriented gt Activate or deactivate the check boxes for the components that shall be included in the report
48. Unchanged discrepant time Inacti F Active noS Holst Synchronization Discrepant 0 Unchanged discrepant time Active Active 0 Active 1 0 gt x x Synchronization Error 0 1 time timeout If the discrepancy time is active gt 0 the discrepancy timer is restarted on the first signal change resulting in a discrepant status If the discrepancy time is inactive 0 the discrepancy timer does not start i e a timeout will never occur Unchanged Last status is preserved If the correct sequence has been observed For the change between the different states of the double dual channel evaluation synchronization evaluation the following rules apply The synchronization evaluation can only change to Active Enable output changes from Low to High if since the last Active synchronization status at least once the status was Inactive For the Two hand control type IIIC function block both dual channel evaluations must be Inactive at the same time for the Safety gate monitoring function block this can occur at different times as well It is not possible to switch from Active to Discrepant and back to Active the synchronization time has not elapsed or the synchronization time is deactivated and after the state change of the MELSEC WS safety controller from the Stop state to the Run state the synchronization status has been at least once Inactive So if at the time of the transit to the Run state the inputs
49. User s Manual 64 Chapter 5 The graphical user interface How to perform diagnostics gt Click on the Diagnostics button in the menu bar to open the Diagnostics view In the toolbar the following commands are available Figure 35 Toolbar in the diagnostics view O Refresh 54 Clear_ Settings Show history YW Filter gt Click on Refresh to read the current message list from the system gt Using the Clear button you can delete all messages stored in the system You must be logged in as Administrator gt Under Settings you can configure an automatic refresh of the diagnostics and the time interval In the Diagnostic Settings dialog activate the Automatic Refresh checkbox and enter the desired refresh interval in seconds gt Using the Show history button you can display or hide older messages still stored in the MELSEC WS safety controller gt The Filter pull down menu enables you to display or hide different types of messages In the menu click on the different message types to activate or deactivate them Figure 36 Filtering the diagnostics messages Show Log Generator Text Show Information Show Warnings Show Recoverable Errors Show Critical Errors Note To save or print the diagnostic messages you can use the Report function see Section 5 7 Note Change the safety controller to the Stop state before clearing the diagnostic results 65 Figure 37 Data recorder view
50. Waiting time The Waiting time parameter defines the time between the first rising edge of the Inch forward or Inch backward input and the start of the Release time Release time After the Waiting time has expired the Release time begins During the Release time a rising edge on one of the Inch forward Inch backward inputs will start the machine depending on the setting of the Direction switching parameter Signal time The Signal time starts at the same time as the Waiting time During the Signal time the Warning output becomes High indicating that a start sequence has been initiated Impulse time The Impulse time starts at the same time as the Release time During the impulse time the Warning output becomes High again indicating that the inch mode can now be started If during the Impulse time the inch mode is started this has no effect on the Impulse time i e the Warning output will remain High until the configured Impulse time has expired The second warning signal is not mandatory and may be disabled by setting the impulse time to 0 s Control input A start sequence can only be initiated if the Control input is Low If the Control input changes to High during a start sequence the start sequence is aborted and another start sequence can only be initiated after the Control input has changed to Low again Lock input A start sequence can only be initiated if the Lock input is High If the Lock input changes to Low during a start se
51. Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080856ENG E SICK SICKAG Tel 49 7681 202 0 _http www sick com SH NA 080856ENG E 1408 MEE MODEL SW1DNN WSOADR B O E MODEL CODE 13JU67 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
52. a restart is possible without High a complete restart sequence For PSDI timeout the error is reset by a valid restart sequence Figure 241 Function block diagram for the Grouped function block Note Figure 242 Creating a grouped function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 13 User defined function blocks 9 13 1 Grouped function block Function block diagram input 1 aj 0 Output 1 Input 2 al Output 2 Input 3 Input 4 a Machine 1 You can select groups of function blocks in order to create a single grouped function block The typical purpose of a grouped function block is to simplify the re use of groups of logic and to reduce the number of function blocks on a page A grouped function block has the following characteristics e Itcan have a maximum of 8 inputs and 8 outputs e t cannot contain the Fast Shut off function block nor another grouped or customized function block e The icon representing the grouped function block is chosen from a fixed library within the Setting and Monitoring Tool e Itis created within the logic editor but is not listed in the function block list e Itis saved with the project file Upon re opening the project file on another PC the grouped function block will be displayed e tcan be saved as a customized function block When determining the total number of function blocks within a project the grouped function block is n
53. aR ie LARET RAAKAA EEA EEES ELEN ERE T A 116 8 3 1 Configuration and commissioning of a Flexi Line system ee 116 8 3 2 Conversion of a Flexi Line system ce ceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 117 8 3 3 Configuration of the Flexi Line lOGiC 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeaaes 118 9 Logic programming Function blocks cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeetneeeeetneeeeees 120 9 1 General description ccccccceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeesedeecsaeeeeeeeeeeseenniaeeeeees 120 9 2 Safety notes for the logic programming ecceeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 120 9 3 Function block OVErVICW ececeeececeeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeneaaes 122 9 4 Function block properties ccecccceceeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeeeseseenieeeeeeeeetees 123 9 5 Input and output signal connections of function blocks eceeeeeeetee 124 9 5 1 Function block input Connections ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 124 9 5 2 Inversion of input CONNECTIONS eccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetenteaeeeeeeeeeteees 124 9 5 3 Function block output CONNECTIONS ccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeteaeeeeeeeteteees 125 9 54 Fault present output e i aar ceded adecdeliapieci aa a 126 9 6 Timer values and logic execution time eeeeeceeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeneeeseeneeeeeeaas 127 9 7 Logic TUNCHION DIOCKS ren idani anidre erniet d eei 12
54. activated or e 4 the pulse duration measured is too long and the pulse duration monitoring is activated Frequency x ee 1 2 gt lt gt r Enable x output t The Frequency x error output becomes high if e 1 the period duration measured is too short and the error signal is activated Error signal if period duration too short With or e 2 the period duration measured is too long or e 3 the pulse duration measured is too short and the pulse duration monitoring is activated or e 4 the pulse duration measured is too long and the pulse duration monitoring is activated or e 5 the Frequency x input is constantly high The Frequency x constant high output becomes high if e 5 the Frequency x input is constantly high The Fault present output becomes high if 180 Chapter 9 Figure 167 Sequence timing diagram for the frequency monitor function block period duration too long Figure 168 Sequence timing diagram for the frequency monitor function block period duration too short Figure 169 Sequence timing diagram for the frequency monitor function block frequencyx constant high 181 Logic programming Function blocks The Frequency x error Frequency x constant high and Fault present outputs change to low again if the Enable x output changes to high i e two periods with a the Frequency 1 error output is high or the Frequency 2 error output is high or
55. affected by this If the Disable monitoring input is High and an error is pending a reset of the error is possible When the Disable monitoring input changes from High to Low the function block behaves in the same way as after a change from the Stop state to the Run state i e the Enable output will become High again Figure 226 Function block diagram for the Press setup function block Table 109 Parameters of the Press Setup function block A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 12 Function blocks for press cycle control 9 12 1 Press setup Function block diagram Start Release gi Release 1 static g Release 2 start g Restart required Restart Release 1 static inverted General description The Press setup function block is generally used together with the Universal press contact or the Eccentric press contact function block in order to set up the press and in order to provide the information of the Top output as input for this function block The Top output is required for single stroke operation Control of the press can for example be effected by means of a two hand control Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Restart interlock e Without e When Release 1 or Start Release is Low e When Release 1 is Low or Top changes to High e Always Release 2 start input e With e Without Single stroke protection e With e W
56. always located at the left Up to two network modules follow directly to the right of the CPU module Then the safety I O modules follow The safety relay output modules have to be positioned at the far right gt Right click the individual modules and select Edit in the context menu Enter a new tag name module name for the respective module and close the window by clicking OK gt Change the positions of the modules subsequently by using the mouse to drag them to a different position gt Remove modules from the configuration area by right clicking the module and choosing the Remove module command in the context menu Alternatively you can use the mouse to drag the module to the trashcan at the bottom left of the Configuration area Note The graphical user interface Chapter 5 A MELSEC WS safety controller can contain maximally two network interface modules A MELSEC WS safety controller can contain maximally twelve I O modules Enable configurations with more than twelve I O modules Using Setting and Monitoring Tool version V1 7 0 or higher you can enable configurations with up to 22 I O modules This feature makes it possible for you to prepare a common maximum configuration for several similar systems and then to adapt this configuration to the related system by simply deleting modules that are not required For configurations containing more than twelve I O modules the following restrictions apply You c
57. and the last falling edge on the Frequency x input is less than Average value of the pulse duration Tolerance of the pulse duration This monitoring starts with the first rising edge after the transition from the Stop state to the Run state e 4 The pulse duration measured is too long The pulse duration monitoring is activated Average value of the pulse duration is not 0 and the time since the last rising edge on the Frequency x input is greater than Average value of the pulse duration Tolerance of the pulse duration A falling edge has therefore not been detected in the expected time This monitoring starts with the first rising edge after the transition from the Stop state to the Run state e 5 Input Frequency x is constantly high The Frequency x input has been high for longer than Max period duration This monitoring starts immediately after the transition from the Stop state to the Run state The Enable x output changes to high if two periods with a valid period duration and a valid pulse duration are detected on the Frequency x input If the pulse duration monitoring is inactive the pulse duration is always valid for the evaluation The Enable x output changes to low if an invalid signal has been measured on the Freqency x input i e if e 1 the period duration measured is too short or e 2 the period duration measured is too long or e 3 the pulse duration measured is too short and the pulse duration monitoring is
58. at the top of the screen Figure 54 Flexi Link system overview and station buttons iy iy i i Flexi Link system overview button Flexi Link station A to D buttons gt In the view for the individual station add the desired hardware for this station as described in Section 5 5 1 and in Section 5 5 3 gt When the hardware configuration for the selected station is complete use the Flexi Link system overview button in the toolbar to switch back to the Flexi Link system view gt Then add the other required station s to your Flexi Link project as described above gt When the hardware configuration of your Flexi Link system is complete you can configure your project as described in the following section 85 Figure 55 Logic configuration example Station A Flexi Link Chapter 7 7 3 3 Flexi Link configuration This section shows in detail how data can be shared between the single stations in a Flexi Link system Example Simple Flexi Link project with two stations An emergency stop button and a restart button on Station A will control two robots connected to Station A and Station B Setting up the hardware gt Create a new Flexi Link project see Section 7 3 2 gt In the Flexi Link System overview set the connection method to EFI1 2 setting it to EFI1 will make no difference for this example project Then click on the Add a new station button for Station A The Hardware configuration view for Stat
59. background suppression Avoid mutual interference of the sensors Increase the protection against manipulation and the safety level by using the following configurable functions concurrency monitoring monitoring of the total muting time muting end via ESPE Information on wiring can be found in Section 9 10 3 The function block requires that a valid muting sequence takes place Figure 201 shows an example of a valid muting sequence based on the basic parameter setting for this function block Sequence timing diagram Muting sensor A1 D TT Let yoo Muting sensor A2 eee ee _n OSSDs of the safety sensor re ELeesiy yiy ff iF Muting sensor B1 es a a a a Muting sensor B2 e f E E Enable Cc n a a Muting error Muting status Figure 202 Function block diagram for the Sequential muting function block Figure 203 Example of the sequential layout of muting sensors Table 103 Conditions for Sequential muting with four sensors Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 10 7 Sequential muting Function block diagram Representation of the application Figure 203 shows an example of the placement of sensors using the Sequential muting function block ESPE e g safety light curtain Hazardous area Transported material In the example the material moves from the left to the
60. between 0 and 2 0 BDC signals per cycle 1 BDC signal per cycle 2 BDC signals per cycle TDC input i TDC input Upstroke output Upstroke output Figure 224 Timing diagrams for 0 1 and 2 BDC signals per cycle If one or more of the conditions mentioned above is not fulfilled during operation the Enable output becomes Low and the Contact error output becomes High Observe the relevant safety standards and regulations ATTENTION All safety related parts of the installation cabling connected sensors and actuators configuration settings must be according to the relevant safety standards e g IEC 62061 or EN ISO 13849 1 or Type C standards such as EN 692 and EN 693 and regulations Only safety relevant signals may be used in safety relevant logic Ensure that the application fulfills all applicable standards and regulations This needs to be considered especially for the BDC if the Upstroke output is used for upstroke muting e g in combination with a press cycle control function block If the Number of BDC signals per cycle is configured to 0 2 e g hydraulic press the function block s error detection is reduced and not all input errors can be detected e g stuck at low at the BDC input In order to fulfill the safety standards it may be necessary to use tested switches for the cam input signals each with different test sources To use diffe
61. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeees 68 6 1 First steps for establishing a CONNECTION 0 cc cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeteeeteeeeenaees 68 6 1 1 Connecting the PC to the MELSEC WS safety controller via RS 232 68 6 1 2 Online status and background Color eeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenaees 69 6 2 Editing the Communication settings ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeenaees 70 6 3 Establishing a connection with the MELSEC WS safety controller 76 6 4 User levels in the Setting and Monitoring Tool eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeees 77 675 Identify projo e sitet a ETE 78 SRELE aaan a a a ra 79 FA Flexi LINK OVERVIGW oes soi dances ods a ATA 79 7 1 1 System requirements and restrictions for Flexi LINK n 79 1 2 FUNCTION PMINGIPle neii ansi ane lid deead Md becceeds baeatlan sc a a e 80 7 2 1 Flexi Link addr S ranar raai ANET a RT TAAR 80 T22 Flexi Link Dasaini a coveted tevenliceeeel baheeeev id deesbelidevivlasaeeel nddevevidedeevieandes 80 Fa Getting Started rcs E E enti Moet eee ed ia E 82 7 3 1 Connecting to an existing Flexi Link system n 82 7 3 2 Setting up a Flexi Link project in the Setting and Monitoring Tool 85 7 3 3 Flexi Link configuration eseese eiai 86 7 3 4 Transferring and verifying the Flexi Link configuration c ceeeee 90 4 4 FlexiiLink TUNCUONS ic ee eel Nee ee aaa eels 93 7 4 1 Flexi Link system System OVErViICW 0 eecceceeeeeee
62. changes to Low and Fault present changes to High if the Muting error output is High Figure 199 Function block diagram for the Parallel muting function block Figure 200 Muting with two parallel sensor pairs Table 102 Conditions for Parallel muting Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 10 6 Parallel muting Function block diagram Conveyor y c1 Representation of the application Figure 200 shows an example of the placement of sensors for Parallel muting ESPE e g safety light curtain Hazardous area Transported material A2 m L3 In this example the material moves from the left to the right As soon as the first muting sensor pair A1 amp A2 is activated the protective effect of the protective device ESPE is muted The protective effect remains muted until the muting sensor pair B1 amp B2 is clear again Input conditions for muting sensors Condition Description A1 amp A2 Starts the muting cycle The first sensor pair is activated depending or B1 amp B2 on the direction of transportation of the material A1 amp A2 amp B1 amp B2 Condition for transferring the muting function to the second sensor pair B1 amp B2 or A1 amp A2 Muting applies as long as this condition is fulfilled The second sensor pair is activated depending on the direction of transpor
63. comment as well as a revision number consisting of a major revision number and a minor revision number The checksum for the process image CRC is also displayed here see section 8 2 3 On the right you can define the size of the process image and the update rate The possible values are dependent on the maximum segment length in the complete Flexi Line system see Table 18 If a cell in the table is displayed in red the related combination of segment length and data size is not possible with the update rate set To be able to select this combination you must first set a higher value for the update rate The update rate is identical for all stations and therefore not synchronous with the logic cycle which can vary from station to station Flexi Line Chapter 8 Byte configuration Figure 82 Flexi Line Byte pene a eam ve rn Brg configuration view Project Device Extras MBL com settings F connect Disconnect By transfer fle upload MES B Hardware configuration gt Logic editor FEY Network Modules E Report g amp Diagnostics 3 Data Recorder CPU3 Module n a Detaile and Bit configuration waho Comment dk m 2ESaS 210 as gt Low ue I Specify a name for this byte under which you manage all associated bits BGEG0000 2 Global Reset af High Global E stop a BGBG0080 3 Byte 2 p gt Low 4 Byte 3 p gt Low 20800000 Routing Direction Set the common definition ofall bits
64. configuration options e g single channel or dual channel evaluation discrepancy time on off filtering connection to test outputs etc that are adapted to your specific equipment needs How to enable customized elements gt In the Hardware configuration view click on the Settings icon at the left of the Configuration area to open the Settings dialog gt Inthe General tab activate the Enable customized elements option gt Click on OK How to create a customized element gt In the Hardware configuration view right click on any element in the Elements window in the Configuration area or in the Parking area It is recommended to choose an element that is as similar as possible to the customized element you want to create gt From the context menu select the command Save as customized element The Create custom element template window opens Create custom element template S Input types General BOM info Settings Summary 8 st Potential free contacts and restart Dual channel NCN Title Subtitle d de Dual channel NC NO Dual channel complementary F7 FeR NC NO NC NOF 37 FeAl PUBERA PRR A Ea Gone Zle gt Rename and configure the element as needed see below for details gt Click on Save to save the new element and close the window e You have to enter a new name for the template in order to save it e Make sure that all settings are complete and correct b
65. configured as With ESPE If the ESPE does not always detect the muting end exactly because of irregularities in the material or the transport means you can increase the availability of the machine by configuring an additional muting time of up to 1000 ms Only in this case does the Add muting time when ESPE is clear parameter determine the additional muting time after the OSSDs of the ESPE have returned to High i e that the safety light curtain is no longer interrupted Concurrency monitoring time The Concurrency monitoring time is used to check whether the muting sensors are activated simultaneously This value specifies the maximum duration for which each of the two dual channel evaluated muting sensor inputs may have different values without this being evaluated as an error This means that input pair A1 and A2 or input pair B1 and B2 must have equivalent values before the Concurrency monitoring time has expired Concurrency monitoring begins with the first change of an input value of a muting sensor If the Concurrency monitoring time has expired and the two inputs of an input pair still have different values an error occurs If the concurrency monitoring determines an error for at least one input pair the function block indicates this error by setting the Muting error output to High Sensor signal gap monitoring Occasionally faults occur in the output signals of muting sensors that may not be relevant for muting The Sensor signal ga
66. curtain Single stroke protection is always active and cannot be configured This means When the signal of the Top input changes to High the Enable output is always set to Low The requirements for a restart depend of the configuration of the parameter for Restart interlock Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Restart interlock e Without e When Release 1 or Release 3 or Start Release is Low e When Release 1 or Release 3 is Low or Top changes to High e Always e When Release 1 or Release 3 is Low Release 2 start input e With e Without Release 3 safety input e With e Without Mode for Start Release input e Stepping e Start only Mode for upstroke muting e Inactive e For Release 3 e For Release 3 and Start Release Max Up Stroke muting time 0 disabled 1 to 7200 s The Upstroke input is available only if the value is not set to 0 Min restart pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Ignore Release 3 safety for e Yes Restart interlock in top position e No A ATTENTION A ATTENTION A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Ensure that the transitions of the signals for restarting fulfill the requirements of the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can r
67. displayed in the list Create new profile Entry name EE Intel R 82566DM 2 Gigabit Network Connection MAC address 00 1 E 4F D3 31 AC TP address 1097 19 68 IP address jo 97 19 mjo e Enable TCP IP routing ES Subnet address i A Gateway address Search for devices i Wj Scan MAC address IP address Device name b 00 06 77 02 05 7F 10 9719111 TEST gt Click on the desired network module The IP address of the device is displayed in the IP address field gt Enter a name for the new profile gt Click OK The dialog is closed and the new profile is displayed in the list gt To activate the new profile select it using the left mouse button and click on the green arrow symbol at the right From now on the Setting and Monitoring Tool will use this profile How to check a profile gt Click on the green tick on the right side of the profile to be checked gt To check all profiles click on the Check all profiles button The Setting and Monitoring Tool checks the connection settings and marks faulty profiles Profile type Profile not checked Profile OK Profile faulty Serial COM v USB 7 TCP IP Yo Yo Ho v Yo Yo Oo 74 Chapter 6 Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller How to change the network settings of a network module gt Click on the Network settings button The Network scan dialog is
68. e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Sequence timing diagram Reset ml m Release 1 input LS Enable output f l J Release condition fulfilled LS Reset required JSU LH sd FLL LSJ LO Stop Run 9 8 2 Restart Function block diagram General description The internal logic of the Restart function block has the same functionality as the Reset function block The Restart function block allows graphic differentiation between the function blocks with regard to the observation of application standards for acknowledging a manual restart request Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Min restart pulse time e 100 ms e 350ms Number of inputs 2 to 8 1 to 7 Release inputs activated Release condition fulfilled output The Release condition fulfilled output displays the result of an AND combination of all activated Release inputs It is High if all activated Release inputs are High 156 Chapter 9 A ATTENTION Figure 135 Sequence timing diagram for the Restart function block 157 Logic programming Function blocks Restart required output The Restart required output shows by pulsing at 1 Hz that the function block expects a valid restart pulse at the Restart input so that the Enable output can become High This is the case if the Release condition fulfilled output is High i e all activated Release inputs are Hig
69. ec ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 161 9 8 7 EDM External device Monitoring cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 162 9 8 8 Valve MOMitOring e araa e eE Ara EIA AE TEA ETET 163 9 8 9 User Mode SWICh reccann dira a aA 167 9 8 10 Switch synchronization 0 eceecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 169 9 8 11 Error output combination s sssssssesernnsesserirrtnrstesttrnrtnnnnrettrnnnn nnee re nn 172 9 8 12 Ramp down detection ccccccceceeseeececeeeeeeeeecnaeceeeeeeesesetnaeeeeeeeeteees 173 9 813 Frequency MONO ea aE A ated ade dd AERE 178 0 38 14 Start WANG sree aa dts ite ated aie esin das a R ia la ARET Eas 182 9 9 Function blocks for dual channel evaluation 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeaes 187 9 9 1 Single channel evaluation eee ceeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 187 9 9 2 Dual channel evaluation 1 pair and discrepancy time 0e 188 9 9 3 Double dual channel evaluation 2 pair synchronization evaluation and SYNCHrONIZALION Me 0 eee eect e ee eete ee ee ete eset ai a a 190 0 9 4 Emergency SlOp nara eir REIA AAE AE AERE 192 9 9 5 Magnetic SWitCh sest ear T aAa E NATET RE AA 193 9 9 6 Light Curtain MOnitoring asid ia edee 194 9 9 7 Safety gate Montorg oara E EE E E 195 9 9 8 Tolerant dual channel monitor sssssssessssrissesrrssetrrstirrsstrrsstennssrtnnssenn 197 9 9 9 Two hand control type IMA seessseesssse
70. ee generator function block i erate lessages Message Assignment In Out Settings In Out Comment Info L ld Message ID Message Text Emergency stop 1 pressed Emergency stop 2 pressed Door opened Note The messages entered are valid globally for all Log generator function blocks used in a project In a single project you can enter up to 64 different messages with a length of up to 32767 characters each Using the Import from CSV and Export to CSV buttons at the top left of the window you can save the messages to a text file in CSV comma separated values format or import messages from a CSV file 152 Chapter 9 Note Figure 129 Message assignment for the Log generator function block Figure 130 Function block diagram for the Routing 1 N function block Table 61 Parameters of the Routing 1 N function block 153 Logic programming Function blocks gt Then click the Message assignment tab Assign the desired message to each used input and choose the input condition that must be fulfilled for the related message to be sent rising edge falling edge or rising and falling edge The message assignment can not be exported or imported H Loe Generator Messages Message Assignment In Out Settings In Out Comment Info Input 1 Input 2 2 Emergency stop 2 pressed Input 3 3 Door opened 1 Emergency stop 1 pressed Message priority If more than one conditions are fulfilled
71. element if desired Otherwise the default tag name is used Nr of devices gt Adjust the Nr of devices if necessary E g if you have connected a cascade of several SICK L21 testable type 2 sensors to one input you can use this function to adjust the number of devices that will appear on the bill of material in the project report to match the actual number of devices used Note A ATTENTION The graphical user interface Chapter 5 Element is connected to test outputs By activating or deactivating the option Element is connected to test outputs you can determine whether the respective element shall be tested or not By connecting an element to the test outputs e short circuits to 24 V in the sensor wiring which could inhibit the switch off condition can be detected e electronic sensors with test inputs e g SICK L21 can be tested gt To activate or deactivate the connection to the test outputs either click on the checkbox or on the 3D buttons on the right side One WSO0 XTDI has 2 test sources only even if it has 8 test output terminals Protect single channel inputs against short circuits and cross circuits If a stuck at high error occurs on a single channel input with test pulses that was previously Low the logic may see a pulse for this signal The stuck at high first causes the signal to become High and then after the error detection time back to Low again Due to the error detection a pulse may be generate
72. gt Alternatively it is possible to place and connect inputs or outputs in one step Drag an input or output while keeping the left mouse button pressed to the desired function block input or output node If the mouse pointer hovers over the node it will be highlighted Then drag the input or output to the place on the worksheet where it shall be positioned and release the left mouse button gt While holding down the key you can drag and drop the end of an already existing connection line from one node to another This is useful to reassign a connection without having to delete it first gt Mark the input function block output and the connections by clicking them or by dragging with the left mouse button pressed and then position as desired gt In the selection window for Inputs Function block and Outputs click FB preview A preview of the respective element or the details of a function block are displayed in the FB preview window when you move the cursor over it gt To replace one function block with another function block drag the required function block from the selection list over a function block already positioned until the existing function block is highlighted green and then release the left mouse button You are prompted as to whether you want to replace the function block positioned previously with the new function block gt Using the right mouse button click an input or output element in the logic editor to show the lo
73. has been stopped This must be the signal which directly controls the press Typically the Control of drive input will be connected via a jump address or a CPU marker to the logic editor signal which is connected to the physical output for the press Do not connect any physical input signals to the Control of drive input Connect the signal that controls the physical output for the press drive using a jump address or a CPU marker e If a jump address is used make sure that this signal is a loop back This is indicated by a clock icon on the destination tag of the jump address To this purpose connect the outputs of this function block to the following function blocks before you connect the jump address to the Control of drive input This applies especially if all connections to the following function blocks are also realized using jump addresses e Ifa CPU marker is used then a Routing function block must be used to split the signal to the physical output for the press drive and to the CPU marker output If the Enable output changes to Low as a result of either the Release 1 static input or the PSDI input has changed to Low the diagnostic output Top required changes to High A restart of the press is prevented until the Top input has changed back to High and no restart in another operating mode has occurred 254 Chapter 9 255 A ATTENTION A ATTENTION Note Logic programming Function blocks Release 1 static T
74. has to occur while the TDC input is High and after the falling edge High Low transition of the Overrun cam input the Overrun cam input may have changed back to High already 2 The end of the BDC High Low transition has to occur before the falling edge High Low transition of the Overrun cam input In other words BDC must be Low when a High Low transition at the Overrun cam input occurs A valid sequence that fulfills the conditions for BDC and Overrun cam is 1 TDC Low gt High Drive released High this is to fulfill the condition for overrun monitoring oOo oa A WwW DY Start condition TDC Low BDC Low Overrun cam High Overrun cam High gt Low BDC Low gt High Overrun cam Low gt High 7 TDC High gt Low and BDC High gt Low sequence does not matter Depending on the type of press e g hydraulic press it may occur that the beginning of the BDC step 5 above occurs not once but twice or even not at all To avoid that this leads to a contact error the parameter Number of BDC signals per cycle must be set to the value 0 2 e g hydraulic press With this setting the conditions for the BDC still apply for every BDC pulse with the exception of the falling edge of the Overrun cam input step 4 above Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Additionally the number of BDC signals Low High Low must be according to the configured value i e either exactly one or any value
75. inputs outputs the device cannot be placed there In this case place at least one hardware module with inputs or outputs e g WS0 XTIO or WS0 XTDI in the Configuration area gt When the device is moved over suitable free inputs or outputs they light up green The Setting and Monitoring Tool automatically considers the required number of inputs or outputs Drop the device on a suitable position The device icon is now displayed in the view at this point Certain elements can not be connected to all modules e Dual channel elements can only be connected to safe modules e Pure safety elements can only be connected to safe modules gt Drag the device to other suitable inputs or outputs or back into the Parking area gt Delete the device by right clicking the device icon and clicking Remove in the context menu Alternatively you can use the mouse to drag the device to the trashcan at the bottom left of the Configuration area gt A device can be parameterized when it is located in the Parking area or in the Configuration area Right click a device in the Parking area or Configuration area and select Edit from the context menu or double click a device The Element settings window is opened Depending on the type of device you can assign a tag name identifying name for the element set evaluation parameters for the element for example the discrepancy time ON OFF filter or OFF ON filter connection to a test output te
76. it Otherwise this can result in an EDM error Sequence timing diagram EDM feedback T 7 L TL T TL Monitored input e S LS LH i CL iN SJ EDM error output f l Output 1 I LTL LoT LNT Output2 L LS LL Fault present es ee ce ae pee eee eee ee Stop Run t gt TEDM Tepm Max feedback delay 9 8 8 Valve monitoring Function block diagram Control 1 gij Control 2a Feedback 1 g Feedback 2 g Reset General description The Valve monitoring function block allows to control valves and to check on the basis of their feedback signals whether they have switched as expected To this purpose the valves are connected with Output 1a to Output 2b The feedback signals are connected to the Feedback 1 and Feedback 2 inputs The Control 1 and Control 2 inputs are connected to the logic signal that represents the desired state for the valve e g the Enable output of a Reset function block Depending on the valve type some of the signals are not used Three different valve types are available Single valves double valves and directional valves Table 70 Parameters of the Valve monitoring function block A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Reset condition e Manual reset e Auto reset Continuous monitoring e No when valve is active e Yes Valve mode e Single Control 1 Output 1a Output 1b Feedback 1 act
77. mode as well as for the safe inch mode of the machine Start sequence 1 On startup the function block is in Inactive mode The Startup active output is High while all other outputs are Low 2 If the Control input becomes Low and the Lock and Stop inputs are High the start sequence is enabled and the function block goes into Waiting for start mode 3 A rising edge on the Inch forward or on the Inch backward input will trigger the start sequence The Startup active output changes to Low the waiting time and the signal time start and the Waiting time active output as well as the Warning output change to High for the duration of the signal time After expiration of the Waiting time the Release time and the Impulse time start The Waiting time active output changes back to Low the Release time active output changes to High and the Warning output changes to High again for the duration of the impulse time 4 If during the release time a second rising edge of Inch forward occurs the function block will transit to inch mode Forward and the Enable and Forward active outputs will change to High Respectively if during the release time an additional rising edge of Inch backward occurs the function block will transit to inch mode Backward and the Enable and the Backward active outputs will change to High 182 Chapter 9 Note Table 80 Parameters of the Start warning function block 183 Logic programming Function
78. muting condition has to be terminated immediately after the passage of the object so that the protective device returns to its normal state that was bypassed by muting i e so that it comes back into force The muting sensors have to be positioned in such a way that muting cannot be triggered unintentionally by anyone see Figure 196 Figure 196 Safety when mounting the muting sensors Figure 197 Detection of material during muting Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 as A It may not be possible to activate sensors lying opposite each other simultaneously B It may not be possible to activate sensors mounted next to each other simultaneously and not the conveyance means pallet or vehicle e Always position the muting sensors in such a way that only the material is detected Transported material Conveyance means Transport level Muting sensor Always position muting sensors in such a way that the material can pass unimpeded but persons are detected reliably Always position the muting sensors in such a way that a minimum distance to the detection area of the ESPE e g to the light beams of a light curtain is observed while the material is being detected It has to be ensured that no persons are within the hazardous area before and during the activation of an override Before you activate the override ensure that the equipmen
79. muting sensor pairs have to be activated in the sequence B1 B2 before A1 A2 Muting is not possible in the forward direction Muting is terminated by a transition from four active sensors to an inactive sensor pair A no sensor or one sensor active Condition of other sensor pair for muting start The Condition of other sensor pair for muting start parameter determines when a valid muting sequence can begin The Condition of other sensor pair for muting start can be defined for one of the following conditions Both inputs are clear All muting sensors have changed to Low together or individually and the OSSDs of the protective device e g safety light curtain are High i e the protective field is clear or e If last muting sensor is active All muting sensors except the last muting sensor are Low and the OSSDs of the protective device e g safety light curtain are High i e the protective field is clear If a higher throughput is required it can be advantageous to allow the beginning of the next muting sequence as soon as the transported material has passed the protective device as well as all muting sensors with the exception of the last one i e If last muting sensor is active Muting end condition In contrast to the Condition of other sensor pair for muting start the Muting end condition determines when a valid muting state ends You can choose when the Muting end condition occurs e With muting sensor pair When a mutin
80. of this byte and its default allocation With the default allocation the first and last Flexi Line stations a pagana operate as a process value of their nonexistent neighbors 5 Byte 4 gt Low fo a Tr a tr E ow 6 Byte 5 p gt ow goso9e80 You have selected Global Low This can be used for example for reset or z restart switching but also for individual bits that should be available to all 5 i 5 z stations as information When an input from a Flexi Line station transmit a a BGSBGEaB0 4 f 4 i 4 i gt f gt gt Low value to these Flexi Line bits the result of the entire Flexi Line chain 7 Byte 6 p gt Low yields a Low value If stations choose not to operate this bit they can either not use this bit from the logic or load a static Low into this bit The ae aS gosageeao end stations of the Flexi Line chain use a Low value in the logio for their Bit configuration Give the bits a unique name This name is available in the logic st s O set B st s B Bt B Bt 0 E stop st O Operator f3 Offiine A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified On the left of the view you will find an overview of the bytes in the Flexi Line process image If you select a byte you can edit the following settings for this byte on the right e name of the byte e routing The data for a byte can be either shared globally in the entire system or only locally with one or two neighboring stations e de
81. one or two safety signals connected locally to the MELSEC WS safety controller You can choose between the following input evaluations depending on the function block e Single channel e Dual channel Dual channel equivalent 1 pair Dual channel complementary 1 pair Dual channel equivalent 2 pairs Dual channel complementary 2 pairs The following truth tables summarize the internal evaluation for the individual types of input signal evaluations of the MELSEC WS safety controller Truth tables The following applies for the truth tables in this section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High x means any 0 or 1 The Fault present output is High when the logic processing of the MELSEC WS safety controller detects an error in the combination or in the sequence of the input signals 9 9 1 Single channel evaluation Input I gi The following relates to the Safety gate monitoring and Emergency stop function blocks This evaluation type has no functional use since the Enable output always has the same value as Input 1A and the Fault present output is always Low Therefore this option may be useful only for the graphic arrangement of the logic program Regardless of that the related input element can be used directly in the logic instead of connecting it to Input 1A Note Figure 175 Dual channel evaluation with safety I O module or with function block Logic p
82. opened gt If necessary select the correct network adapter from the dropdown list at the bottom of the dialog gt Click on the Scan button Your network is scanned for connected network modules and the network modules found are displayed in the list Figure 46 List of network modules found Network scan Py Set device contig MAC address IP address Type key Serial number Application revision ae Board revision Device b 00 06 77 02 05 7F 10 97 19111 WSO GETH 0910 00112 1 05 Eth TCP IP 0000 Current IP Address Edit IP address 1097 19 111 255 285 0 0 o TEST Use DHOP MAC address 00 1 E 4F D3 31 40 TP address 10 97 1958 Close gt Click on the network module you want to edit gt Enter the new settings in the Edit IP address area gt Click on the Set device config button to transfer the new settings to the device 75 A ATTENTION Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller Chapter 6 6 3 Establishing a connection with the MELSEC WS safety controller Do not connect to the MELSEC WS safety controller via the RS 232 the Ethernet interface and the USB at the same time The MELSEC WS safety controller can only communicate with one instance of the Setting and Monitoring Tool at one time Connecting to the safety controller using multiple instances of the Setting and Monitoring Tool either on a single PC or multiple PCs may
83. right As soon as the muting sensors A1 amp A2 are activated the protective effect of the protective device ESPE is muted The protective effect remains muted until a sensor of the muting sensor pair B1 amp B2 becomes clear again Input conditions for muting sensors Condition A1 amp A2 or B1 amp B2 Description Starts the muting cycle The first sensor pair is activated depending on the direction of transportation of the material A1 amp A2 amp B2 amp B1 Condition for transferring the muting function to the second sensor pair B1 amp B2 or A1 amp A2 Muting applies as long as this condition is fulfilled The second sensor pair is activated depending on the direction of transportation of the material 220 Chapter 9 Note Figure 204 Valid muting sequence using the basic configuration setting C1 input without Override input without Conveyor input without 221 Logic programming Function blocks Equations and prerequisites for calculating the distance L 2 vx2x Tw Muting sensor vxt gt Ly L3 L2 lt L3 Tin Light curtain lt Tin Muting sensor Where L Distance between the inner sensors layout symmetrical to the detection area of the ESPE L Distance between the outer sensors layout symmetrical to the detection area of the ESPE L3 Length of the material in conveyor direction v Velocity of the material e g of the conveyor be
84. safety controller gt Check the signal paths and the correct inclusion in higher level controllers gt Check the correct data transfer from and to the MELSEC WS safety controller gt Check the logic program of the safety controller gt Completely document the configuration of the entire system of the individual devices and the results of the safety check gt Check the safety functions of the machine or system completely and ensure that the safety functions function perfectly gt In order to prevent unintentional overwriting of the configuration activate the write protection of the configuration parameters of the MELSEC WS safety controller Modifications are now no longer possible unless the write protection has been deactivated 282 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting In case of an error please refer to the Safety Controller User s Manual There you will find a list of LED error displays error codes error causes and rectification measures Error codes and error messages can also be displayed in the Diagnostics view if you are connected to the MELSEC WS safety controller For more information on how to perform diagnostics see Section 5 8 283 Annex Chapter 15 Annex 15 1 Example application reports 15 1 1 Example application Newspaper palletizer Report SICK Mitsubishi Application name CPUO0 Module CRC Tool 0x0B16C641 CRC Device 0x00000000 Configuration date and time 4 20 2011 9 11
85. stops Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Figure 227 Sequence timing diagram for the Press setup function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Restart input If the Restart interlock parameter has been set to Without a Restart signal is not required in order to restart the press after any kind of stop The Restart interlock parameter can also be set to the following values e When Release 1 or Start Release is Low e When Release 1 is Low or Top changes to High e Always This parameter determines when a Restart signal is expected as input signal for the function block If the Enable output changes to Low because of the above mentioned settings of the configuration parameters for Restart interlock the Enable output can only be reset after a valid restart sequence with a Low High Low transition minimum 100 ms or 350 ms shorter pulses and pulses longer than 30 s will be ignored has been carried out Output signals of the function block Restart required The Restart required output is High when a valid restart sequence is expected at the Restart input Enable The Enable output is High when Restart required is Low i e a restart is not required and the following conditions are fulfilled e When Single stroke protection is set to Without Release 1 static is High Release 2 start if configured is High and a rising edge Low to High is detected at the Start Release input or e i
86. the CPU module The write protection is included in copying when the data are transferred to the memory plug and are also transferred automatically to each safety controller to which the configuration data are duplicated 11 5 Configuration checksums Configuration checksums are displayed in Setting and Monitoring Tool in the report and on the information page for the hardware configuration The checksums have the following meaning Total checksum Same value as the WSFlexi Soft checksum e WS checksum This checksum covers the configuration of the WS system i e for all Modules The configuration of EFI devices connected is not included in the WS checksum Each checksum is four bytes long 11 6 Deletion of the configuration in the safety controller A configuration in a memory plug can be deleted A CPU module with firmware version V2 01 and higher and the Setting and Monitoring Tool version V1 7 0 or higher is necessary A configuration can be deleted in the Setting and Monitoring Tool by right clicking on a CPU module in the Hardware configuration and selecting Delete memory plug 278 Chapter 12 Device states of the MELSEC WS safety controller Device states of the MELSEC WS safety controller Table 115 Device status and LED displays on the CPU module 279 The MELSEC WS safety controller knows different device states during operation Some device states require a user intervention e g the state transition from
87. the Frequency 1 constant high output is high or the Frequency 2 constant high output is high valid period duration and a valid pulse duration have been detected on the Frequency x input After the transition from the Stop state to the Run state all outputs are low Sequence timing diagrams Frequency x t l t t Enable x output f t f Frequency x error i Frequency x constant high Frequencyx f a eh at E poo e Ff t vi Ypa Enable x output 5 t Frequency x error Frequency x Enable x output Frequency x error Frequency x constant high t Figure 170 Function block diagram for the Start warning function block Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 8 14 Start warning Function block diagram Control a Inch forward z Inch backward zi Reset g General description Many machines must be equipped with a start warning mechanism e g if the machine operator can not see all dangerous areas from one location because of the size of the machine After a start button has been pressed the waiting time starts and a warning signal is initiated After expiration of the waiting time the release time starts and a second warning signal is initiated During the release time it is possible to start the machine by pressing the start button a second time The start warning is required for automatic run
88. the RS 232 interface of any CPU module in the system gt Power on the Flexi Link system gt Open the Setting and Monitoring Tool installed on the PC gt If necessary edit the communication settings see Section 6 2 gt Click on Connect or choose the Identify project command from the Device menu The Setting and Monitoring Tool will then scan the network for connected devices If the error message No valid Flexi Link network found appears check whether each of your WSO CPU1 or WS0 CPU3 in the system has at least the firmware version V2 00 The firmware version can be found on the type label of the module in the field Firmware version gt Only if the connected CPU modules have been configured for Flexi Link before they will have valid Flexi Link addresses Otherwise the Setting and Monitoring Tool will now open the Flexi Link Network settings view and list the stations found 82 Chapter 7 Flexi Link Figure 49 Flexi Link Network settings without valid address assignment De og EENT YE Io me YpnB fe a gt Use the up and down arrow buttons or drag and drop the stations into the rows for Station A to D so that no two stations occupy the same address gt There are two possibilities to identify each station Click on the Start identify button of one of the displayed stations The corresponding station s MS and EFI11 LEDs will start flashing alternating wit
89. the Run state This requires that you have finished the configuration as described in the previous section and that you have set up and connected the required MELSEC WS modules and other hardware Establish a connection to your Flexi Link system gt Connect a PC or notebook to the RS 232 interface of any CPU module in the system gt Power on the Flexi Link system gt Open the Setting and Monitoring Tool installed on the PC and load the project file with your configuration gt If necessary adjust the communication settings see Section 6 2 gt Switch to the Flexi Link system overview The configured stations in your project will be displayed with a light yellow background onnesta the device StationB D ESERS SE ETERS O ETERS DAR FP Standerd OM gt Click on Connect You will be prompted to select the stations you want to connect to Activate all stations then click OK i Connect Te station i StationB Cancel gt If the CPU modules of the connected stations have not been configured for Flexi Link before the Setting and Monitoring Tool will now open the Flexi Link Network settings view and list the found stations In this case you will have to assign a unique Flexi Link address from A to D to the individual stations as described in Section 7 3 1 90 Chapter 7 Figure 64 Flexi Link system overview system connect
90. the action Chapter 5 This chapter familiarizes you with the basic elements of the graphical user interface as an introduction This chapter does not give any information on the configuration of MELSEC WS modules nor any instructions for logic programming This chapter is only intended to explain the fundamental functioning of the Setting and Monitoring Tool on the basis of a small section of the functions Experienced users of Setting and Monitoring Tool can skip this chapter 5 1 Start view After the Setting and Monitoring Tool has been started the start view is displayed The user can specify here with which of the following actions he wants to start Open existing project file Connect to physical device Create new project Create new Flexi Link project Edit com Interface settings 5 2 E 20105 BEE 1 7 0 O OREERT foie E Project Device Extra HB com s settings f Connect J1 disconnect Transfer pload BE gt Open existing project file w Load a projectfile Connect to physical device Connectto a station If no project has been loaded one will be created automatically Create new project iw Create a projec wih a MELSEC WS or Flexi Line station Oi ee es configured Edit com interface settings G2 otras Setting the desired language gt Click the flag icon in the menu bar at the far right and select the desired language version 26 Chapter 5 F
91. the connected device differs from the configuration in the project You can either continue to work with the configuration in your project with Download the configuration into the device and verify the configuration in Setting and Monitoring Tool afterwards You can also continue to work with the configuration ofthe device with Upload the configuration from the device and e verify the configuration in Setting and Monitoring Tool afterwards 276 Chapter 11 Figure 265 Verification successful 277 Note Transferring the system configuration If the verification is completed successfully a project report is created subsequently that you can print and save The query whether the device is to be marked as verified is displayed in the lower part of the report window You must be logged in as an Administrator to mark the device as verified The status verified not verified is indicated in the lower right hand corner of the Setting and Monitoring Tool and by the CV LED at the CPU module lighting up Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project DER CPU1 module jj FWY 2 00 FWY 1 05 FW 1 10 FWY 1 10 Rev V 23x Rev 13 Rev V 13 Rev V 13 000a X1 X2 X3 X4 o000 RBK j X1 X2 X3 x4 negu MS XTDI 6 6 7 E epee 1516 17 18 fis 16 7 18 20 Q102 Q3Q4 X5 X6 X7 X8 ano 9000 Valid configuration Executing Authorized client Hpsystem Online
92. the device into Setting and Monitoring Tool you can then start the recording using the Start recording button in the Status control selection window For this purpose Setting and Monitoring Tool must be connected to the device You can also prepare a dedicated data recorder configuration that can then be transferred to the device For this purpose drag the inputs and outputs with the signals to be recorded from the Inputs Outputs selection window to the data display window You can then define in the Trigger and trace configuration selection window when the data recording is to start e Continuous The recording starts immediately after you click the Start recording button e Trigger After you have clicked the Start recording button the recording only starts once the trigger condition you have defined is met For this purpose select one of the inputs or outputs used from the list as a Trigger channel and define the trigger condition i e whether the recording is to start when the selected trigger channel has the value 0 or the value 1 If you select the Only record new values save option the signals are not recorded continuously but only on a signal change Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller Chapter 6 Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller Figure 38 Connection settings dialog Figure 39 Modify profile dialog 6 1 First steps for establishing a connection This chapter describes how to establish a connection bet
93. the following conditions e after the MELSEC WS safety controller has changed from the Stop state to the Run state and e after each rising edge Low to High at the Function test request input This is indicated by a High signal at the Function test required output The Function test required output changes back to Low if a signal sequence occurs at the inputs that causes the Enable output to change from Low to High before the next rising edge at the Function test request input occurs The Function test error output becomes High and the Enable output becomes Low if the next machine cycle starts before a function test has been performed i e if the Function test required output is still High and another rising edge Low to High at the Function test request input occurs The Function test error output changes back to Low if a signal sequence occurs at the inputs that causes the Enable output to change from Low to High Sequence timing diagrams Safety gate monitoring function block Category 2 single channel logic with function test Input 1A _ LOO Function test request J l J l J l Enable output Jf L r LST SS Function test required J LoS LL LLL Function test error a COL Fault present ee S Stop Run Safety gate monitoring function block Timing diagram of the discrepancy time monitoring Input VA OL Input 18 FLL of Enable output 2 ce o sa l j l l Discrepancy error K ooo Fault present Ae
94. theft criminal or terrorist acts war embargoes governmental acts or rulings loss or damage or delays in carriage acts of God vandals or any other circumstances reasonably beyond MELCO s control 5 Choice of Law Jurisdiction These terms and any agreement or contract between Customer and MELCO shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to conflicts of laws To the extent any action or dispute is not arbitrated the parties consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the federal and state courts located in the Southern District of the State of New York Any judgment there obtained may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction 6 Arbitration Any controversy or claim arising out of or relating to or in connection with the Products their sale or use or these terms shall be settled by arbitration conducted in accordance with the Center for Public Resources CPR Rules for Non Administered Arbitration of International Disputes by a sole arbitrator chosen from the CPR s panels of distinguished neutrals Judgment upon the award rendered by the Arbitrator shall be final and binding and may be entered by any court having jurisdiction thereof The place of the arbitration shall be New York City New York The language of the arbitration shall be English The neutral organization designated to perform the functions specified in Rule 6 and Rules 7 7 b 7 8 and 7 9 shall be the CPR Microsoft
95. to combine up to four Flexi Link stations via EFI for safe data communication Only WS0 CPU1 and WS0 CPU3 modules can be used in a Flexi Link system the connection of WSO CPUO modules is not possible The process data of each station inputs and outputs logic results etc can be made available to all other stations in the Flexi Link system The Teach function allows to temporarily deactivate single stations without impairing the function of the overall system Features e Safe connection of up to four Flexi Link stations via EFI e Connection via EFI1 or EFI1 and EFI2 e Transfer receive up to 52 bit of information per station 26 bit per EFI channel e Each bit can be assigned a global tag name e Teaching simulates the presence of temporarily suspended switched off stations e Any station can be used as access point to address and configure the entire system with the Setting and Monitoring Tool e The configuration of the entire Flexi Link system is stored in a single project file 7 1 1 System requirements and restrictions for Flexi Link The minimum system requirements for Flexi Link are as follows System component Minimum version Hardware WSO0 CPU1 or WS0 CPU3 with firmware version V2 00 or higher Software Setting and Monitoring Tool version 1 3 0 or higher The Flexi Link system can be connected using only EFI1 or using both EFI1 and EF12 The overall number of status bits per station that can be made available
96. until the preceding muting cycle has been terminated e Material can be transported several times within one muting cycle if the muting conditions are maintained permanently in the process meaning that at least one pair of sensors remain activated permanently Since muting bypasses the safety functions of a protective device several requirements have to be fulfilled as shown below in order to ensure the safety of the application 206 Chapter 9 207 A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks The general safety regulations and protective measures have to be observed If you use muting be sure to observe the following information about the correct use of muting Access to the hazardous area has to be detected reliably by the ESPE or be excluded through other measures It has to be impossible for a person to pass by pass over pass under or cross the ESPE without being detected Observe the manual of the ESPE for the correct installation and use of the device Always observe the valid applicable local regional and national regulations and standards applying to your application Ensure that your application conforms to an appropriate risk analysis and avoidance strategy Muting may never be used to transport a person into the hazardous area Mount the control devices for resetting and overriding outside the hazardous area so that they cannot be actuated by a person located in the hazardous area Furthermore when o
97. which items of data are communicated from station to station at which update rate with which range routing and with which default value high or low The routing and the default value can be defined separately for each byte The process image is normally defined during the configuration of the first station in the Flexi Line system and then transferred to the rest of the stations You can open the Flexi Line view at any time using the Network modules button on the menu bar The view is also opened automatically if you add a Flexi Line element to an WS0 CPU3 The Flexi Line view comprises the following elements e menu bar with the Project Device Extras menus e toolbar with icons for quick access to frequently used menus e tabs for changing to the Hardware configuration Logic editor Network modules Report Diagnostics and Data recorder views e toolbar for Flexi Line configuration with the Import Flexi Line definition Export Flexi Line definition Teach Reset and Configuration lock functions e navigation bar for changing the view between General settings and Byte configuration e configuration areas for the two views mentioned above General Flexi Line information and Specification for the view General settings Byte configuration and Details and bit configuration for the view Byte configuration e drop down information area The configuration view for Flexi Line is split into two e You can set the defaults in General settings The
98. with protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to Chapter 7 e Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING e Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock e Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction e Safety oriented devices must be suitable for safety related signals A function interruption of safety outputs results in a loss of the safety functions so that the risk of serious injury exists Do not connect any loads that exceed the rated values of the safety outputs Wire the MELSEC WS safety controller so that 24 V DC signals cannot unintentionally contact safety outputs Connect the GND wires of the power supply to earth so that the devices do not switch on when the safety output line is applied to frame potential Use suitable components or devices that fulfill all the applicable regulations and standards Actuators at the outputs can be wire
99. xTIO 1 17 Mode 8 xTlo 1 18 Marker 0 0 All Cascade output signals must be connected back to the Cascade inputs of all used Switch synchronization function blocks via an OR function block and a CPU marker see also Figure 153 e Do not use a jump address for the back routing of the cascade signal but a CPU marker This ensures that all related Switch synchronization function blocks will process the signal at the same logic cycle e The timer is increased by the necessary value to compensate the delay resulting from the connection of the Cascade input via the CPU marker A rising edge on the Cascade input starts the timer timer start value is the system time from the last logic execution cycle When the timer has elapsed the values of the inputs 1A to 3B at this point of time are applied to output 1A to 3B irrespective of the result of the antivalence check The outputs keep these values until the next synchronization process occurs Antivalence check If this function is enabled an antivalence check is performed every time when the Hold time for outputs has elapsed i e every time when the outputs take the current input values If any of the used input pairs Input 1A Input 1B to Input 3A Input 3B does not have antivalent values i e one input of each pair must be Low and the other input must be High then the Antivalence error output changes to High It becomes Low again when another synchronization p
100. 1 1 0 Table 48 Truth table for the Binary encoder function block with 8 inputs in Priority mode Table 49 Fault Truth table for the Binary Input 2 Input1 Output A encoder function block with present 2 inputs in Priority mode 0 0 0 1 with dominant input 1 x 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 eae pau aa Eh t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x x 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 x x x 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 x x X X X 0 1 1 0 0 1 X X X X x X 0 1 1 1 0 Table 50 147 A ATTENTION Truth table for the Binary encoder function block with 8 inputs in Priority mode with dominant input 1 Evaluate Fault present if the Binary encoder function block is used for safety purposes If you use the Binary encoder function block for safety relevant logic you may have to evaluate the Fault present output depending on your application This is the only way to distinguish whether only input 1 is High or if an invalid input state exists In both cases all outputs will be Low Figure 123 Function block diagram for the Binary decoder function block Table 51 Parameters of the Binary decoder function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 7 15 Binary decoder Function block diagram General description The Binary decoder function block decodes dependent on the current con
101. 11 17 34 AM QTY Title Tag name Part Number Internal Description item number 1 RE300 Reed sutich dual RESOO XTDEZ 34 channel amtivaient 1 RE300 Reed satich dual RESOO XTDEZ ISIG channel artivaient 1 RE300 Reed swtich dual RESO0 XTDEZLI7I6 channel amtivaient 1 4RO 4RO Relay 4RO Module 2 Diagnostics No error history available 3 Configuration 3 1 Installed software components Tool Version component for CPUO and CPU1 main modules 1 3 0 200 Software component for 4RO relay 1 3 0 200 component for GCC1 Network Modules 1 3 0 200 Software component for GMOD gateway 1 3 0 200 Software component for XTDI extension module 1 3 0 200 Software component for XTIO extension module 1 3 0 200 User Machine Operator Application name PUD Module Appi Overall Checksum CRC state Not vented Configuration date 4 20 2011 9 32 PM 298 Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM S090 DIB K0 aaaa Step Address V2xx 0 Vix 1 Vix 2 3 3 CPU 3 3 1 CPUO General Information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Memory Address number version version Usage UI Logic WS0 CPUD 0000 0000 v2 000 0 00 1 3 0 200V2xn 228 493 0 WSO MPL 0601 0000 1 3 0 200 33 2 CPU logic Used Function Blocks 4 Execution Time ms 4 3 3 24 seite1 No Name Input Output Settings 0 Reset LO Reset and EDM_XTIO 1 15 0 0 Motor contactor XTIO 1 Q1Q2 min Reset Pulse Time 100 ms L1 E Stop ES21 XTI0 1 1112 0 1 POS 2
102. 13 9 12 5 Table 77 Maximum allowed encoder signal frequency and speed rpm depending on the encoder type and the logic execution time 1 180 phase shift 1 signal min always High Step 2 Determine the time between signal changes for the speed limit gt Define the speed at which the Ramp down ended output shall be activated e g to unlock a safety door gt Define the maximum time that can pass between two signal changes at this speed highest values of t to ty Take all possible tolerances into account e g switching tolerances tooth wheel tolerances etc Min time between signal changes highest values of t1 to t4 10 ms In any case the Min time between signal changes must be greater than the logic execution time and must be rounded up to a multiple of 10 ms Take increased logic execution times into account Every time the logic program is changed the logic execution time may increase In this case it may be necessary to check the maximum signal frequency for incremental signals again Otherwise the operator of the machine will be in danger Example 1 A B 90 phase shift e 4 teeth per revolution e Switching tolerances 5 gt teeth 175 to 185 corresponds to tow thigh Signal change 85 to 95 corresponds to t to t4 e Maximum shaft speed 750 rpm 12 5 Hz e Shaft speed for release 15 rom 0 25 Hz e Logic execution time 8 ms gt Check the maximum signal frequency for incremental signals
103. 2 to 65535 Duration Parameter value x Logic execution time Pulse time 1 to 65534 Duration Parameter value x Logic execution time The pulse time has to be lower than the clock period If the logic execution time of the configuration changes e g through addition or subtraction of function blocks the clock period and the pulse time will change Sequence timing diagram enable Jo CLL Clock output Th Stopping mode Immediately Clock output PLL Stopping mode After last clock cycle 9 7 11 Event counter Up Down and Up and down Function block diagram Uy Down g Reset to zero gi Reload gi General description The Event counter function blocks allow to count events either upward and or downward When a pre defined overflow value is reached this will be indicated on the Overflow output or when zero is reached this will be indicated on the Underflow output Depending on the required counting direction there are the function blocks Event counter Up Event counter Down and Event counter Up and down Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Counter reset e Manual e Automatic Counter reload e Manual e Automatic Overflow limit Integer between 1 and 65 535 The overflow value limit has to be higher than or equal to the reload value Reload value Integer between 1 and 65 535 Min restart pulse time e
104. 200 1 3 0 200 Machine Operator CPUD Module Not vertied 4 20 2011 9 11 PM Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM onmis onmi oaa ogn CIES MA2 920 mana Sss Po Beka E300 Module Type Code Step Address cPud WSO CPUD V2 o xmo WSO xTIO Vix 1 xmo WSt xTIO Vix 2 xmo WwSt xTIO Vix 3 3 3 CPU 3 3 1 CPUO General information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Memory Address number version version Usage UI Logic WS0 CPUD 0000 0000 v2 000 0 00 13 0200V2x 263 5 66 0 WSO MPL 0601 0000 13 0 200 3 3 2 CPU logic Used Function Blocks 8 Execution Time ms 4 3 3 2 1 Muting station 1 No Name Input Output Settings O Offdelay D 1 Muting Sensor XTIO T I7 0 0 POS 2 Input 1 Detay time 500 ms Timer 1 Ofielay 1 0 2 muting sensor_XTIO 1 16 0 0 POS 2 Input 2 Detay time 500 ms 2 Cmos 10 CA000_ XTIO 1 1586 0 1 Lamp_XTIOR3 03 Direction Detection Disabled 11 POB G Output 0 0 2 Not connected Condition of other sensar pair for muting start Both inputs are clear 1 2 POB 1 Output 0 O4 Not connected Muting end condition with muting sengor pair Muting Total Time Ssec Concurrency monitoring time 0 ms Sensor signal gap monitoring 100 ms Sequence Monitoring Disabled Page 5 288 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM No Name input Output Mona o ee topes fj No Name input Output 3 Offdelay 10 1 Muting Sensor XTIO 2 7 0 0 POS 5 Input 1 4 raty LO 2 muting sensor XTIOR 16 0 0 PO
105. 207 Valid muting sequence using the configuration basic setting C1 input without Override input without Conveyor input without 223 Logic programming Function blocks Where L4 Minimum distance between the detection line of the ESPE and the detection by A1 A2 L Distance between the two detection lines of the sensors Sensors activated sensors clear Ls L Maximum distance between C1 and the detection line of A1 A2 Length of material in conveyor direction v t TiN Light curtain TIN Muting sensor Response time of the light curtain or the muting sensors in the MELSEC WS safety controller See the Safety Controller User s Manual Material flow is only possible in one direction in this example In order to move material in both directions i e bidirectionally place the intersection directly in the light beams of the ESPE See also Section 9 10 9 The sensor layout shown in this example is suitable for both through beam photoelectric switches and photoelectric reflex switches Avoid mutual interference of the sensors Increase the protection against manipulation and the safety level by using the following configurable functions Velocity of the material e g of the conveyor belt Set total muting time s concurrency monitoring monitoring of the total muting time muting end via ESPE Information on wiring can be found in Section 9 10 3 Sequence timing diagram The fun
106. 7 STENO Tera E EE 127 gr L AND ernea a eal a ee 128 TSOR a a a a dated dasa 129 9 7 4 XOR exclusive OR aricrccarcnrinrnineni n aa a ai aA 130 9 7 5 XNOR exclusive NOR Josrririi arani nA EAE EEEN 131 9 7 6 Multiple release 2 2 cccceccceccecce cece eeeeenneeceeeeeeeseceaeaeceeeeeeeeensenaeeeeeeeeees 131 9 7 7 RS Flip FlOp pnts atte ead dave ea 132 9 7 8 JK ElIP FlOp 4s spiette Seale eet AL ee atin ae iedl we 133 9 7 9 Multiple Memory andia a Gar 134 9 FO CIOCK GOMORALON ci eas tsk A ATA T A oa toesaten 135 9 7 11 Event counter Up Down and Up and down ececeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeees 136 9 7 12 Fast shut off and Fast shut off with bypass s s s 139 9 77 13 Edge detectlonins ach vais cect an Bataan ee ee ues 144 9 7 14 Binary encoder uictesestaccceeccitteceesa dees bacdesed an ceeeesaldevevich doeebndedaveviandauvenaad 145 9 7 1 5 Binary deCOder tacit cre eel aedeagal 148 9 7 16 Log genar ator ana aa a a a aa e aa 151 9 7 17 Routing TN oacarrscicainrsn iia a A a 153 9T 1e ROUNE M aaa A AIEA REE 154 9 8 Application specific function DIOCKS ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteenteeeeeeeentees 155 SE AROSO a AA AA A a ee aa edd pees ences 155 9 8 2 Restalt eaei u eesti A a A e ed eel 156 9 8 3 Off delay Umen een dea iain ade REO RE 158 9 8 4 Adjustable off delay timer eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeseeneeeeeeaas 159 9 8 5 On delay timer sacrario niati ade nent a a 160 9 8 6 Adjustable on delay timer
107. A and B The outputs correspond to the value on the Input A and Input B inputs with the following exceptions e The status output indicates the value for Switched off even though the related input is switched on with input mode equivalent low instead of high as the other input must first switch off before it is possible to switch on again Release output changes to high e The status output indicates the value for Switched on even though the related input is switched off with input mode equivalent high instead of low as the off delay is active and switching off is currently prevented internally Figure 191 Function block diagram for the Two hand control type IIIA function block Table 89 Parameters of the Two hand control type IIIA function block Figure 192 Function block diagram for the Two hand control type IIIC function block A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 9 9 Two hand control type IIIA Function block diagram E Fault present General description The Two hand control type IIIA function block is a predefined function block for two hand control sensors for which discrepancy time monitoring on equivalent inputs is required The discrepancy time monitoring is used to monitor the synchronous actuation of two hand circuits of type IIIA in the context of EN 574 The internal logic of the Two hand control type IIIA function block correspond
108. A falling edge on the Reset input restarts the start sequence An active inch mode is stopped and the function block back goes into Waiting for start mode The Enable output as well as the Forward active and the Backward active output will become Low while the Startup active output will become High Startup active output The Startup active output is Low during the start sequence waiting or release time is running or if inch mode is active the Enable output is High The Startup active output can be used to lock other parallel Start warning function block instances To this purpose connect the Startup active output via a CPU marker to the Lock input of the other function block instance see Figure 171 Forward active Marker 0 1 Backward active Startup active Marker 0 2 SSI Waiting time active Release time active Waming Control Enable Look Forward active Marker 0 2 Backward active Stop pd a a artup active aj Marker 0 4 KS Inch forward g Waiting time active Release time active Waming Inch backward Reset Waiting time active output and Release time active output These outputs indicate whether the waiting time or the release time is active Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Sequence timing diagrams Figure 172 Sequence timing diagram for the Start warning Release start sequence function block in Not locked Control WUA ooo m
109. Bypass input must be High 3 logic cycles in advance to successfully inhibit the fast shut off If this condition is fulfilled then the Fast shut off output of the function block and the physical output at the I O module will both remain High e The Fast shut off directly switches off the connected output of the WSO XTIO while subsequent logic will be ignored Therefore it is not possible to implement further bypass conditions in the logic editor between the output of the Fast shut off function block and the connected WSO XTIO e Be aware that in the logic online monitor the value of the connected WSO0 XTIO output may differ from the effective value at the physical output of the WSO XTIO For example the connected output can be Low as a result of the subsequent logic while the output of the Fast shut off function block and the physical output of the WS0 XTIO High because the Bypass input is High e f your application requires that the output of the WS0 XTIO module can be switched off independently of an existing bypass condition e g emergency stop then the underlying logic must be realised in a way that the respective shut down signal e g emergency stop switches off the bypass signal for the function block as well as shown in the following example Figure 120 Function block diagram for the Edge detection function block Table 43 Parameters of the Edge detection function block Figure 121 Timing diagram for the
110. C e Not adding Customized Function Blocks to the function block list Click on No to import the Customized Function Blocks as grouped function blocks only In this case they will not be listed in the function block list and will be available for the current project only If a customized function block to be imported has the same name as another customized function block saved in the PC the imported customized function block will be added under the same name How to delete a customized function block permanently from your PC gt Delete all instances of the customized function block from your project or transform each of them to a grouped function block by clicking Edit in the toolbar gt In the function block list right click on the customized function block you want to delete The context menu opens gt Choose Delete Custom Function Block e You cannot undo this action e Other projects containing customized function blocks that have been deleted can still be used When opening an older project that contains customized function blocks that have been deleted from your PC it will be treated like a project that has been transferred from another PC You will be prompted whether you want to import the customized function blocks contained in the project permanently as customized function blocks or as grouped function blocks for use in the current project only 264 Chapter 9 Figure 255 Simulation toolbar 265 Note
111. Configurable parameters of function blocks 123 Logic programming Function blocks A configuration can encompass a maximum of 255 function blocks The logic execution time is a multiple of 4 ms and depends on the number and type of function blocks used Therefore the number and type of function blocks in your application should be kept as low as possible 9 4 Function block properties Function blocks offer a number of different properties that you can use The configurable parameters differ depending on the function block You can double click the function block to access the configurable parameters and select the tab with the desired properties The following example shows the Safety gate monitoring function block fl Safety Gate Monitoring Parameter In Out Settings In Out Comment Info Inputs Dual channel equivalent 1 pair Function Test no function test iscrepancy time pair 1 3 6 10 ms Dis 1 3000 O disable Discrepancy pair 2 amp 10 ms 41 3000 O d le 2 Synchronization Time amp 10 ms 3000 O disable 1 In addition to the type of input e g single channel dual channel equivalent etc function blocks can have further parameters that are defined on the properties page of the function block shown above On the Parameter tab and on the I O settings tab you will find the configurable parameters depending on the function block The I O comment tab allows you to replac
112. D in the Flexi Link network See Section 7 4 3 e The EFI1 2 and EFI1 radio buttons are used to choose the connection method i e whether one or two EFI strings are used e On the right side the Flexi Link IDs for the current configuration in the Setting and Monitoring Tool are displayed Flexi Link station functions The Flexi Link functions for an individual station can be reached if the view for this station is active i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New Project Project Device Extras e Most of these functions as the Hardware configuration Report or Diagnostics are working in the same way as in a standalone project In this section only the additional functions that are relevant for Flexi Link will be described Figure 69 Flexi Link station menu bar with network module Figure 70 Flexi Link system overview Flexi Link Chapter 7 e The Logic editor is used to configure which information each station will send to the other stations via the Flexi Link network This is also where the information provided by the other Flexi Link stations in the network is available and can be used as input for logic applications See Section 7 4 4 e The Flexi Link station X view is where you can assign tag names to the source information that the station sends to the Flexi Link network and change the process image default values High or Low These values will be used in case the Teach function is use
113. D EFI2 is OK Figure 11 WSO XTIO module status bits in the Hardware configuration view Figure 12 WS0 XTDI module status bits in the Hardware configuration view The graphical user interface Chapter 5 Module 1 BOM Info O Refresh e M Module has external error Module power supply is missing Module in operation Module is internally OK Configuration is valid Input I1 12 dual channel evaluation is OK Input 13 14 dual channel evaluation is OK Input 15 16 dual channel evaluation is OK Input 17 18 dual channel evaluation is OK Input Tl is OK Input E is OK Input 13 is OK Input I4 is OK Input B is OK Input I6 is OK Input I is OK Input I8 is OK Output Q1 is OK no short to OV detected Output Q1 is OK no short to 24 detected Output Q2 is OK no short to OV detected Output Q2 is OK no short to 24V detected Output Q3 is OK no short to OV detected Output Q3 is OK no short to 24V detected Output Q4 is OK no short to OV detected Output Q4 is OK no short to 24V detected CT L ocer Module 2 BOM Info Refresh Module in operation Module is internally OK Module is externally OK Configuration is valid Input 11 2 dual channel evaluation is OK Input 13 14 dual channel evaluation is OK Input 15 16 dual channel evaluation is OK Input 7 1B dual channel evaluation is OK Input It is OK Input P is OK Input BB is OK Input I4 is OK
114. Device configuration is verified The verification flag is included in copying when the data are read back into the memory plug and are also transferred automatically to each safety controller to which the configuration data are duplicated The safety controller is also ready to use when the configuration is only validated and not verified or does not have a write protection However the automatic transition of the MELSEC WS safety controller into the Run state after the voltage supply has been switched on is not possible then The dialog box for verification is only displayed after a request by the user in order to ensure that the verification process does not have to be passed through every time the configuration is changed or new project data uploaded In order to validate the MELSEC WS safety controller the safety functions at the machine or system have to be checked completely and have to function perfectly With regard to its content the validation is identical to the technical test taking place when the safety controller is commissioned Transferring the system configuration Chapter 11 11 4 Activating the write protection of the configuration in the safety controller A verified configuration can be protected against accidental changes by activating the write protection The write protection can be set and deactivated in the Setting and Monitoring Tool by using the lock symbol in the Hardware configuration to the left of
115. Drive released input is Low The Fault present output is set to High if any Plausibility error incremental output is High The Fault present output is set to Low if all error outputs are Low Table 76 Parameters of the Ramp down detection function block A ATTENTION Figure 159 Signal pattern for A B 90 phase shift encoders Figure 160 Signal pattern for 1 3 gap 180 phase shift encoders Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of incremental inputs 1 single encoder input e 1 pair of encoder inputs e 2 pairs of encoder inputs Input plausibility checks e Disabled e Enabled If enabled then the number of incremental inputs must be either 1 pair or 2 pairs Min time between signal 100 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms The value has to be changes greater than the logic execution time Use fault present e With e Without Ensure that your application fulfils the following requirements e Encoder pulses must have a minimum duration of the logic execution time see step 1 below e Connect the signal that controls the physical output for the drive to the Drive released input It must be ensured that if this input is Low the torque of the drive is switched off in any case e Encoders must be connected locally to a WSO XTIO or WSO XTDI module on the same Flexi Link station not via network or Flexi Link etc Confi
116. ESPE Muting total time 0 disabled 5 s to 3600 s resolution 1 s Add muting time when ESPE is clear Sensor signal gap monitoring 0 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 0 disabled 10 to 1000 ms resolution 10 ms If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Concurrency monitoring time 0 disabled 10 to 3000 ms resolution 10 ms If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time C1 input e With e Without Conveyor input e With e Without Override input e With e Without Min override pulse time e 100 ms e 350ms Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Direction detection Direction detection is used when the transported material has to be moved ina specific direction The direction depends on the sequence in which the muting sensors are activated If direction detection is disabled the material to be transported can be moved in both directions in order to fulfill the muting conditions In this case it is not relevant which sensor pair is activated first If Forward A1 A2 first was selected as the direction the muting sensor pairs have to be activated in the sequence A1 A2 before B1 B2 Muting is not possible in the opposite direction Muting is terminated by a transition from four active sensors to an inactive sensor pair B no sensor or one sensor active If Backward B1 B2 first was selected as the direction the
117. Edge detection function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 7 13 Edge detection one bypass conditionsFunction block diagram Input gi Edge detected General description The Edge detection function block is used to detect a positive rising or negative falling edge of the input signal The function block can be configured to detect a positive edge a negative edge or both If an edge corresponding to the parameter settings is detected the Edge Detected output changes to High for the duration of the logic execution time Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Edge detection e Positive e Negative e Positive and negative Sequence timing diagram Input Oo Lo Edge Detected output l l Edge detection Positive Edge Detected output Edge detection Negative Edge Detected output Edge detection Positive and negative One logic cycle 144 Chapter 9 Figure 122 Function block diagram for the Binary encoder function block Table 44 Parameters of the Binary encoder function block 145 Logic programming Function blocks 9 7 14 Binary encoder Function block diagram General description The Binary encoder function block encodes depending on the current configuration a one out of N one hot or a priority code to a binary code Output A 2 Output B 21 Output C 2 2 to 8 inputs can be conf
118. Exclude any danger during the upstroke movement of the press If you use upstroke muting you must ensure that during the upstroke period no hazards are present e g by the up movement itself Upstroke muting Release 1 static Release 2 start 4 1 Pps LJ LJ l fi UU 4 1 s ye Restart l Sa Top JO Upstroke l l Enable Lo The Max Up Stroke muting time can be configured The upstroke muting timer starts with a rising edge Low to High at the Upstroke input If the timer reaches the configured Max Up Stroke muting time before another rising edge occurs at the Upstroke input upstroke muting is interrupted and if the PSDI input is Low the Enable output is set to Low When a second rising edge occurs at the Upstroke input upstroke muting begins again Start position If the Start position parameter is set to Only on top a start of the press is possible only in the top position In any other position a start is inhibited If the press has been stopped e g by interruption of the light curtain during a downstroke you must change to another press operating mode e g in combination with the press setup function block to move the press back to the top position because the N break function block inhibits a restart with this parameter setting If the Start position parameter is set to Only on top the optional Control of drive input must be connected in order to monitor whether the press is currently running or
119. High or e it remains Low instead of changing to High as under faultless condition 120 Chapter 9 Figure 91 CPU marker Figure 92 Jump address with loop back 121 Logic programming Function blocks Take delays into account that are caused by CPU markers and jump addresses with logic loop backs A loop back signal is an input signal that is connected to an output of a function block with the same or higher function block index the function block index is displayed at the top of each function block Therefore the input uses the output value of the previous logic cycle This must be considered for the functionality and especially for the response time calculation To connect a loop back signal a jump address or a CPU marker must be used A CPU marker generally causes a delay of one logic cycle E Stop ES21 XTIO 1 I5 e Marker 0 0 A x Marker 0 0 A jump address causes a delay of one logic cycle if it constitutes a loop back If this is the case the input of the jump address is displayed with a clock symbol with Setting and Monitoring Tool V1 3 0 or higher tee E Stop ES21 XTIO 1 151 Loop back 2 Of Loop back Table 19 Overview of the CPU module function blocks Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 3 Function block overview The MELSEC WS safety controller uses function blocks to define the safety oriented logic T
120. High e g during switching on when Release 2 start is High When the Enable output is High Release 2 start is no longer monitored Do not use the Release 2 start input for safety purposes Do not use the Release 2 start input for initiating safety stops because this input is evaluated temporarily during the start sequence only Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Top The Top input signal is used in order to determine the end of the press cycle i e the press has reached the top dead center This signal is available at the function blocks Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact Do not use the Top input for safety purposes Connect the Top input only with the Top output of an Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact function block or to an equivalent signal source Do not use the Top input for initiating safety stops Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Restart input If the Restart interlock after stop condition parameter has been set to Without a Restart signal is not required in order to restart the press after any kind of stop If the Restart interlock after stop condition parameter has been set to With and the Enable output changes to Low the Enable output can only be reset after a valid restart sequence with a Low High Low transition minimum 100 ms or 350 ms shorter pulses and pulses longer than 30 s will be ignored has been carried out Output signals o
121. IIIC function block Figure 193 Sequence timing diagram for the Two hand control type IIIC function block 203 Logic programming Function blocks In the hardware configuration the used inputs must be configured as single channel signals i e no dual channel input evaluation on the safety I O module Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Discrepancy time pair 1 0 disabled 10 to 500 ms in 10 ms steps If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Discrepancy time pair 2 0 disabled 10 to 500 ms in 10 ms steps If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Number of outputs e 1 Enable output e 2 Enable output and Discrepancy error pair 1 output e 3 Enable output Discrepancy error pair 1 output and Discrepancy error pair 2 output Use fault present e With e Without The function block evaluates its input signals in pairs Input 1A and Input 1B form a dual channel evaluation and have to be complementary Input 2A and Input 2B form a dual channel evaluation and also have to be complementary A discrepancy time can be specified for each of both input pairs The synchronization time is the time during which the input pairs may have different values As specified in the standards and regulations the synchronization time for a two hand switch evaluation may not exceed 500 ms the synchronization time is preset and cannot be cha
122. Input 0 1 2 Mode 1 XTI0f1 16 0 2 Not connected rence L5 RE300 XTD2 516 1 6 RE300 XTDIZLI7IB Stier aao sorn 3 pasne y td s 3 3 2 2 seite2 299 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM No Name Input Output Settings 1 AND LD Mode 2 XT Of1 18 0 0 POS 2 Input 1 Input 1 Not Inverted 11 Enabling satich XTIO 1 1364 Input 2 Not Inverted 2 OR 10 POB 0 Oulput 1 0 0 POS 3 Input 1 input 1 Not Inverted 11 POB 1 Oulput 0 Input 2 Not inverted 3 Rest LO Reset and EDM_XTIO 1 7 0 0 Lamp XTIO T 3 min Reset Putse Time 100 ms 11 POB 2 Oulput 0 0 1 Not connected 0 2 Not connected An fee we meorwr le none a l ral anemer gt I aaas rung 3 3 3 CPUO0 10O Tag name 24V A1 CPU Power Supply w wWS0 CPUO CPU RES RxD GND TxD 3 4 VO module 3 4 1 XTIO 1 3 4 1 1 General Information 300 Chapter 15 301 Annex Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM Type Code Serial number WSO XTIO 0407 0000 3 412 Inputs Mode 2 we IS no SA taille 3 wi 6 ro 5 an 1B no 4 we 7 wo BA 7 x n ee x F e a aw 13 o 24v 3 443 Outputs Mode 6 a3 gt A BM 3 4 1 4 Power Supply v 3 4 1 5 Wiring diagram Firmware Hardware Version version v 1 000 0 00 Title Tag name Reset and EDM Single channe Mode swatch 1 of 2 Mode switch 1 of 2 Reset and EDM Single channel E Stop ES21 Dual channel Enabiing stich 2 position swttch Title T
123. Input B is OK Input I6 is OK Input I is OK Cancel How to export the module status bits gt In the Hardware configuration view click on the Settings icon at the left of the Configuration area to open the Settings dialog gt On the Export module status file card click on the Export button A file selection dialog opens gt Navigate to the folder where you want to save the export file enter a file name for the export and click on Save The module status bits are saved as a CSV file 34 Chapter 5 35 Exercise Note Note The graphical user interface 5 5 3 Exercise for configuring the connected devices gt The selection tree in the Elements selection window can be expanded and collapsed by means of a mouse click Optional Right click a device and select Edit current element in the context menu Assign a user defined Internal item number if you want to This Internal item number is stored for this device gt Select some devices from the list and drag them into the Parking area The Parking area serves to increase clarity You can compile all required devices here so that you do not forget any of them during the configuration Alternatively you can drag the devices directly from the Elements selection window into the Configuration area gt Then drag a device from the Parking area into the Configuration area gt If the Configuration area does not contain a module with suitable free
124. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSECTVS erie Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool Operating Manual WS0 CPUO WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 SW1DNN WSOADR B uay XL At a CS ay eaaa MITSUBISHI i 2 3 m n 2 B W yg YLy24 Ya MS MS MS PNR i5 6 7 18 B1 Y2 B2 Y4 X5 X6 X7 a 14 24 34 44l wy SEFE Powered by MELSEC WS series products were jointly developed and manufactured by Mitsubishi and SICK AG Industrial Safety Systems in Germany Note that the warranty on MELSEC WS series products differs from that on MELSEC Q or MELSEC QS series products Refer to WARRANTY written in this manual This document is protected by the law of copyright whereby all rights established therein remain with the company Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Reproduction of this document or parts of this document is only permissible within the limits of the legal determination of Copyright Law Alteration or abridgement of the document is not permitted without the explicit written approval of the company Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Precautions regarding warranty and specifications MELSEC WS series products are jointly developed and manufactured by Mitsubishi and SICK AG Industrial Safety Systems in Germany Note that there are some precautions regarding warranty and specifications of MELSEC WS series products lt Warranty gt e The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one 1 year after the date of delivery or for eighteen
125. N resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage See i i Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions WARNING e When the MELSEC WS safety controller detects a fault in the external power supply or itself it turns off the outputs Configure an external circuit so that the connected devices are powered off according to the output status off of the MELSEC WS safety controller Incorrect configuration may result in an accident e When a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse e For safety relays configure an external circuit using a device such as a fuse or breaker to protect a short circuit current e When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running MELSEC WS safety controller from the PC configure a safety circuit in the sequence program or external to the MELSEC WS safety controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely Before operating the MELSEC WS safety controller read the relevant manuals carefully and de
126. Out Settines In Out Comment Info Optional Output Use fault present Safety gate Safety gate In Out settings tab of the properties monitoring monitoring dialog for the Safety gate monitoring function block function block function block with configuration with all available basic setting inputs and outputs Figure 97 Activating the Fault present output Figure 98 Fault present output Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 5 4 Fault present output Various function blocks dispose of the Fault present diagnostics output In order to use it activate the Use fault present checkbox on the I O settings tab of the function block properties The additional output Fault present is now displayed in the function block E Safety Gate Monitoring Parameter In Out Settines In Out Comment Info Input Output Settings Number of inputs M Use fault present Input 1A g Input 1B g The Fault present output changes to High when an error has been detected on the basis of the configured function block parameters e g discrepancy time error function test error synchronization error etc When the Fault present output is High the main output e g the Enable output changes to Low The Fault present output is set to Low if all errors are reset The conditions to reset an error are described in the section of the respective function block 126 Chapter 9
127. PC to the MELSEC WS safety controller via the communication interface of the CPU module RS 232 USB if you want to use the force mode If you try to activate the force mode although the configuration has been already verified CPU module CV LED Yellow on a dialog appears that allows you to reset the status to Not verified gt Click on Connect to establish a connection to your MELSEC WS safety controller gt In the Hardware configuration view click on the Run application button If you have not yet logged in as Administrator you will be prompted now to do so Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 gt Go to the Logic editor view and click on the Start force mode button A dialog is opened where you can enter the time after which the force mode will be automatically left if no actions are taken Figure 258 Dialog window when starting Set Force Parameter force mode Start Force Mode Force mode is a safety critical functionality You can select the time after which the force mode is terminated unless it is retriggered by using force actions in the Setting and Monitoring Tool Device in Force Mode minutes v gt Choose the desired time span from the drop box list and click OK Force mode will be activated and the background colour of the logic editor changes to orange Figure 259 Logic editor with force mode activated a tonne O Fave oere Note
128. S 232 data area gt Choose a byte in the RS 232 data area gt For each bit of the selected byte that you wish to use enter a tag name Each bit to which you assign a tag name here is then available as an RS 232 input in the logic editor Project Device Extras w H G com settings B39 connect Ji B Hardware configuration Ca Network Modules 2 Report mo Diagnostics 2 Data Recorder a In Out summary page 9 Disconnect ay Transfer fe Upload B CPU3 Module EESE Aa a amp s Configuration is valid Gard I AAAS 100 CPUs 1 0 matrix T XTIO 1 H RS 232 4 Rs22200 4 R522201 4 Rs23202 4 Rs23203 4 Rs23204 H RS23205 4 R52320 6 4 RS23207 4 RS2321 0 4 RS23211 4 RS23212 m PH RS2321 4 4 RS23215 H R523216 H R523217 4 Rs23220 H Rs2322 1 4 Rs23222 H Rs23223 4 Rs23224 H AS23225 bd 2902027 Inputs Funct gt Outputs Diagn repr Operator ff Offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified Saving and loading a configuration Using the buttons Load user configuration and Save user configuration you can save or load a configuration in XML format If you load a configuration all previously made changes that have not been saved will be lost You can not undo this action Importing and exporting a configuration Using the Import and Exp
129. S 5 Input 2 5 on 1o C4000 XTIOR 1516 0 1 Lamp XTIOBL s a 11 POB 3 Ouiput 0 0 2 Not connected 12 POB 4 Oulput 0 0 4 Not connected Momaea gt Teeeptto 8 No Name input Output 6 OR LO Single channel NO XTIO 3 6 0 0 interiock with Locking XTIO 2 1 11 Single channel NO_XTIO 3 4 7 OR 1 0 Single channel NO XTIO 3 4 0 Inteiock with Locking XTIO 2 G2 1 1 Single channel NO_XTIO 3 I7 289 uu HH Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM 3 3 3 CPU0 IO0 Tag name 2v A1 CPU Power Supply w A2 3 3 3 1 Wiring diagram wWS0 CPU0 CPU 3 4 VO module 3 4 1 XTIO 1 3 4 1 1 General Information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware number version version WSO XTIO 0401 0000 v 1 000 0 00 3 412 Inputs Mode Title Tag name 2 wv A 7 mo 2 sensor muting aa 130 200V 1x 1 ON OFF OFF ON Dis ms RES RxD GND TxD Address 290 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM Mode Title Tag name ON OFF OFF ON Dis ms 3 w A 18 o 2 sensor muting 4 aw a E Stop E521 Dual channel z e 5 awr ver a E Stop 521 Dual channel 6 W El 5 C4000 Safety Light Curtain Type 4 3000 24v 6 3 413 Outputs Mode Title Tag name s Motor contactor 7 ia a H Dual channel 8 a G e Motor contactor tp a 3 4 1 4 Power Supply Title Tag name 1 mv amp Al XTIO 1 Power Supply w A2 3 41 5 Wiring diagram 4 5 6 2 3 ia El k 6 E Stop ES21 E Stop E 21 C4000 1MutingSensa 2m
130. SDI required output is High when a break is expected at the PSDI input 256 Chapter 9 Table 113 Error states and information on resetting for the N break function block 257 Logic programming Function blocks Unexpected PSDI The Unexpected PSDI output is High when a valid start sequence has been carried out and the PSDI input changes from High to Low while no muting is active and no break is expected If Unexpected PSDI is High a valid restart sequence generally has to be carried out before the Enable output can be set to High If the Unexpected PSDI output is High and the Enable output is Low and the PSDI input is also Low and Restart interlock is set to Without a restart is possible without a complete restart sequence This can also apply during the press upstroke if Restart interlock is set to Deactivation on upstroke only for PSDI Error states and information on resetting Di ti pace Resetting the error state Remarks outputs Unexpected If an interruption of the protective field occurs the PSDI The Enable output PSDI input generally has to return to High followed by a valid changes to Low and restart sequence in order to reset the error Fault present If the Unexpected PSDI output is High and the Enable Changes to High if output is Low and the PSDI input is also Low and Unexpected PSDI PSDI Restart interlock is set to Without or Deactivation on O PSDI timeout is timeout upstroke only for PSDI
131. Stop to Run or vice versa using the Setting and Monitoring Tool Other states are based on the internal self test of the safety controller e g Internal error The following table summarizes the device states of the safety controller MS LED Meaning Notes O Supply voltage is outside range Switch on the supply voltage and check it at the terminals A1 and A2 Red Green 1 Hz Green 1 Hz A self test is being carried out or the system is being initialized System is in Stop state Please wait Start the application in the Setting and Monitoring Tool amp Green 2 Hz Identify e g for Flexi Link Green System is in Run state Red 1 Hz Invalid configuration Check the module type and version of the CPU module and safety I O modules whose MS LED flashes Red Green If appropriate adapt the configuration using the Setting and Monitoring Tool For detailed diagnostics information refer to the Setting and Monitoring Tool Red 2 Hz Critical error in the system Switch the supply voltage off and on possibly in this module again If the error is not eliminated after Application is stopped All multiple repetition replace this module outputs are switched off For detailed diagnostics information refer to the Setting and Monitoring Tool Red Critical error in the system Switch the supply voltage off and on possibly in another again module
132. Tag name editor 61 The graphical user interface 5 6 10 Tag name editor The Tag name editor is the central place where you can edit all tag names in your project To open the tag name editor either click on the Edit tag names button in the Hardware configuration view or click on the Open dialog to edit logic result markers button in the Logic editor toolbar Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 7 0 7 0 19 DFAE lt unsaved gt Project Device Extras He By H H com settings f connect Ft visconnect Transfer Me Upload B B Hardware configuration 2 Logic editor Network Modules E3 Report g amp Diagnostics k Data Recorder CPU3 Module G a Edit tag names s xom ofc BGEG8800 izn J C2000 g N i56 Y8 REIYRE23RE27 h u Reset Network module at address 13 eB EE E va Lamp VQ2 Motor ELSEC W ees XTA co ZGGOEE00 i Edit input and output element tagnames found in hardware view Select range CSV source file Operator t Offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified ing g g The different types of tag names in the name editor Logic results and markers Tag names in the logic editor CPU module Local I O Input and output element tag names in the hardware view safety I O modules Network module at address 13 14 Input and output data set tag names network modules EFI1 EFI2 Input and output
133. The AND mode is deactivated again if the Actuator released input is high or if the Max time for AND mode has elapsed When the Max time for AND mode elapses it has no effect on the Fault present output In AND mode the discrepancy time is not monitored 200 Chapter 9 Figure 189 Sequence timing diagram for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block AND mode Figure 190 Sequence timing diagram for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block off delay 201 Logic programming Function blocks Input A t Input B t Actuator enabled i t Enable output gt t AND mode active t Off delay Using the off delay briefly switching off one or both inputs can be ignored and the Release output remains high If one or both of the inputs is are still switched off after the off delay has elapsed then the Release output changes to low If the optional Off delay timer input is used then the off delay is only effective if this input is high If the Off delay timer input is low then switching off one or both inputs has an immediate effect The off delay is effective in both the dual channel mode and also in the AND mode Off delay Input A Input B Off delay timer Input Enable output Off delay timer Status input A B The two Status input A and Status input B outputs indicate the internal value on the two inputs
134. The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 9 Data recorder view Once you have completed your project and established a connection to your MELSEC WS safety controller you can record input and output signals Various selection windows area available in the Data recorder view for this purpose Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 7 0 New project lt unsaved gt E laj x Project Device Extras eH Com settings PfJoonnect Af Disconnect iy Transter fh Upload 1 CPU3 Module iif UL E Stop ES2 E 1 0 configuration Logic editor aX S292 0 E Report g amp Diaenostice hull Data Recorder o Trace frequency Ce m P etna Seer aa ed IPAQ 11 Store Options a E E Stop E521 xT10 1 12 E Stop ES21 XTIO 1 2 FZ Store new values only a Motor XTIO 1 Q2 Motor XTIO 1 92 LUN E Motor XTIO 1 Q4 Motor XTIO 1 94 o E Motor XTIO 1 Q1 Motor XTIO 1 Q1 Stopped 1 The data recorder confie is valid o4 a Read configuration KE from device routs z MUOU UO UUL B u marker Current stot tims 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 24 1 fi r r x x 0 500 1000 00 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 Total tims Inputs Diagnostics Outputs a gt Valid configuration Executing Administrator J System Onli
135. While force mode is active it is not possible to logout to upload and compare a configuration or to stop the safety controller 268 Chapter 9 Figure 260 Forced and not forced inputs 269 Note Logic programming Function blocks How to force an input gt Click on an input with the left mouse button A context menu with the following options will appear Force low The MELSEC WS safety controller will evaluate the input independently of its actual physical value as Low Force high The safety controller will evaluate the input independently of its actual physical value as High Remove force The safety controller will evaluate the input with its actual physical value Forced inputs are marked with a dark blue frame High inputs are displayed green Low inputs are displayed white Inputs whose forced value differs from their physical value are displayed light blue Input physically Low not forced Safety switch XTIO 1 I5 Input physically High not forced Input physically High forced Low Input physically High forced High e While an input is forced in the logic the actual value on the physical input is not displayed in the logic editor but only in the Hardware configuration view e Forcing affects only the inputs in the logic program but not the physical inputs of safety I O modules Examples Forcing has no effect on the inputs of a WS0 XTIO module that are used f
136. a are read back from the safety controller and compared with the project data If they match the data are displayed in a report If the user confirms that they are correct the safety controller is considered to be verified If the configuration is verified the MELSEC WS safety controller will change into the Run state automatically after the voltage supply has been switched on If the configuration is not verified the system must be set into the Run state manually using the Setting and Monitoring Tool see Section 12 1 How to verify the configuration gt Click the Upload and verify configuration button i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project Ri Transfer S 129 Report g amp Diaenostics a FWY 2 00 FWY 1 05 FWY 1 10 Rev V 2 3 Rev V 130 Rev V13 A1 A2 MITSUBISHI neg MS XxTDI Bore x5 xe x7 A asi x5 7 X8 0000 Valid configuration Executing Machine Operator System Online A Device configuration is not verified Figure 263 Setting a device to verified Transferring the system configuration Chapter 11 gt The Upload and verify result window is opened Click Yes below at the question Set device to verified if the displayed configuration is the expected configuration The system is then considered to be verified R Upload and verify result i E Bt Report 2011 04 26 16 32 29 Configuration Installed software components Tool Version
137. ace rosin swatch XT fy metue pointy seth OC Machine Operator offline L Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified In the I O matrix window all inputs and outputs are listed By checking or unchecking the checkboxes you can select which inputs and outputs shall be displayed in the I O matrix This can be useful in complex projects with many inputs and outputs to condense the displayed information to the most important aspects I O matrix in simulation mode In simulation mode see Section 9 14 the I O matrix displays the values of the used inputs and outputs High inputs and outputs are displayed green By clicking on an input you can toggle its value between High and Low and monitor the effect on the output values Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project FZ Motor contactor XTIO 1 01 H F Motor xTIO 1 02 i 00 00 13696 gt F Lemp xTIO 1 08 n igus T Omatrix _InjOut summary page Page 1 FZ Reset xri0 4 FZ Safety switch xni0 1 s112 initwin xTI041 718 Z E Stop E521 XTIO 1 S Z RE13RE27 XTIO I516 IF inductive proximity switch XTDY2 15 Motor xTIO 11 02 Lamp xTio t 04 inductive proximity switch XTDI2 16 F earan diy ductive proximity switch xToN2115 Oro eve 10 mati Machine Operator 23 offline L Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified 60 Chapter 5 Figure 32
138. ag name Lamp Single channel Motor contactor Dual channel Title Tag name XTIO T Power Supply Address 130 200V 1x 1 ON OFF OFF ON Dis ms Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM 7 B 2 3 4 5 atte n 3F Y Ja a Sa a E Stop ES21 Enabling sich Resat ard Mode 1 Reset and Mode 2 EDM EDM WwSsS0 XTIO Qi Q2 24v OV ov ov ov Power Supply Motor contacts Lamp 1 a wt 9 6 3 4 1 6 Test pulse parameter acai eel eee oes iat Long gap value ms x2 200 1 3 4 2 XTDI2 34 241 General Information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Address number version version WSO XTDI 0401 0000 v 1 000 0 00 1 3 0 200Vixx 2 342 2 Inputs Mode Title Tag name ON OFF OFF ON Dis ms 1 xt Bog n RE300 Reed swich dual channel antvalent 1500 x2 b 2 2 8 13 CRO RE300 Reed swich dual channel antivalent 1500 wm Pi a xt 3 x5 a I5 mcno RE300 Reed swich dual channel antvalent 1500 x P 6 e 4 a a 7 MERO RE300 Reed swich dual channel antivalent 1500 xB f es lt 302 Chapter 15 303 Annex Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM 34 2 3 Wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 pe pa pu peu RE300 RE300 RE300 RE300 x8 x7 17 18 WS0 XTDI 34 2 4 Test pulse parameter Test outputs Period value ms Gap value ms Long gap value ms XUXNXS KT 200 1 X2IKAIXEXB 200 1 x Page 9 Annex Chapter 15 15 1 3 Example application Ramp down detection
139. ail kang sickkorea net Republika Slovenija Phone 386 0 1 47 69 990 E Mail office sick si Romania Phone 40356171120 E Mail office sick ro Russia Phone 7 495 775 05 34 E Mail info sick automation ru Schweiz Phone 41 41 619 29 39 E Mail contact sick ch Singapore Phone 65 6744 3732 E Mail admin sicksgp com sg Suomi Phone 358 9 25 15 800 E Mail sick sick fi Sverige Phone 46 10 110 10 00 E Mail info sick se Taiwan Phone 886 2 2375 6288 E Mail sales sick com tw Turkiye Phone 90 216 587 74 00 E Mail info sick com tr United Arab Emirates Phone 971 4 8865 878 E Mail info sick ae USA Canada Mexico Phone 1 952 941 6780 1800 325 7425 tollfree E Mail info sickusa com 314 WARRANTY 2 Limits of Warranties a MELCO does not warrant or guarantee the design 1 Limited Warranty and Product Support X 7 specify manufacture construction or installation of a Mitsubishi Electric Company MELCO warrants that for a period of eighteen 18 months after date of delivery from the point of manufacture or one year from date of Customer s purchase whichever is less Mitsubishi Safety Controller the Products will be free from defects in material and workmanship b At MELCO s option for those Products MELCO determines are not as warranted MELCO shall either repair or replace them or issue a credit or return the purchase price paid for them c For this warranty to apply 1 Customer
140. already stand for the Active status the Enable output remains Low nevertheless A synchronization error timeout is reset if the Active synchronization status has been reached i e the Enable output changes to High When defining values for the synchronization time the following must be observed The synchronization time must be greater than the logic execution time has a tolerance of 10 ms in addition to the logic execution time The logic execution time depends on the number and type of function blocks used and is shown in the Setting and Monitoring Tool in the logic editor on the FB info tab and also in the report If signals from tested sensors are connected to WSO XTDI or WSO0 XTIO modules the synchronization time should be at least the set Test gap ms plus the Max off on delay ms because a signal change at the module input can be delayed for this time Both values are displayed in the Setting and Monitoring Tool report for the used test output Figure 178 Sequence timing diagram for the Safety gate monitoring function block Category 4 dual channel equivalent 2 pairs without function test Figure 179 Function block diagram for the Emergency stop function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Safety gate monitoring function block Category 4 dual channel logic without function test Timing diagram of the synchronization monitoring input 1A LS SS Lo Input 1B LOO Inpu
141. ameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of inputs 1to 8 Invert input x Each input of this function block can be inverted see Section 9 5 2 154 Chapter 9 Figure 132 Function block diagram for the Reset function block Table 63 Parameters of the Reset function block 155 Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 Application specific function blocks 9 8 1 Reset Function block diagram Release 1 g Release condition fulfilled Release 2 g Reset Required Indication General description The Reset function block can be used to fulfill the normative requirements for safety applications on acknowledging a manual safety stop and the subsequent request to restart the application Typically each safety logic system of a MELSEC WS safety controller contains a Reset function block Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Min reset pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Number of inputs 2 to 8 1 to 7 Release inputs activated Release condition fulfilled output The Release condition fulfilled output displays the result of an AND combination of all activated Release inputs It is High if all activated Release inputs are High Reset required output The Reset required output shows by pulsing at 1 Hz that the function block expects a valid reset pulse at the Reset input so that the Enable output can become High
142. an be found in the Extras menu under About For the acquisition of the newest version of the Setting and Monitoring Tool please contact your local Mitsubishi representative The function package Revision 1 xx or Revision 2 xx must be selected in the Setting and Monitoring Tool hardware configuration Function package Revision 2 xx is available with Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 and higher In order to use function package Revision 2 xx the respective module must have at least firmware version V2 00 0 Otherwise you will receive an error message when you try to upload a configuration using Revision 2 xx to a module with a lower firmware version Newer modules are downward compatible so that any module can be replaced by a module with a higher firmware version The same firmware version and function package revision as those of the module used must be set to the new project after a project stored in the memory plug is modified You will find the device s date of manufacture at the bottom of the type label in the format yywwnnnn yy year ww calendar week nnnn continuos serial number in the calendar week Installation and removal Chapter 4 Installation and removal Note Note 4 1 System requirements Recommended system configuration e Windows XP 32 Bit 64 Bit Windows Vista 32 Bit 64 Bit or Windows 7 32 Bit 64 Bit e Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 e 1 GHz processor e 1GBRAM e 1024 x 768 pixel scree
143. an not connect to a system and the configuration can not be transferred to the MELSEC WS safety controller Simulation is not possible A MELSEC WS safety controller can only ever contain a maximum of two network interface modules How to enable configurations with more than twelve I O modules gt In the Hardware configuration view click on the Settings icon at the left of the Configuration area to open the Settings dialog gt On the General file card activate the Enable additional XT modules option gt Click OK 32 Chapter 5 Figure 9 CPU status bits in the Hardware configuration view Figure 10 Network module status bits in the Hardware configuration view 33 The graphical user interface 5 5 2 Module status bits in the Hardware configuration view When the MELSEC WS safety controller is online i e the Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to the system you can display the status bits of each module and their current values gt Right click on any module CPU module network module or safety I O module and select Edit in the context menu If the system is online the dialog window for the selected module opens with the additional Diagnostics file card where all available status bits for the selected module and their values are displayed gt Click on the Refresh button to update the values of the module status bits Module not in operation Module is internally OK
144. and the related Feedback input changes to High The Directional error output becomes High if the Valve type parameter is Directional and the Control 1 and Control 2 inputs are High at the same time The Fault present output becomes High if Feedback error and or Directional error is High The Feedback error Directional error and Fault present outputs become Low if all activated Control inputs are Low and all activated Feedback inputs are High If the Reset condition is configured as Manual reset a valid reset pulse must be applied at the Reset input additionally The Min reset pulse time defines the minimum required duration of the pulse at the Reset input Valid values are 100 ms and 350 ms If the pulse duration is shorter than the configured minimum pulse time or longer than 30 s the pulse is ignored Ensure that the transitions of the signals for resetting fulfill the requirements of the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Sequence timing dia
145. ardware possible Revision 2 xx Status input data and Status V2 01 V2 00 V1 3 0 output data in logic Revision 2 xx Revision 2 xx a V2 01 Data recorder Revision 2 xx V1 7 0 Extended cross circuit detection 3 10 time for switching loads with Revision 3 xx V1 7 0 high capacitance i Adjustable filter time for ON OFF filter and OFF ON filter on the _ V3 10 V1 7 0 22 Chapter 3 23 Note Version compatibility and features WS0 XTIO i Device WS0 CPU Ferina ang WS0 XTDI Monitoring Tool Ethernet interface module v1 11 z V1 20 Revision 1 xx CC Link interface module V1 11 Sa V1 2 1 Revision 1 xx ROHS conformity WS0 XTIO v1 01 means any or not applicable 2 All other modules from product launch onwards You can find the firmware version on the type label of the MELSEC WS modules in the field Firmware version In order to use modules with a newer firmware version a new Setting and Monitoring Tool version is required For CPU0 1 2 V2 01 and XTIO XTDI 2 V2 00 Setting and Monitoring Tool V1 3 0 or higher is required This has to be considered when devices are to be replaced in existing systems You will find the firmware version of the MELSEC WS modules in the hardware configuration view of the Setting and Monitoring Tool when the system is online or in the report if the system has been online before The version of the Setting and Monitoring Tool c
146. are stored is not overwritten during the new installation and is retained When an RS232 USB converter WS0 UC 232A is used install a driver from the CD ROM provided with the converter When an RS232 USB configuration cable WS0 C20M8U is used please contact your local Mitsubishi representative for a driver of the cable 24 Chapter 4 Table 3 Errors and error elimination 25 Installation and removal 4 3 Removal The Setting and Monitoring Tool can be removed as follows gt In the Windows Start menu start Uninstall Setting and Monitoring Tool in the Setting and Monitoring Tool program folder 4 4 Troubleshooting Error Error message Cause Rectification When Setting and Monitoring Tool is started the following or a similar error message is displayed DLL not found the Dynamic Link Library mscoree dll was not found in the specified path Specify the registration key HKLM Software Microsoft N ETFramework InstallRoot so that it refers to the installation location of the NET Framework Microsoft NET Framework is not installed on the PC Install a suitable version of Microsoft NET Framework Ask your system administrator if appropriate NET Framework is available for downloading on the internet pages of Microsoft Note Install NET Framework 3 5 The graphical user interface The graphical user interface Note Figure 1 Start view with selection of
147. at the same time the following priorities apply e On a single Log generator function block the input with the lower number is prioritized i e the message triggered by this input will be logged first e f several Log generator function blocks are used the function block with the lower function block index is prioritized i e the messages generated by this function block will be logged first 9 7 17 Routing 1 N Function block diagram General description The Routing 1 N function block passes an input signal from a preceding function block to up to eight output signals This function block makes it possible to connect an output of a function block or an input element with several output elements e g outputs of a WS0 XTIO module CPU marker It is not needed however for the connection to several function block inputs because this can be done directly Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of outputs 1to 8 Figure 131 Function block diagram for the Routing N N function block Table 62 Parameters of the Routing N N function block Logic programming Function blocks 9 7 18 Routing N N Function block diagram General description Chapter 9 The Routing N N function block passes up to eight input signals parallel to up to eight outputs The input signal can originate from a preceding function block or directly from a physical input Par
148. ate and back to the Run state with the Setting and Monitoring Tool Top output and Upstroke output The Top output is typically used to stop the press and is connected to another complementary press function block e g Press setup or Press single stroke The Upstroke output is typically connected to another complementary press function block e g Press single stroke or Press Setup Additionally it can be used to initiate upstroke muting This function block sets the Upstroke output and the Top output based on value changes of the cam inputs If the function block detects an error both outputs are set to Low The Top output is set to High if the TDC input is Low The Upstroke output is set to High with a rising edge transition from Low to High of the BDC input It is set to Low either with a falling edge of the TDC input or with a falling edge of the BDC input whichever occurs first If the function blocks starts power up disable gt enable with the BDC input High the Upstroke output will remain Low for the first press cycle sar Top output TDC BDC 360 0 270 90 1 180 Upstroke output 234 Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks Figure 219 Press cycle for the Universal press contact function block with falling edge of BDC before TDC TDC BDC Upstroke output A second rising edge of the BDC input does not restart the upstroke phase T
149. ation of the discrepancy time the Fault present output changes to High and all outputs change to the value defined in the error output combination If in the first logic cycle after the transition from the Stop state to the Run state there is no valid input combination the configured error output combination is applied to the outputs and the Fault present output changes to High immediately Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Discrepancy time 0 to 10 seconds in steps of 10 ms Error output combination Checked outputs will be High and not checked outputs will be Low when Fault present is High Number of inputs or Number of outputs 2 to 8 Use fault present e With e Without Table 72 Truth table for the User mode switch function block Figure 151 Sequence timing diagram for the User mode switch function block Note Logic programming Function blocks Truth table for the User mode switch function block The truth table uses the following designations 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High Chapter 9 Inputs Outputs 1 2 3 4 51 6 7 8 Faultpresent 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 TOOME NCO 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 Old l oOlo loealo aA 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0070 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
150. ationis idle p Configuration in the device is equal with the Setting and Monitoring 1004 0006 U Too coriguaion Firinurare varsion _ BB Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified 2 00 16 Au vine configuatienienetveriied H U Flexi Link IDs EFI 1 not matching device 18274 project 26502 I U Flexi Link IDs EFI 2 not matching device 18275 project 2650 The Flexi Link IDs are also displayed in the Flexi Link Network settings view If the configuration of any station in the Flexi Link system is changed in a way that affects the process image of the system e g if a station is added to the system or if the default value for one of the transmitted bits is changed then the Setting and Monitoring Tool calculates a new Flexi Link ID based on the changed process image In this case you have to transmit the configuration to all stations in the system not only to the station whose configuration you have changed Otherwise the new Flexi Link IDs will be transferred only to this station while the other stations will keep the old Flexi Link IDs The resulting Flexi Link ID mismatch between the stations will disrupt the process image communication in the system If a differing Flexi Link ID is detected no process image transfer between the stations is possible and all CPU modules WS0 CPU1 in the system will show a recoverable error MS LED flashing Red at 1 Hz and EFI1 and EFI2 LEDs will light up Red Only conf
151. atus output is High High Override cycle active High Override required Pulses at 2 Hz Muting error output The Muting error output is used to indicate that an error connected to the muting function block has been detected The Muting error output becomes High when any muting error has been detected In order to reset a muting error it is necessary that all muting sensors return to Low and that the OSSD signal of the ESPE is High Enable output The Enable output is High if a valid muting condition exists a valid override cycle occurs or if the OSSD input of the ESPE is clear and no error error state is active Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 10 3 Information on wiring If muting functions are to be implemented possible errors in the wiring have to be taken into consideration If certain signal combinations are to be transferred ina common wire additional precautions have to be taken in order to ensure that the respective signals are correct Suitable measures have to be taken e g protected wiring in order to ensure that errors cannot arise through this wiring Table 99 Wiring combinations for Z muting and prerequisites oe gt 5 v 3 Q Q Q gt o a ee IET S ol o Ay 7 o o E Ko D D z gt W Q S Signal T N q 5 T g g 5 5 g description lt m a oO 5 w O W O A1 A B B A A A A A A A C A2 A B B A A A A A A A C B1 B B A A A A A A A A C
152. ave been instructed by the responsible machine operator in the operation of the machine and the current valid safety guidelines and e are sufficiently familiar with the applicable official health and work safety regulations directives and generally recognized engineering practice e g DIN standards VDE stipulations engineering regulations from other EC member states that they can assess the work safety aspects of the power driven equipment and e have access to the MELSEC WS manuals and have and read and familiarised themselves with them and e have access to the operating instructions for the protective devices e g C4000 connected to the safety controller and have read and familiarised themselves with them 2 2 Correct use The Setting and Monitoring Tool is used to configure a MELSEC WS safety controller consisting of modules of the safety controller The MELSEC WS safety controller may only be used by qualified safety personnel and only at the machine at which it was mounted and initially commissioned by qualified safety personnel in accordance with the MELSEC WS manuals Mitsubishi Electric Corporation accepts no claims for liability if the software or the devices are used in any other way or if modifications are made to the software or the devices even in the context of mounting and installation e Observe the safety instructions and protective measures of the Safety Controller User s Manual and this manual e When im
153. blocks For restrictions to this rule that apply in forward backward locked mode see below 5 If the release time has expired and no transition to inch mode has occurred the function block will transit back to Waiting for start mode and a complete start sequence is required again 6 The duration of the inch mode is not limited It will be stopped if the High input Inch forward or Inch backward becomes Low again In this case the Enable output and the Forward active or the Backward active output will become Low again The inch mode will also be stopped if both inputs Inch forward and Inch backward become High at the same time After the inch mode has been stopped the release time starts again This means that another rising edge on the Inch forward or on the Inch backward input will restart the inch mode immediately without a new start sequence If the release time has expired and no transition to inch mode has occurred the function block will transit back to Waiting for start mode and a complete start sequence is required again 7 The inch mode will also be stopped by a falling edge on the Reset input or on the Stop input In this case the function block will transit back to Waiting for start mode and a complete start sequence is necessary again Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Direction switching e Locked e Not locked Waiting time 1 to 60000 ms in steps of 10 ms The value has to be gr
154. c High Table 52 Input A Output2 Output 1 Truth table for the Binary decoder with 1 input in One 0 0 1 out of N mode 1 1 0 Table 53 InputB InputA Output 4 t3 Output 2 tput 1 Truth table for the Binary ali A ene Outputs LBY Obey decoder with 2 inputs in One 0 0 0 0 0 1 out of N mode 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Input C Input B Input A Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 54 Truth table for the Binary decoder with 3 inputs in One out of N mode Table 55 Input A Output 2 Output 1 Truth table for the Binary decoder with 1 input in 0 0 1 Priority mode 1 1 1 Table 56 Input B InputA Output 4 Output3 Output 2 Output 1 Truth table for the Binary decoder with 2 inputs in 0 0 0 0 0 1 Priority mode 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Input C InputB Input A Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
155. cations selection window click on Save as new partial application Or gt Right click on the CPU module and select the Export configuration command from the context menu The following dialog opens a FWV 1 00 Rey V 1x Export file gt You can add a description of the partial application in the Description field gt Click on the button on the right of the Export file field A file selection dialog opens Navigate to the folder where you want to save the export file enter a file name for the export and click on Save to close the file selection dialog again gt Click OK to export the partial application 44 Chapter 5 Figure 20 Import configuration dialog 45 The graphical user interface How to import a partial application gt In the Partial applications selection window click on Load partial application Or gt Right click on the CPU module and select the Import configuration command from the context menu The following dialog opens Import configuration Import file C Fast shut out fsi 2 FWY 1 00 FW V 1 00 Rev V 13 Rev V 130 sere 6 OT B g 2 3 a g a2 Q3 a4 Description Fast shut out XTIO 1 FSO with 3 C4000 light curtain XTIO 2 channel mode switch gt Click on the button on the right of the Import file field A file selection dialog opens gt Select any fsi file and click OPEN to display the contain
156. ce does not support any safety mechanisms necessary for communication in a safety network For this reason the data exchanged via the RS 232 interface are not allowed to be used for safetyrelated functions How to activate the RS 232 routing gt In the hardware configuration click the Settings button in the left of the configuration area gt On the General tab select the Enable RS 232 routing for the CPU option Tag name format General View Paths Export Module Status F Enable customized elements F Don t ask to import customized function blocks F Enable RS 282 routine for the CPU E Enable additional XT modules more than 12 F Reminder of verification if required F Enable additional Relays more than 8 A The maximum power consumption must be considered if this option is enabled F Display warning on transfer if components are located in the parking area C gt Click OK The RS 232 routing is then activated On the Interfaces menu you can now open the configuration window for the data to be transferred You can read up to 100 bytes from the MELSEC WS safety controller and write up to 4 bytes to the MELSEC WS safety controller Figure 22 Configuration of the operating data transferred via RS 232 to the network Figure 23 Toolbar for the routing configuration Note The graphical user interface Chapter 5 Configuration of the input data for the RS 232 routing
157. ce with a Low High Low transition minimum 100 ms or 350 ms and maximum 3 s longer or shorter pulses are ignored has occurred at the Override input the Enable output becomes High as if the muting conditions were fulfilled When all muting sensors have returned to Low and the OSSD input of the ESPE is High e g indicating that the protective field of a safety light curtain is now clear the next valid muting cycle is expected If the next object does not fulfill the conditions for a muting cycle but the conditions for the Override required output a further override cycle can be used in order to remove the transported material The number of override cycles is limited see Table 95 212 Chapter 9 Note Table 94 Conditions for Override required and Override possible Figure 198 Logic diagram for Override and Override required Note A ATTENTION 213 Logic programming Function blocks A reset button can also be suitable for the override function Check the requirements of your application in order to ensure that the safety relevant logic fulfils the requirements of the local regional national and international regulations Table 94 provides information about the Override required output and when Override is possible under the shown conditions and when not Muting Atleastone OSSDs of the Override muting sensor Override possible status At ESPE are High required output i
158. ceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseesnnineeeees 22 4 Installation and reMOVal ccccceeeeneeeee tent eset eeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeetiaeeeeeeaas 24 4 1 System requireMents on a Ea E A AT RET 24 4 2 Installation and Update cccccccccceeeeeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesesennueaeeeeeeeseteenaees 24 4 SiRREMOVAl nna ieee tase aah bttusdit a used meat dees eae ta ieee aera 25 4A Troubleshooting az 2e 3 see edavend A T seast dead atone eee Aedes 25 5 The graphical user interface 0 0 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 26 pose ia WAY Pree eee reece Peer Pere ree eres preter ee eertre ry rr rer rere rrr itt Perr reee rer Terr rer rere 26 5 2 Setting the desired language 0 0 ee eececeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeentaneeeeeaaes 26 5 3 Standard ViOWws iiil asii denied eee Hide tae atir aden aeaiia a dadaan 27 5 4 Positioning Windows ai ee E NEEE E A EE 28 5 5 Hardware Configuration VieW seeessssseieseerissetrrestrrtsttrrsttttnssttnnstttnnnnsttnnntt 29 5 5 1 Exercise for configuring the MELSEC WS modules n 31 5 5 2 Module status bits in the Hardware configuration view c ceeeee 33 5 5 3 Exercise for configuring the connected devices sesseerresrereeeen 35 5 5 4 Safe and non safe elements in the hardware configuration 08 36 5 5 5 Expanding elements in drrien icien adrir ii 36 5 5 6 Parameterization of connected elements cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee
159. cepted as a correct sequence without the need for the other input to follow This situation may be acceptable if the hazardous machine parts actuator are safety shut down at this point in time For this purpose the optional Actuator released input is connected to the signal in the logic that controls the output for the safety related actuator release If necessary the duration of the AND mode can be limited Optionally a brief switch off on one or both inputs can be ignored with the aid of the off delay If necessary the off delay can be enabled using the Off delay timer input e The discrepancy time monitoring can be activated separately for switching on and for switching off Table 87 Parameters for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block Table 88 State of the tolerant dual channel monitor as a function of the input mode Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Function block parameters Parameters Input mode Possible values e Equivalent e Complementary Evaluation mode Max time for AND e Dual channel e Dual channel AND mode 0 infinite 1 to 60000 s mode Discrepancy time on e Without switching on e With Discrepancy time on e Without switching off e With Discrepancy time 0 infinite 10 ms to 60 s in 10 ms increments If the value is not 0 the value must be greater than the logic execution time Off delay timer input Off delay e Without e With 0
160. changed back to Low already PSDI input i l Top input l l l l If the Start of first PSDI pulse PSDI input Low High parameter is set to After the start of upstroke upstroke muting must be enabled Otherwise the Enable output changes to Low as soon as the PSDI input changes to Low i e at the beginning of the break Upstroke muting and Max Up Stroke muting time Upstroke muting allows bypassing of the PSDI input e g the OSSDs of a safety light curtain during the upstroke of the press cycle Upstroke muting is activated when the Max Up Stroke muting time parameter is set to a value higher than 0 Upstroke muting is inactive when the Max Up Stroke muting time parameter is set to 0 When upstroke muting is activated e itis imperative that the Upstroke input is connected to a suitable signal This can be the Upstroke output e g of the Eccentric press contact or of the Universal press contact function block e the PSDI input of the function block is bypassed if the Upstroke input is High and the Top input remains Low The function block does not check the Upstroke input for plausibility This means that it is possible to bypass the PSDI input several times if the Upstroke input is activated several times during a single press cycle A ATTENTION Figure 238 Sequence timing diagram for Upstroke muting in Standard mode in two cycle mode Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9
161. configuration of the JK Flip Flop function block with no input inverted J input K input Clock input OutputQ 1 OutputQ Output Q x x 0 1 or 0 0 1 x x 0 1 or 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 t 1 1 0 0 1 t 0 0 1 0 1 f 1 0 1 1 0 T 0 1 0 1 0 f 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 f 1 0 1 9 7 9 Multiple memory Function block diagram General description Using the multiple memory function block the state of up to 7 inputs can either be forwarded unchanged or saved depending on the Latch input If the Latch input is low the state of inputs 1 to 7 is forwarded unchanged to the outputs 1 to 7 If the Latch input changes from low to high then the current state of inputs 1 to 7 is saved and output on outputs 1 to 7 as long as the Latch input is high The Latch output corresponds to the Latch input 134 Chapter 9 Table 37 Parameters for the multiple memory function block Table 38 Truth table for the multiple memory function block Figure 108 Function block diagram for the Clock generator function block Figure 109 Parameter diagram for the Clock generator function block 135 Logic programming Function blocks Function block parameters Parameter Possible values Number of inputs without Latch input 1to7 Invert input x Invert Save Each input of this function block can be inverted see section9 5 2 Truth tabl
162. ct the required number of bits to be transmitted the maximum segment cable length between be based on the system name two neighboring stations and the transmission cycle time of this information Because these three 2 parameters are mutually dependent not every combination can be selected Green combinations are FlexiLine configuration possible red cannot be selected E Report Diagnostics ALK Data Recorder D gt Bit number Byte Checksum OxAEBF 5 configuration 32 Bits 64 Bits 96 Bits The checksum of the Flexi Line definition is calculated from the detana namar of bs ranenastion cyl ie maor oven ambar o aana E a and definition of the individual bytes of the transmission The identical 3 checksum is required for communication between Flexi Line stations S 250m 0 a n ESTEE on M N E S H Eao a revision mnbor for eration of tha Fla Une dokis So oon A A change in the major nur ifies incompatible Flexi Line definitions The minor number is used to distinguish further developed Flexi Line definitions in terms of compatibility Send cycle time ms Major version number 1 n Minor version number 0 2 4 8 12 2 Description Describe your application and your changes in the individual revisions of your Flexi Line definition Operator i Offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified In the left of this view you can enter for your process image a name a
163. ction block detects an error both outputs are set to Low Without Dynamic cam The Upstroke output is set to High with a rising edge transition from Low to High of the Upstroke cam input and is set to Low with a rising edge of the Overrun cam input The Top output is set to High if the Overrun cam input is High Top output Overrun cam Upstroke cam m High Upstroke output With Dynamic cam If this function block is configured with Dynamic cam the start of the Top phase can be brought forward with a falling edge transition from High to Low of the Dynamic cam input The Upstroke output is set to High with a rising edge transition from Low to High of the Upstroke cam input It is set to Low either with a rising edge of the Overrun cam input or with a falling edge of the Dynamic cam input whichever occurs first The Top output is set to High with a rising edge of the Overrun cam or with a falling edge of the Dynamic cam input whichever occurs first The Top output is set to Low with a falling edge of the Overrun cam input 228 Chapter 9 Figure 213 Press cycle for the Eccentric press contact function block with Dynamic cam on upstroke Figure 214 Press cycle for the Eccentric press contact function block with Dynamic cam on upstroke and downstroke Note 229 Logic programming Function blocks Top output Overrun cam Upstroke cam Dynamic cam Upstroke outp
164. ction block requires that a valid muting sequence takes place Figure 207 shows an example of a valid muting sequence based on the basic parameter setting for this function block The optional input C1 is not contained in the sequence shown below Muting sensor A1 A a i r Muting sensor A2 got e a ee OSSDs of the safety sensor l Enable Muting error Muting status l Figure 208 Function block diagram for the Cross muting function block A ATTENTION Figure 209 Cross muting for bidirectional movement of material Table 105 Conditions for Cross muting without optional input C1 Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 10 9 Cross muting material transport in both directions Function block diagram Override gi Conveyor gj Representation of the application The sensors can be located as follows in the case of muting applications with one crossed sensor pair where the material has to be moved in both directions The optional signal C1 is not used in this application example Ensure that the muting sensors detect only the moved material Ensure that the muting sensors are positioned in such a manner that no one can enter the hazardous area by fulfilling the muting conditions meaning that they activate both muting sensors and thus create the required conditions for muting Hazardous area Transported material ESPE e g safety light curtain Input co
165. d Therefore single channel signals with test pulses need special attention e If the stuck at high occurs on a single channel signal input with test pulses that was previously High the logic will see a delayed falling edge High to Low transition e Ifa single channel input is used and an unexpected pulse or a delayed falling edge High to Low at this input may lead to a dangerous situation the following measures have to be taken Protected cabling of the related signal to exclude cross circuits to other signals No cross circuit detection i e no connection to test output This needs especially to be considered for the following inputs Reset input on the Reset function block Restart input on the Restart function block Restart input on the Press function blocks Eccentric Press Contact Universal Press Contact N break Press Setup Press Single Stroke Press Automatic Override input on a Muting function block Reset input on a Valve function block Reset to zero input and Reload input on a Counter function block 38 Chapter 5 Figure 14 Create custom element template window Note 39 The graphical user interface 5 5 7 Customized elements In addition to the standard input and output elements that are installed with the Setting and Monitoring Tool it is possible to create configure import and export customized elements This function allows you to create element templates with preset
166. d and the new profile is displayed in the list gt To activate the new profile select it using the left mouse button and click on the green arrow symbol on the right From now on the Setting and Monitoring Tool will use this profile 72 Chapter 6 Note Figure 44 Create new profile dialog TCP IP 73 Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller How to add a TCP IP profile To create a TCP IP profile it is necessary that your MELSEC WS safety controller contains an Ethernet interface module WS0 GETH which must be configured with a valid IP address for your network For detailed instructions on the Ethernet interface module configuration please see the Safety Controller Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual gt Click on the Add TCP IP profile button The Create new profile dialog is opened Create new profile Entry name L a8 Intel R 82566DM 2 Gigabit Network Connection MAC address 00 1 E 4F D3 31 AC IP address 10 97 19 58 IP address O Enable TCP IP routing lt Subnet address l A Gateway address Search for devices i H Scan MAC address IP address Device name Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller Chapter 6 gt Click on the Scan button Your network is scanned for connected network Figure 45 List of network modules found Table 11 Status symbols for connection profiles modules and the network modules found are
167. d can be used only once in a project Typically a source jump address is connected to any function block output gt Then add one or several destination jump addresses per drag amp drop A dialog opens where you can select the correspondent source jump address for the new destination jump address from the list of existing source jump address labels A source jump address can have several destination jump addresses in a project Typically a destination jump address is connected to any function block input Figure 30 I O matrix in offline mode Figure 31 I O matrix in simulation mode The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 6 9 I O matrix The logic editor s I O matrix file card displays which inputs have an effect on which outputs This can be useful to check whether your logic program is complete A green field indicates that the respective input has an effect on the respective output a white field indicates that there is no relation between this input and output 1 0 matrix In Out summary page Page Z Motor contactor XTIO 1 01 FF Motor xTIO 1 62 F Lamp xTIO 1 04 Inputs Reset XTIO 1 4 F Satety switch XTIO 1 N12 F MiniTwin TOK LIT 7 E Stop E521 XTIO 1 I3 Motor xTIO 1 02 Lamp xona Motor contactor XTIO 1 01 3 Resaxmonu roximty switch XTD2 I5 if me P satety wich xonni JF Inductive proximity switch XTDY2 16 d Ey Marron monme WP E Stop E521 xTIOM 13 PE kerarez7xmonysis A
168. d in MELCO s user instruction and or safety manuals technical bulletins and guidelines for the Products 9 used with obsolete technologies or technologies not fully tested and widely accepted and in use at the time of the Product s manufacture 10 subjected to excessive heat or moisture abnormal voltages shock excessive vibration physical damage or other improper environment or 11 damaged or malfunctioning due to Acts of God fires acts of vandals criminals or terrorists communication or power failures or any other cause or failure that results from circumstances beyond MELCO s control All Product information and specifications contained on MELCO s website and in catalogs manuals or technical information materials provided by MELCO are subject to change without prior notice g The Product information and statements contained on MELCO s website and in catalogs manuals technical bulletins or other materials provided by MELCO are provided as a guide for Customer s use They do not constitute warranties and are not incorporated in the contract of sale for the Products h These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Customer and MELCO with respect to warranties remedies and damages and supersede any other understandings whether written or oral between the parties Customer expressly acknowledges that any representations or statements made by MELCO or others concerning the Products outsid
169. d logic in online operation e You can force only the logic inputs of a safety controller directly but not outputs or logic results such as function blocks or jump addresses e Forcing effects only function block inputs Therefore it is not possible to influence signals that do not depend on the outputs of a function block such as inputs of safety I O modules that are routed directly to a programmable controller via a network module Exclude any danger for persons or equipment In force mode you can freely influence the status of the safety inputs As a result thereof the safety function of your safety equipment can be impaired and a dangerous state may occur e Ensure that no person is present in the dangerous area of your machine or system before activating force mode e Ensure that no person can intrude into the dangerous area of the machine or system while force mode is active e Additional safety measures may be required if forcing is used Do not use force mode from several PCs simultaneously e When using force mode ensure that no person activates the force mode from a second PC Otherwise a dangerous state may occur How to activate the force mode The following requirements must be met in order to use the force mode e You must be logged in to the system as Administrator e The configuration of your safety controller project may not be verified CV LED Yellow flashing with 1 Hz e It is recommended to connect your
170. d period duration effective limit for reliably valid signal Logic Set parameters Effective limit execution Min period Max period Min period Max period time duration duration duration duration 4ms 120 ms 160 ms 120 ms 160 ms 12 ms 120 ms 160 ms 120 ms 156 ms 32 ms 120 ms 160 ms 128 ms 160 ms In the following description the x in the signal names signifies either 1 or 2 i e the index for one of the two separate monitoring functions in the function block The function block can detect the following invalid signals e 1 The period duration measured is too short The time between the rising edges or between the falling edges on the Frequency x input is less than Min period duration This monitoring starts with the first rising edge after the transition from the Stop state to the Run state e 2 The period duration measured is too long The time between the rising edges or between the falling edges on the Frequency x input is greater than Max period duration This monitoring starts with the first rising edge after the transition from the Stop state to the Run state Figure 166 Sequence timing diagram for the frequency monitor function block release activation Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 e 3 The pulse duration measured is too short The pulse duration monitoring is activated Average value of the pulse duration is not 0 and the time between the last rising edge
171. d single channeled In order to maintain the respective Safety Integrity Level the lines have to be routed in such a manner that cross circuits to other live signals can be excluded for example by routing them within protected areas such as in a control cabinet or in separate sheathed cables CAUTION e Before performing online operations Force mode for the running MELSEC WS safety controller from the PC read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety The online operations must be performed by qualified personnel following the operating procedure determined at designing Fully understand the precautions described in the Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool Operating Manual before use e Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Mitsubishi does not warrant any products repaired or modified by persons other than Mitsubishi or FA Center authorized by Mitsubishi e Shut off the external power supply for the MELSEC WS safety controller in all phases before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction e After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module from to the DIN mounting rail and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction e Before handling the module touch a grounded metal obj
172. d to it It is possible to use the same byte several times in the routing table RS 232 data area This area contains the routing table It shows the actual contents of the data sent via the RS 232 interface Bytes and bits highlighted in blue contain live system data if the hardware configuration supports the source Bytes highlighted grey actually do not have data associated with them since the hardware configuration does not support the sources Figure 24 RS 232 to MELSEC WS dialog The graphical user interface Chapter 5 How to delete a data byte from the routing table gt Drag and drop the byte you want to delete to the trashcan icon in the bottom left corner of the RS 232 data area Or gt Select the byte you want to delete by clicking it with the left mouse button Then click on the Delete routing button in the toolbar Or gt Call up the context menu by clicking the respective byte with the right mouse button In the context menu select the Delete routing command How to move a data byte to another place in the routing table gt Drag and drop the byte you want to move to the desired position If the desired position is not free you will have to clear it first by deleting or moving the byte currently assigned to it Tag names area This area shows the tag names for all bits in the byte currently selected in the Available data area or in the RS 232 data area You can edit the tag names in the tag name edito
173. d to simulate the presence of this station See Section 7 4 5 and Section 7 4 6 If a network module is connected to the station the Flexi Link Station X button is integrated in the Network modules menu i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New Project Flexi Link station A D first steps GETH Network module 13 D user defined settings 7 4 1 Flexi Link system System overview The Flexi Link System overview provides information on the configured connected stations and their status To open the system overview first click on the Flexi Link system button in the toolbar and then on the System overview button PRPOGOPO z220 gt R OORORORO BEDE SOG In this view each station is displayed with its current hardware configuration information on the connected CPU online status configuration status and Flexi Link IDs The background color of each station also indicates its online status and configuration status as shown in Figure 70 In the example above Station A is offline light yellow background while station B is online with a valid configuration grey background station C is online with an invalid configuration blue background and no station D has been configured light yellow background 94 Chapter 7 Flexi Link To the left of each station you will find the following tool icons Table 15 Flexi Link system overview
174. ddress 13 because EFI address 14 is already occupied by another SICK EFl compatible device e g EFI network module UE403 gt To switch between EFI address 13 and 14 right click on the WSO CPU1 or WSO CPU3 and choose Address 13 or Address 14 from the context menu After switching of the EFI address the MELSEC WS safety controller carries out a reset i e all outputs are switched off 42 Chapter 5 Note Figure 18 Configuration of the EFI integrity test 43 The graphical user interface EFI system integrity test The WSO0 CPU1 or WSO CPU3 can test the SICK EFl compatible devices connected to the EFI interfaces at every voltage reset The following parameters can be compared with the parameters saved the last time the CPU module was configured e Type code A device with the same type code is expected e Serial number A device with the same serial number is expected e Configuration data A device with the same configuration data is expected If the parameters of the connected device do not match the WS0 CPU1 or WSO CPU3 will use 0 for the input and output data of this EFI device and the corresponding EFI LED EFI1 or EFI2 will start flashing Red 1 Hz If the configuration data is used for the EFI system integrity test then it is imperative to transfer the configuration of the connected SICK EFl compatible devices before the configuration of the CPU module is transferred If the configuration does not ma
175. dow Error messages and warnings regarding the current system status are displayed as a pop up message for each station e You have two possibilities to identify a station Click on the Start identify button of one of the displayed stations The corresponding station s MS and EFI1 LEDs will start flashing alternating with the EFI2 LED 2 Hz You will need the password for Administrator The default password is MELSECWS To stop the LED blinking click the button again it is now labeled Stop identify Check the serial number on the memory plug and compare it with the serial number shown in the Setting and Monitoring Tool The serial number displayed in the Network settings view is the serial number of the memory plug not the serial number of the CPU module Figure 73 Apply settings button Note A ATTENTION Flexi Link Chapter 7 How to change the assigned Flexi Link address A to D gt To change the address of a station click on the up and down arrow buttons to move it up or down to the desired position in the window Alternatively you can drag and drop the station to the desired position 3 A Apply settings gt Click on the Apply settings button in the upper left hand corner of the screen The Flexi Link addresses of the stations will be changed The Apply settings button has no effect on the Flexi Link IDs in the stations The Flexi Link IDs are transferred to the stations as a part of the con
176. ds to be secured according to the respective safety requirements e g by using a key operated switch that is wired to the logic teach input and a restart function block in the logic to check the timing condition gt Only authorized and especially trained personnel are allowed to activate the Teach function gt Before using the Teach function make sure that nobody is in the hazardous area or has access to the hazardous area while the Teach function is active 102 Chapter 7 Figure 79 Note Configuration of the Teach function in the logic editor 103 A ATTENTION Flexi Link e A station is considered as missing and can be suspended if its power supply is switched off or if its EFI connection to the Flexi Link system has been interrupted completely It is not possible to suspend a station if it is still connected and e g one of the following conditions applies The station is not in the Run state The station has generated an EFI error e g due to a Flexi Link ID mismatch e Teaching always affects all powered stations in the Flexi Link system not a single station Therefore it may be sufficient to activate the Teach function just on one of the connected stations However if only one station in the system is equipped with a teach button and configured for teaching then only the other stations in the system can be suspended since this particular station is needed for activating the Teach function e Each
177. dules Report g amp Diagnostics gt Data Recorder CPU3 Module if Flexi Line configuration B R Teach Reset Lock to protect GME a al Co TeSa 2n w General i iow uak 3 gt 5 a Input bits from Flexi Line bits to Flexi Line next Byte a Previous station station a N K Bbb a i gt a Seg ew Dagoren a aGagoaae0 Low tiie pie BGEGEBHO agggaagg d00000a0 aaa m Gaaq8a00 BB500880 4 Byte 3 Plow s BBS00800 5 Byte 4 p gt Low orn uw GEGGa00 agagnana m u uw Gasoaaao Input bits from Fes Line next Output bits to Flexi Line Re up iw GGEGaa0o0 E d N p gt og99000 gog09000 Bo000000 booooo8o Valid configuration Executing Operator 3 System Online Device configuration is not verified The bytes in the process image for the actual station are shown in the Byte overview area on the left If you select one of the bytes the related bits are shown underneath together with their tag names The processing of the selected bits is shown in the Detail overview area on the right e On the left you can see the input bits that are received from the two neighboring stations as well as the status of the local inputs e On the right you can see the output bits that are sent to the two neighboring stations as well as the status of the local outputs If the Flexi Line system is online active bits are shown in color and inactive bits
178. dules internal sampling rate of 4 ms the ON OFF filter and the OFF ON filter extend the reaction time by at least 8 ms e Ifthe signal is alternating within these initial 8 ms the signal change can be delayed for much longer i e until a constant signal of at least 8 ms has been detected Note For dual channel elements with complementary evaluation the respective filter ON OFF or OFF ON is always related to the leading channel Filtering of the complementary channel is active automatically 10 3 Disabling the test pulses of XTIO outputs It is possible to disable the test pulses on one or several outputs of WS0 XTIO modules with firmware version V2 00 0 and higher Disabling the test pulses of any output reduces the safety parameters of all ATTENTION OUtputs Disabling the test pulses of one or more outputs of a WSO XTIO module will reduce the safety parameters for all outputs Q1 Q4 of this module Consider this to ensure that your application conforms to an appropriate risk analysis and avoidance strategy For detailed information on the safety parameters see the user s manuals hardware How to disable the test pulses of a WS0 XTIO output gt Connect an output element to the WSO XTIO module gt Right click the output element and select Edit from the context menu Deactivate the option Enable test pulses of this output The test pulses of this output are switched off A notice will be displayed in the hardware configura
179. dware configuration dialog Once all modules have been identified the Setting and Monitoring Tool will ask whether the configuration shall be uploaded gt Click Yes to upload the configuration 68 Chapter 6 Figure 40 Hardware configuration dialog example Note Note Table 9 Meaning of the background color 69 Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller As an example the following hardware configuration may appear etting and Monitoring Too 1 3 0 New project CPU1 module FWV140 9 FWV1 10 Module 0 ev Rev V120 Rev Vix Rev V130 WSO CPUI 0851 0002 1030 0085 v 2 000 100 13021 V 22 Online Module 1 GETH WSO GETH 09100112 v1050 1 00 13021 V1xx xB o000 ine Operator 2 System Online w Device configuration is verified gt Click Disconnect to go into the offline mode if you want to change the configuration of the MELSEC WS modules Alternatively you can click on the Online edit mode button to make minor changes without having to disconnect each time Configuration and verification of devices that are connected to the MELSEC WS safety controller is generally not carried out using the Setting and Monitoring Tool even if they can be addressed via the RS 232 interface of a MELSEC WS module These devices have their own mechanisms for configuration and verification An exception is SICK EFl compatible devices connected to the WS0 CPU1 or WSO CPU3 module EFI el
180. e Valve 2 is active Wait for feedback Drive is coasting 312 Chapter 15 Annex 15 3 Precautions 1 Edit a CSV file exported from Setting and Monitoring tool in a text editor 313 Annex 15 4 SICK contact Chapter 15 More representatives and agencies in all major industrialnations at www sick com Australia Phone 61 3 9497 4100 1800 33 48 02 tollfree E Mail sales sick com au Belgium Luxembourg Phone 32 0 2 466 55 66 E Mail info sick be Brasil Phone 55 11 3215 4900 E Mail sac sick com br CeskaRepublika Phone 420 2 57 91 18 50 E Mail sick sick cz China Phone 852 2763 6966 E Mail ghk sick com hk Danmark Phone 45 45 82 64 00 E Mail sick sick dk Deutschland Phone 49 211 5301 260 E Mail info sick de Espana Phone 34 93 480 31 00 E Mail info sick es France Phone 33 1 64 62 35 00 E Mail info sick fr GreatBritain Phone 44 0 1727 831121 E Mail info sick co uk India Phone 91 22 4033 8333 E Mail info sick india com Israel Phone 972 4 9990590 E Mail info sick sensors com Italia Phone 39 02 27 43 41 E Mail info sick it Japan Phone 81 0 3 3358 1341 E Mail support sick jp Nederlands Phone 31 0 30 229 25 44 E Mail info sick nl Norge Phone 47 67 81 50 00 E Mail austefjord sick no Osterreich Phone 43 0 22 36 62 28 8 0 E Mail office sick at Polska Phone 48 22 837 40 50 E Mail info sick pl Republic of Korea Phone 82 2 786 6321 4 E M
181. e For the truth table identified in this section the following applies 0 means logic low 1 means logic high t means that a rising edge has been detected on the input n 1 refers to the previous value n refers to the current value Latch output Latch input 0 0 fi T 1 1 9 7 10 Clock generator Input x Input x Output Xn 1 Output Xn Function block diagram General description Enable Clock The Clock generator function block is used to generate a pulsed signal When the Enable input is High the Clock output pulses from Low to High and back to Low in accordance with the parameter settings of the function block When the Enable input is Low the Clock output becomes Low Pulse time gt P i E Pulse time lt Clock period cycle duration The pulse time and the clock period are configured as multiples of the logic execution time Table 39 Parameters of the Clock generator function block Note Figure 110 Timing diagram for the Clock generator function block Figure 111 Function block diagram for the Event counter Up and down function block Table 40 Parameter for the Event counter function blocks Logic programming Function blocks Parameters of the function block Chapter 9 Parameter Possible values Stopping mode Clock period cycle duration e Immediately e After last clock
182. e bits that are not required by not assigning a name to these bits Deactivated bits are no longer available or shown in the logic editor or in the diagnostics However the size of the process image is not affected by this change 8 2 3 Flexi Line checksum CRC The checksum is required so that the stations in a Flexi Line system can communicate with each other All stations in a Flexi Line system must have an identical checksum This ensures that only stations that belong to the same Flexi Line system can communicate with each other If a different checksum is detected in a Flexi Line system then all connected stations will change to the Error on the Flexi Line bus mode Line LED flashes Red green at 2 Hz The checksum is calculated from the following settings e size of the process image and maximum cable length e update rate e range of each byte e default value of each byte e first part of the revision number The minor revision number as well as the names you have assigned to bits bytes and the process image itself do not affect the checksum If the process image is changed on any station such that the checksum changes then you must transfer this new image to all other stations In this way you will set the checksum in all stations to the same value Otherwise there will be different checksums in the Flexi Line system such that the safety communication between the stations cannot be established The checksum is part of
183. e g button pressed safety door opened etc Ensure that this can not cause any dangerous situation before restarting your machine or system gt Click on the Stop force mode button A safety message will appear Click on Yes to confirm and terminate the force mode or click on No to keep the force mode active gt If no force action e g forcing of an input has occurred for the time defined when the force mode was started the force mode will be automatically terminated During force mode a timer in the top right corner shows the time remaining until the force mode is automatically terminated Each action resets this timer You can also reset the timer using the Trigger force mode button on its left 15 seconds before the timer expires a dialog is displayed that reminds you of the imminent termination of the force mode Progress Open user interface gt Do you want to retrigger force mode Messages Leave force mode in 12 seconds Leave force mode in 11 seconds Leave force mode in 10 seconds Leave force mode in 9 seconds e Leave force mode in 8 seconds Leave force mode in 7 seconds gt If you ignore this dialog the force mode will be terminated after the defined time delay has expired Or gt Click on Cancel The dialog will close and the force mode will be terminated after the defined time delay has expired Or gt Click OK in order to close the dialog reset the timer and k
184. e in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Table 95 Number of permissible override cycles Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 During an override cycle the Enable output is set to High as during a valid muting sequence The number of permissible override cycles is limited in order to prevent excessive use of the override function The number of permissible override cycles depends on the value for the total muting time Table 95 summarizes the number of permissible override cycles Number of permissible Total muting time Remarks override cycles 5s 360 Maximum number of override 10s 360 cycles 360 20s 180 30s 120 60 min total muting time 1 min 60 5 min 12 15 min 5 30 min 5 Minimum number of override 60 min 5 cycles 5 Disabled unlimited 5 The number of override cycles is stored in the function block The value is incremented each time the Override required output starts pulsing or the Override status output changes to high The value is reset to 0 after a valid muting cycle has occurred after a system reset e g using the Setting and Monitoring Tool or after a transition from the Stop state to the Run state After the Override required output has started pulsing at 2 H
185. e muting function blocks 209 Logic programming Function blocks e When an override input is configured test pulse outputs may not be used for the configuration of the safety inputs e Separate lines have to be used for the sensor signals A1 and A2 B1 and B2 e A line that is independent of other input signals has to be used for the signals for Reset and Reset required in order to exclude unintentional resetting of the system The line must furthermore be laid protected e The total muting time cannot be set to indefinite inactive without additional precautions being taken If the total muting time is set to indefinite additional measures have to be taken to ensure that no one can access the hazardous area while muting is activated 9 10 2 Parameters of the function blocks The following table lists the possible configuration parameters of the muting function blocks Parameter Possible values Direction detection e Disabled Only with Parallel muting and Sequential muting e Forward A1 A2 first e Backward B1 B2 first Sequence monitoring Condition of other sensor pair for muting start Muting end condition Not selectable Defined by selection of the muting function block e Enabled With Sequential muting e Disabled With Parallel muting or Cross muting Both inputs are clear Only with Parallel muting and Sequential muting e If last muting sensor is active e With muting sensor pair e With
186. e new profile Entry name COM profile 2 Serial port COMI COM auto detection Fixed baud rate 115200 Auto scan gt Enter a name for the new profile gt Select the serial port for the new profile or activate the COM auto detection checkbox gt Select a fixed baudrate or activate the Auto scan checkbox gt Click OK The dialog is closed and the new profile is displayed in the list gt To activate the new profile select it using the left mouse button and click on the green arrow symbol on the right From now on the Setting and Monitoring Tool will use this profile Figure 43 Create new profile dialog USB Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller How to add a USB profile gt Click on the Add USB profile button The Create new profile dialog is opened Chapter 6 Createnewconnection profle ga Entry name Name Ser Vid Pid PathChain Connected Devices Search for devices E wj My Computer B Intel R 6 Series C200 Series Chipset Family USB Enhanced Host Controller 1026 B Root Hub WE Port 1 DeviceConnected Standard USB Hub B Intel R 6 Series C200 Series Chipset Family USB Enhanced Host Controller 102D B 45 Root Hub WE Port 1 DeviceConnected Standard USB Hub Cancel gt Enter a name for the new profile gt Select a CPU module to be conneted in Connected Devices gt Click OK The dialog is close
187. e the standard I O descriptions of the function block with your own names and to add a name or a descriptive text to the function block that will be displayed under the function block in the logic editor Under Info you will find a description of the function block and its parameters The number 1 to 3 for the time configuration parameters of function block such as Safety Gate Monitoring and Valve Monitoring indicate 1 input range an allowable range of an input value 2 input field a field where a value is input within the input range 3 set parameter a configured value The value calculated as follows is displayed Configured value Value input to the input field x 10 ms Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 5 Input and output signal connections of function blocks 9 5 1 Function block input connections Possible sources for function block inputs are all input elements listed in the input selection tree of the logic editor as well as the outputs of function blocks 9 5 2 Inversion of input connections The input connections of some function blocks can be configured as inverted This means that the function block evaluates a High signal at an inverted input as Low and vice versa In order to invert an input double click on the function block icon and check the desired input on the parameter page of the function block properties dialog Figure 94 Inversion of function block input connections Paramet
188. e these terms are not part of the basis of the bargain between the parties and are not factored into the pricing of the Products i THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THESE TERMS ARE THE EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES THAT APPLY TO THE PRODUCTS j MELCO DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 3 Limits on Damages a MELCO S MAXIMUM CUMULATIVE LIABILITY BASED ON ANY CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT TORT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORIES OF RECOVERY REGARDING THE SALE REPAIR REPLACEMENT DELIVERY PERFORMANCE CONDITION SUITABILITY COMPLIANCE OR OTHER ASPECTS OF THE PRODUCTS OR THEIR SALE INSTALLATION OR USE SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PRICE PAID FOR PRODUCTS NOT AS WARRANTED b Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product s compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508 and EN954 1 IS013849 1 from TUV Rheinland this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard regulation or law c MELCO prohibits the u
189. each connected SICK EF l compatible device or Flexi Link station is available in the Inputs tab of the Logic editor under the respective SICK EF l compatible device or Flexi Link station and can be used as input for the logic programming The I O error status bit is High if the data or process image of the connected SICK EFl compatible device or Flexi Link station is set to Low This may be the case e g if an error has been detected or if the Flexi Link station is in the Stop state or being reconfigured Status bit Value Meaning I O error Low The corresponding SICK EFl compatible device or Flexi Link station is error free e g in the Run state High The process image of the corresponding SICK EF I compatible device or Flexi Link station is set to Low due to one of the following reasons e Error detected on the SICK EFl compatible device e The Flexi Link station is not in the Run state e Suspended Flexi Link station has been found e Flexi Link station with different Flexi Link ID found See also Section 7 4 7 5 6 6 Module input and output status bits in the logic editor The input and output status of the connected network modules and safety I O modules is available in the Diagnostics tab of the logic editor and can be used as input for the logic programming In some applications an evaluation of this status information can be important in order to specify the behaviour of the logic functions of the safety con
190. eater than the logic execution time Release time 1 to 600000 ms in steps of 10 ms The value has to be greater than the logic execution time Signal time 0 to 6000 ms in steps of 10 ms If the value is not 0 it has to be greater than the logic execution time but smaller than the Waiting time Impulse time 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 10 ms If the value is not 0 it has to be greater than the logic execution time but smaller than the Release time Direction switching This parameter determines if it is possible to switch between the forward and backward direction with or without execution of the complete start sequence If the setting Not locked is configured it is possible to initiate the start sequence with one of the inputs e g Inch forward and confirm the start sequence with the other input e g Inch backward In Not locked mode it is also possible to switch the direction of the inch mode without the execution of the complete start sequence The setting Locked means that the start sequence must be confirmed during the release time with the same input Inch forward or Inch backward that has triggered the start sequence A rising edge on the other input will restart the Waiting time instead It is also not possible to switch between directions in inch mode If the direction shall be changed a complete start sequence must be executed see also Figure 173 Note Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9
191. ececeeeeeeeteesnaeeneees 7 REVIS ON S a elt deca Sele hte ii tee nas A etn cuales cate nt Hs 8 CONTENTS anaana ceeds Siena eater aa a eet tate sic ad si deere at natn at aes 9 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 0 cccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseesenaeeeeees 15 TAboutithis document smi en aa ed iat bea a ceded 16 1 1 Function of this COCUMENT cccceecececcee cece ee eeeeeaeaeeeeeeesesenaeaeeeeeeeeesseaeees 16 1 2 Target Group niacin aaa ahd Goa aaa 17 1 3 Function and structure of this Manual 0 cccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 18 1 3 1 Recommendations for familiarising yourself with Setting and Monitoring Ko ree nee a ere ner errr Pere seer Ree rete errr etree a a ee 18 1 3 2 Recommendations for experienced USEPS ccccccecceeceeeeeeeteetecteeeeees 18 T4 SCOP and Vers OT ysis tags ccevads ieee labaetedaatiecte aaa E a a e a aE E 18 1 5Abbreviations USC ccccccseecseccceeeeecceeeeseeceeeeneeanensseeceensneecnenesneceeeeneeasenennees 19 1 6 Symbols and notations USEC 00 0 ececeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeeeeaas 19 2 On Sales a i naa diet Houten A 20 2 1 Qualified safety personnel aasssseesseseserneesrnnesirnnestnnnestennestinnestennnenennneneennee 20 PAOL NAET BE EAE A E ate EE A ihe tee A 20 2 3 General protective notes and protective measures ssssssssesrrrrseesrrrrrre n 21 3 Version compatibility and features cccccccceceeeeeceecee
192. ect can be entered here All information can be saved in standard file formats and printed out The scope of the report can be compiled individually depending on the selection e The stored error messages are displayed as a history of a connected MELSEC WS safety controller in the Diagnostics view Input and output signals from a MELSEC WS safety controller can be recorded and displayed inthe Data recorder view Figure 3 Sub windows can be converted to flyout menus The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 4 Positioning windows Every view consists of several sub windows that can be positioned freely You can gt change the height width and position of each sub window by using the mouse to move the frame or title bar of the sub window gt convert a sub window into a flyout window by clicking the Hide button drawing pin symbol on the right in the title bar The flyout is then positioned on the left hand margin of the Setting and Monitoring Tool window gt move flyout windows back to their normal position by clicking the drawing pin icon in the flyout window again Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project Machine Operator 13 offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified 28 Chapter 5 29 The graphical user interface 5 5 Hardware configuration view The Hardware configuration window consists of the following sub windows Tabs for switching b
193. ect to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions NCAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste Disposal of the product should always occur in accordance with the applicable country specific waste disposal regulations e g European Waste Code 16 02 14 e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e 1 Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product s compliance to the international safety lt standards IEC61508 EN954 1 ISO13849 1 from TUV Rheinland this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard regulation or law MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving and MELCO shall not be liable for a default a liability for defect warranty a quality assurance negligence or other tort and a product liability in these applications 1 power plants 2 trains railway systems airplanes airline operations other transportation systems 3 hospitals med
194. ed differing configurations Figure 65 Flexi Link system overview system connected configuration identical but not verified Flexi Link The Setting and Monitoring Tool will connect to the Flexi Link system compare the existing hardware and software configuration with the configuration in the Designer and display the results If the configuration in the Setting and Monitoring Tool is not identical to the configuration in the connected stations these will be displayed with a blue background a i i m l1 a P 9 Be FP Stade COVA Transfer the configuration gt Now transfer the configuration to the stations by clicking on Transfer Again you will be prompted to select which station s you want to transfer the configuration to gt Select all stations and click on OK The Setting and Monitoring Tool will now transfer the configuration to each station You will need the password for Administrator the default password is MELSECWS gt Once a valid configuration has been transferred to a station successfully the Setting and Monitoring Tool will ask you whether you want to set this station into the Run state Click either Yes or No The station will be displayed in the Flexi Link system overview with a grey background Flexi Link I0 EFL 162 Firmware version Toe Fimweare version vovas ESERR O S2ERs oe im ERARE ETERA Sina CA No
195. ed it should be connected to the Release 1 static input by means of an AND function block together with other signals that have to be connected to the Release 1 static input Exclude any danger during the upstroke movement of the press If you use upstroke muting you must ensure that during the upstroke period no hazards are present e g by the up movement itself Max Up Stroke muting time The Max Up Stroke muting time can be configured This time begins with the rising edge Low to High of the signal at the Upstroke input If the timer reaches the configured Max Up Stroke muting time before a falling edge High to Low occurs at the Upstroke input the function block terminates the muting of the Release 3 safety and Start Release inputs If from this moment on one of these two inputs becomes Low the Enable output is also set to Low Figure 229 Sequence timing diagram for the Press single stroke function block when Start Release is configured in stepping mode Figure 230 Sequence timing diagram for the Press single stroke function block when Start Release is configured in start only mode Figure 231 Sequence timing diagram for the Press single stroke function block with upstroke muting of Start Release and Release 3 safety Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Restart input If the Restart interlock parameter has been set to Without a Restart signal is not required in order to restart the press af
196. ed partial application and description in the panel gt Click OK to import the selected partial application The hardware in the import file will be added to your projects hardware configuration while the imported logic will be inserted as one or several new separate pages in the Logic editor Example A project contains a WS0 CPU1 and an WS0 XTIO module a C4000 an emergency stop button a robot and one page with the necessary logic in the logic editor The partial application to be imported contains another WS0 XTIO module with a two hand control and a motor plus one logic editor page with the logic for controlling these devices After the import has been completed the project will contain both WS0 XTIO modules with the respective devices connected and both logic programs on two separate pages How to exchange a CPU module in a project Using the export and import function it is possible to exchange a CPU module e g WS0 CPUO to WS0 CPU1 or another firmware version from Ver 1 to Ver 1 xx or later in an existing project without having to re configure the project hardware configuration logic gt Load the project with the CPU module you want to exchange gt Export the partial application as described above gt Inthe Project menu select the command New Standalone station project gt In the Hardware configuration view add the desired new CPU module to the new project gt Right click on the new CPU module and reimport the
197. eeeeeneeeteeeeeeteeaeeeeeenaees 94 7 4 2 Flexi Link system Process iMage ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeateeeeeaaees 96 7 4 3 Flexi Link system Network settings cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeereeeeaees 97 10 7 4 4 Flexi Link stations Flexi Link data in the logic editor eee 98 7 4 5 Flexi Link stations Station X view and process image 100 7 4 6 Flexi Link stations Teach FUNCTION eee eeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaae 102 7 4 7 Flexi Link teaching status and diagnostics cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaee 104 7 5 Flexi Link troubleshooting eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 106 7 5 1 Flexi Link ID mismatch e r ae aea e aeea raa hao a aaa Eea a 106 Sz RICKI LNE a a a a a e a aad canta 107 8 1 Flexi Ling overvieW ssnesseiseiaisi i i a 107 8 1 1 System requirements and restrictions for Flexi Line eee 107 8 2 Principle of operation Flexi LIN cccceseecececeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeettees 108 Gak TOPO o A eas ed A S 108 8 2 2 Flexi Lime config ration e maeresseidanid ei r ei 108 8 2 3 Flexi Line checksum CRO Jei ra ae e A E 111 8 2 4 Flexi Line data in the logic editor oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 112 8 2 5 Teach function es icici ieetates cde eel aire aneeeee sind sede in ceedvehadees anes 113 8 2 6 Status ANd diAQNOSTHICS ee eee ec ceeee arra AE AAE EERE a 115 8 3 GOttING Started nsari aa naar
198. eeeteeeeeeaees 37 5 5 7 Customized elements ssseessssesssrnesssnnnsssnnestinnnntenndsnnnnnantnneetnnnaannnnenenana 39 5 5 8 Connection of SICK EFl compatible devices c cceccteceeeeeeeeeeneees 42 5 5 9 Export and import of a partial application cccceseeeeceeeeeeeteeseneeees 44 Do 1O RS 232 TOUTING a 35 cco cc sedevs Asse aa a a E a R Ee L e E aal 47 9 0 LOGIC CdItOr VIEW a AA R anes eed 52 5 6 1 Exercise for using the logic editor ee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeteenaees 53 5 6 2 Logic access Tovo lenea ar RE EAA T 54 5 6 3 Validation of the configuration sssesesesssessesrreserresttrrsstirrssterrssrrrnssrens 55 5 6 4 Inputs and diagnostics bits of the main module in the logic editor 56 5 6 5 EFI I O error status bits in the logic editor ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaees 57 5 6 6 Module input and output status bits in the logic editor 57 9 0 CRU Markers iis ic check aie hed ned inh eaiaeeied gestae abana 58 5 6 8 JUMP ACCESSES iii eti eate ia eee e ae a a d aa aaa 59 9 6 F O MARR a e E ete ce ea ita 60 9 6 10 Tag MAME COMMOR sic deere paces cee ehelcn T T 61 5 6 11 Import and export tag NAMES c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeeetenaees 62 SEP REPOM MGW APEE A cachd dalaadatl igh EEN 63 5 8 Diagnostics VIEW nere a a Ra a a T a i a ie 64 5 9 Data recorder VEW i EA REE En 66 Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller ec
199. eep the force mode active 270 Chapter 10 I O modules I O modules 271 10 1 Dual channel evaluation and discrepancy time monitoring Dual channel evaluation The safety I O modules e g WSO XTIO or WSO XTDI can carry out a dual channel evaluation when predefined input elements from the Elements window e g RE27 C4000 are connected to them If such an input element is selected you do not need a separate function block for dual channel evaluation e g light curtain monitoring safety gate monitoring or magnetic switch The dual channel evaluation evaluates the correct sequence of the two input signals It is expected that if one of the two signals has caused a switching off the other signal will follow accordingly Which values the two signals must have depends on the type of the dual channel evaluation There are two possibilities e Equivalent evaluation e Complementary evaluation Discrepancy time Dual channel elements can be evaluated with or without a Discrepancy time The discrepancy time defines for how long the two inputs may have discrepant values after one of the both input signals has changed without this being considered as an error gt To activate or to deactivate the Discrepancy time either click on the checkbox or on the 3D buttons on the right side of the element settings dialog For elements connected to WSO XTDI and WSO0 XTIO modules the following restrictions apply The Value for the discrepa
200. efore you save the new template It is not possible to change an existing element template within the Setting and Monitoring Tool no matter whether it is a standard or a customized template Figure 15 Add or delete sub elements for a customized element Figure 16 Entering the BOM info for a customized element The graphical user interface Chapter 5 How to configure a customized element gt Select the new customized element in the element tree and use the sub element buttons under the element tree to add additional inputs or outputs You can choose between single channel and various dual channel input and output types If you add sub elements these will appear in the element tree one level below the customized element Greate custom element template amp Input types General BOM info Summary E st Potential free contacts and restart Title Subtitle oe Dual channel NO Dual channel nner st jual channel NO Dual channel Nc Dual Channel Input Equiva E Dual Channel input Equivalent FaF FRE Gad Ene Extractable Single test output oe a e L S 2 x Cancel gt Select the new element in the element tree and enter a new name for it in the General file card It is not possible to save an element with a name that is already used by another element However it is not necessary to enter the new element name in all languages shown You only
201. em Online W Device configuration is verified Keyword Description Code Hexadecimal error code Description Error description Time stamp Total CPU module operation time at the time of error days hours min sec Local time Time when error occurred PC system time This value is not displayed for historical errors Cycle power Total number of times the CPU module has been switched on Type Error type e g information warning recoverable error critical error Source Module that detected the error Category Part of the module that detected the error Information Internal information about the error Occurrence Number of times this error has occurred counter If an error occurs several times in a row only the last occurrence will be recorded and the occurrence counter is increased Power on hour Total time since the last power on of the CPU module This value is reset at every restart Operating hours Total power on time of the CPU module Block Register CPU channel Diagnostics memory area in the CPU module 8 RAM volatile error occurred within the current power on cycle 88 EEPROM non volatile error occured in a previous power on cycle Index in the diagnostics memory area Internal hardware channel A or B of the module that detected the error Note Fora list of the most important error codes possible causes and potential rectification measures please see the Safety Controller
202. ements from the elements window These devices can be configured directly in the Setting and Monitoring Tool by double clicking the icon or alternatively configured and verified locally at the device via the RS 232 interface For this purpose the SICK configuration and diagnostics software CDS is used The SICK configuration and diagnostics software CDS included in Setting and Monitoring Tool is the product of SICK For CDS please contact your local SICK representative see Annex Section 15 4 http www sens control com Before removing the RS 232 USB converter WS0 UC 232A disconnect the PC from the MELSEC WS safety controller 6 1 2 Online status and background color The background color displayed in the Setting and Monitoring Tool indicates the current online or offline status of the MELSEC WS safety controller as shown in the following table Configuration status in the Setting and Background color Status ee Monitoring Tool Light yellow Offline Any Blue Online Invalid and or different to the device configuration Grey Online Valid and equal to the device configuration Figure 41 Connection settings dialog Table 10 Symbols for editing the connection profiles in the Connection settings dialog Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller Chapter 6 6 2 Using the COM settings command you can create edit and delete connection profiles Editing the communication settings To edit the connectio
203. ent of a protective field will not lead to a shut off of the machine You must ensure that other protective measures are forcibly activated during the bypass e g the safe machine setup mode so that the machine cannot endanger persons or parts of the system during the bypass function Take the prolonged response time into account when the Bypass is deactivated If the Bypass input is being deactivated while a switching off condition exists the outputs will switch off only with the normal response time of the application The minimized response time for Fast shut off does not apply for the Bypass input Consider this for your risk analysis and avoidance strategy Otherwise the operator of the machine will be in danger e Unlike the other inputs and outputs of this function block the Bypass input can be connected to an output of another function block as well as to any other input element which may also be moved to another module in the hardware configuration 142 Chapter 9 Figure 119 Example for Fast shut off with bypass with more than one bypass conditions 143 Logic programming Function blocks e The Bypass input has an on delay of 3 logic cycles to compensate delays due to logic processing time and transmission time of the FLEXBUS The delay ensures that the I O module has received the bypass signal before it is used for the further logic processing in the Fast shut off function block As a result of the delay the
204. er In Out Settings In Out Comment Info invert Input 1 Invert Input 2 Figure 95 Example of an AND function block with one inverted input Not inverted input a Examples of function blocks with invertable inputs include the following function blocks e AND e RS Flip Flop e OR e JK Flip Flop e Routing N N e Switch synchronization 124 Chapter 9 Figure 96 In Out configuration of the Safety gate monitoring function block 125 Logic programming Function blocks 9 5 3 Function block output connections Function blocks provide various output signal connections for connecting to physical outputs or to other function blocks The output of a function block can be connected to several subordinate function blocks but not to several output elements physical outputs or EFI outputs If you want to control several physical outputs with a single function block use the Routing 1 N function block The behaviour of the outputs is explained at the description of the individual function blocks You can choose whether error and diagnostics outputs are displayed In the configuration basic setting of the function blocks only the Enable output and some further outputs are selected e g Reset required In order to display error and diagnostics outputs increase the number of outputs on the I O settings tab of the function block properties Bi Safety Gate Monitoring Parameter In
205. er 9 Table 24 Truth table for AND evaluation with eight inputs Figure 101 Function block diagram for the OR function block Table 25 Parameters of the OR function block Table 26 Truth table for OR evaluation with one input 129 Logic programming Function blocks Truth table for AND evaluation with eight inputs Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input6 Input7 Input8 Output 1 0 x x x x x x x 0 x 0 x x x x x x 0 x x 0 x x x x x 0 x x x 0 x x x x 0 x x x x 0 x x x 0 x x x x x 0 x x 0 x x x x x x 0 x 0 x x x x x x x 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 7 3 OR Function block diagram General description The output is High if any one of the evaluated inputs is High Up to eight inputs are evaluated Example If eight light curtains are attached to the inputs of the function block the output would become High as soon as at least one of the light curtains is free Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of inputs 2to8 Invert input x Each input of this function block can be inverted see Section 9 5 2 Truth table The following applies for the truth tables in this section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High xX means Truth table for OR evaluation with one input any 0 or 1 Input 1 Output 1 0 0 1 1
206. er of outputs 1to6 Error output combination For each output individually High Low BH Mode 1 XTIO 1 4 nut 1A g Mode 2 XTIO 1 12 prte g W Mode 3 XTIO 1 13 Input 2A af i Input 2B gi T Mode 4 XTIO 1 14 5 BW Mode 5 xTIO 1 15 peA g T Mode 6 XTIO 1 16 Input 38 Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B Output 3A Output 3B Truth table The following applies for the truth table in this section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High x means any 0 or 1 Error Error Output Output Output Output Output Output input 1 input 2 1A 2A 2B 3A 3B 1 x Error output combination x 1 Error output combination 172 Chapter 9 Figure 158 Function block diagram for the Ramp down detection function block 173 Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 12 Ramp down detection Function block diagram Drive released gi Incremental 1 gi Incremental 2 g Incremental 3 g Plausibility_Eror Incremental Input 3 4 Incremental 4 z Fault present General description The Ramp down detection function block checks whether a connected drive has been stopped meaning that for a configurable time no pulses have been detected from the encoder system e g from a HTL encoder or proximity switches Depending on the result of this check e g a safety door lock can be unlatched The ramp down de
207. erflow value Until then all further Up counting pulses are ignored Table 41 Truth table for the Event counter function blocks Up Down and Up Down Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Reload value and Counter reload The Counter reload parameter determines what happens when the counter value reaches 0 If this parameter is configured to Automatic and the internal counter equals 0 the Underflow output becomes High for the duration of the logic execution time The value of the internal counter is subsequently set to the configured Reload value If the Counter reload parameter is configured to Manual and the lower limit i e 0 has been reached the Underflow output is set to High and remains High until the counter value changes again either by counting upward or by a valid pulse sequence at the Reload input Until then all further Down counting pulses are ignored Truth table for the Event counter function blocks Up Down and Up and down The following applies for the truth table in this section e 0 means logic Low e 1 means logic High e 7 means that a rising edge has been detected at the input e means that a falling edge has been detected at the input e n 1 references the preceding value e n references the current value e Y references the value of the internal counter e X means any E g the Reset to zero input and the Rel
208. ermining if the Products provide appropriate safety margins and redundancies for the applications equipment or systems into which they are incorporated c Customer acknowledges that qualified and experienced personnel are required to determine the suitability application design construction and proper installation and integration of the Products MELCO does not supply such personnel MELCO is not responsible for designing and conducting tests to determine that the Product functions appropriately and meets application standards and requirements as installed or incorporated into the end user s equipment production lines or systems e MELCO does not warrant any Product 1 repaired or altered by persons other than MELCO or its authorized engineers or FA Centers 2 subjected to negligence carelessness accident misuse or damage 3 improperly stored handled installed or maintained 4 integrated or used in connection with improperly designed incompatible or defective hardware or software 5 that fails because consumable parts such as relay batteries backlights or fuses were not tested serviced or replaced 6 operated or used with equipment production lines or systems that do not meet applicable and commensurate legal safety and industry accepted standards 7 operated or used in abnormal applications 8 installed operated or used in contravention of instructions precautions or warnings containe
209. errun cam input High Low transition must occur when the Upstroke cam input is Low 3 The upstroke phase must begin after the overrun has ended The rising edge at the Upstroke cam input Low High transition must occur while the Overrun cam input is Low 4 The upstroke phase must end during the overrun The falling edge at the Upstroke cam input High Low transition must occur while the Overrun cam input is High If at least one of these conditions is not fulfilled during operation the Enable output becomes Low and the Contact error output becomes High A valid sequence to fulfill the conditions is as follows 0 Start condition Overrun cam input High Upstroke cam input Low 1 2 3 4 Overrun cam input High gt Low Upstroke cam input Low gt High Overrun cam input Low gt High Da wo WH Upstroke cam input High gt Low Observe the relevant safety standards and regulations All safety related parts of the installation cabling connected sensors and actuators configuration settings must be according to the relevant safety standards e g IEC 62061 or EN ISO 13849 1 or Type C standards such as EN 692 and EN 693 and regulations Only safety relevant signals may be used in safety relevant logic Ensure that the application fulfills all applicable standards and regulations This needs to be considered especially for the Upstroke cam if the Upstroke output is used for upstroke muting e g in combination with a pre
210. esult in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Input parameters and input signals of the function block The Press single stroke function block supports the following input signals Start Release The Start Release input signal is used to indicate the beginning and the end of the press movement A rising edge Low to High at the Start Release input signals a start of the press A Low Start Release input signals a stop of the press If the Mode for Start Release input parameter is set to Start only the press cannot be stopped by the Start Release input signal Use additional safety measures when Start Release is set to Start only If the Mode for Start Release input parameter is set to Start only you must use additional safety measures e g hazardous point protection with a light curtain Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger If the Mode for Start Release input parameter is set to Stepping and Restart interlock is set to When Release 1 or Release 3 or Start Release is Low or Always a valid restart sequence is required after a stop that was caused by a Low Start Release input signal The Enable output of a Two hand control or of an N break function block is particularly suitable for connection to the Start Release i
211. eters that shall be used for the EFI system integrity test gt Click OK to accept the settings and to close the dialog Note Figure 19 Export configuration dialog The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 5 9 Export and import of a partial application You can export or import a partial application All modules with their associated inputs and outputs and logic are exported except for the WSO0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 If you are exporting a project containing SICK EF l compatible devices have to be reconfigured when you import the configuration into another project When you import a partial application into an existing project the stored modules elements and logic are added to the project while the rest of the project remains unchanged This is especially useful if you need to replace a CPU in an existing project without re configuring the entire hardware and logic Tag names of CPU markers logic results EFI1 EFI2 and RS 232 I O cannot be exported For example when an exported CPU marker with a tag name is imported to another project the tag name is not reflected A tag name configured in the import target project is displayed If no tag name is configured in the import target project no name is displayed Among the outputs in the logic editor CPU output markers logic results and EFI1 EF12 are imported only when they are not used in the import target project How to export a partial application gt In the Partial appli
212. etween the Hardware configuration Logic editor Network modules if the project contains at least one network interface module Report Diagnostics and Data Recoder view Menu bar with the menus Project Device Extras Toolbar with icons for rapid access to menus that are often used Elements selection window All devices e g sensors actuators etc that can be connected to a MELSEC WS safety controller are listed here The devices can be parameterized and renamed In addition user defined devices can be created and stored In addition to the elements EFI elements can also be connected They are dragged to the two EFI interfaces of the CPU module provided that the CPU module provides EFI interfaces Partial applications selection window see section 5 5 9 Parking area The user can compile a selection of devices for a concrete application and store them temporarily here Modules selection window All MELSEC WS modules that can be combined into a MELSEC WS safety controller are listed here The modules that cannot be selected at the current configuration are grayed out Modules that can be added to the current configuration are identified by a green symbol The number of inputs outputs and EFI connections is displayed for each module From a drop down list under the module the Revision or function package for the respective module can be selected The function package chosen defines the minimum firmware version that must be
213. ety controller After the transfer the configuration data are read back from the memory plug if the verification has been activated in the Setting and Monitoring Tool see Section 11 3 The reading back of the configuration data from the memory plug requires some time The memory plug may not be removed during this time The Setting and Monitoring Tool displays a corresponding warning as long as the process takes 11 2 Compatibility check The configuration data contain an electronic type code and a version code for each module that is to be configured During the transfer each module checks whether it is compatible with the configuration data The compatibility check only applies to the functional part of the respective module not to the hardware variant the implementation of the terminals for example remains unconsidered If the compatibility check is negative a corresponding error message is generated in the respective module and in the CPU module In Setting and Monitoring Tool different version numbers are assigned to some modules so that a compatible module can be selected from a list below the module 274 Chapter 11 Figure 262 Upload and verify configuration 275 Note Transferring the system configuration 11 3 Verification of the configuration After the configuration has been downloaded to the safety controller the MELSEC WS safety controller can be verified To this purpose the downloaded configuration dat
214. evices and not the virtual forced value of an input in the logic program If by forcing of an input in the logic program e g from High to Low the value of an output is changed e g from High to Low the actually changed value of the output in the example Low will be transferred to the programmable controller in the process image but not the forced Low value of the input in the logic program Instead still the actual physical value of the input on the device in the example High will be transferred Take this into account when you evaluate the transferred data in the programmable controller A ATTENTION Figure 261 Dialog before auto matic termination of the force mode Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Termination of the force mode The force mode can be terminated in the following ways e manually through the user e automatically after the defined time delay e automatically after 30 seconds if the MELSEC WS safety controller detects an error e g if the connection to the PC is interrupted When the force mode is terminated the safety controller switches all outputs to Low and the active application is stopped Ensure that no dangerous situation can occur when the force mode is terminated Ensure that your machine or system is transferred to a safe state and can not be damaged when the force mode is terminated e While the force mode has been active the actual value of an input may have changed
215. exi Line process image 118 Chapter 8 Flexi Line Then these signals can be evaluated in the logic on any station in this Flexi Line system in the following manner Figure 90 Usage of signals from the Flexi Line process image in the logic 119 Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks AN ATTENTION 9 1 General description The function logic of the MELSEC WS safety controller is programmed by using function blocks These function blocks are certified for use in safety relevant functions if all safety standards are observed during implementation The following sections provide information on important aspects of using function blocks in the MELSEC WS safety controller 9 2 Safety notes for the logic programming Observe the relevant safety standards and regulations All safety related parts of the installation cabling connected sensors and actuators configuration settings must be according to the relevant safety standards e g IEC 62061 or EN ISO 13849 1 and regulations Only safety relevant signals may be used in safety relevant logic Ensure that the application fulfills all applicable standards and regulations You are responsible for checking that the right signal sources are used for these function blocks and that the entire implementation of the safety logic fulfills the applicable standards and regulations Always check the mode of ope
216. exi Line view in Setting and Monitoring Tool there is a Teach button on the toolbar gt Click the Teach button during commissioning when all stations are switched on and in the Teach required state The topology of the system is then checked and confirmed and the Flexi Line system is started Teaching using a pushbutton If it is necessary to be able to remove add or replace individual stations during operation then you can also run the Teach function using a pushbutton How to configure the Teach function using a pushbutton gt Connect a Teach button to the inputs of the station in the Flexi Line system that shall be able to activate the Teach function The Teach button can be e g a dual channel key operated switch gt In the logic editor for this station use a Restart function block to connect the Teach button input to this station s Teaching output as shown in Figure 85 If the Teach button is pressed the Teaching output will become High for one logic cycle The rising edge Low to High on the Teaching output triggers the Teach function 114 Chapter 8 Figure 86 Flexi Line diagnostics 115 Flexi Line 8 2 6 Status and diagnostics The Diagnostics view shows which data have been received used and forwarded Project Device Extras MBB 2 com settings F connect PYG oisconnect Py Transfer fey upload E5 BD Hordware configuration Logic editor BBB Network Mo
217. exi Link system This is the first important setting in order to configure a Flexi Link system The Flexi Link address ranges from A to D and is freely configurable For detailed information on how to assign Flexi Link addresses to connected stations please see Section 7 4 3 7 2 2 Flexi Link ID The Flexi Link ID is necessary for the stations in a Flexi Link network to communicate with each other All stations in a Flexi Link system must have an identical Flexi Link ID in order to exchange their process image information This ensures that only stations that belong to the same Flexi Link system can communicate with each other If a differing Flexi Link ID is detected in a Flexi Link system all connected stations will change into Invalid configuration mode MS LED flashing red at 1 Hz The Flexi Link IDs are numeric values that are calculated from the default values for the process image This means that a change of the default values for the process image of any station will change the Flexi Link ID of all stations Adding or deleting a station will also change the Flexi Link ID of the system If a change is made to any station s process image you must transfer the new configuration to all stations e g Transfer all in the Flexi Link network settings view This will set all Flexi Link IDs simultaneously to the same value Not doing so will lead to a Flexi Link ID mismatch in the system and thus interrupt the safety communication be
218. f Single stroke protection is set to With Start Release changes from Low to High Release 1 static is High and Release 2 start if configured is High In this case the Enable output changes to Low when the Top input changes from Low to High Release 1 static inverted The Release 1 static inverted output signals whether an enable signal for the Press setup function block is present If Release 1 static is High Release 1 static inverted is Low and vice versa Start Release l l l l Release 1 static J LO Release 2 start i a Top input ee A Enable output Enable remains High when Single stroke protection is Inactive 242 Chapter 9 Figure 228 Function block diagram for the Press single stroke function block Table 110 Parameters of the Press single stroke function block 243 Logic programming Function blocks 9 12 2 Press single stroke Function block diagram Upstroke g Restart g General description The Press single stroke function block is generally used together with the Universal press contact or the Eccentric press contact function block in order to provide the information of the Top and Upstroke outputs as input for this function block The Top output is required for single stroke operation Controlling of the press can for example be implemented by means of a Two hand control or an N break function block in connection with a safety light
219. f the discrepancy time is active gt 0 the discrepancy timer is restarted on the first signal change resulting in a discrepant status If the discrepancy time is inactive 0 the discrepancy timer does not start i e a timeout will never occur 2 Unchanged Last status is preserved 3 If the correct sequence has been observed For the change between the different states of the dual channel evaluation the following rules apply A dual channel evaluation can only change to Active the input of the safety I O module in the logic editor changes from Low to High if e since the last Active status at least once the status was Inactive i e it is not possible to switch from Active to Discrepant and back to Active and e the discrepancy time has not elapsed or the discrepancy time is deactivated If the correct sequence to reach the Active status has not been observed i e if the status has changed from Active to Discrepant to Active WS0 XTIO and WSO XTDI modules with firmware V2 00 0 and higher will display this sequence error after 100 ms at the latest if the discrepancy time has not elapsed earlier i e if the discrepancy time is set to 0 or to a value gt 100 ms Older modules will not display the sequence error although their input in the logic editor remains Low as well In case of a discrepancy error or sequence error the module will behave as follows e The MS LED of the affected module will start flashing with firmware V1 xx 0
220. f the function block Restart required The Restart required output is High when a valid restart sequence is expected at the Restart input Sequence timing diagram Start Release J l f Stop request sid Li lL Release 1 static nn n NLO Release 2 start I UC ann Top 4 M NM LLL upstroke J LJ LU TLS LT LL enble LE OL Figure 234 Function block diagram for the N break function block A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 12 4 N break press with N PSDI mode Function block diagram Release 1 static z Release 2 start g PSDI g Upstroke z Restat g Control of drive gi g Eault present General description The N break function block is used for press applications with Presence Sensing Device Initiation PSDI mode Conform to the safety regulations for PSDI mode The requirements for PSDI mode are specified in local regional national and international standards Always implement PSDI applications in conformity with these standards and regulations as well as in conformity with your risk analysis and avoidance strategy If more than one mode is set up in which the ESPE e g safety light curtain is not used the ESPE has to be deactivated in this mode so that it is clear that the ESPE is currently not active in protective operation If more than one ESPE e g safety light curtain is used in an application that uses the N PSDI functions only one of t
221. f the press drive so that the function block can determine whether the press is currently supposed to be running or has been stopped Typically this is the Enable output of a subsequent Press setup or Press single stroke function block Do not connect any physical input signals to the Drive released input Connect the signal that controls the physical output for the press drive using a jump address or a CPU marker e fa jump address is used make sure that this signal is a loop back This is indicated by a clock icon on the destination tag of the jump address To this purpose connect the outputs of this function block to the following function blocks before you connect the jump address to the Drive released input This applies especially if all connections to the following function blocks are also realized using jump addresses e Ifa CPU marker is used then a Routing function block must be used to split the signal to the physical output for the press drive and to the CPU marker output Figure 217 Function block diagram for the Universal press contact function block A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Disable monitoring Using this optional input it is possible to deactivate the monitoring functionality under certain conditions in order to prevent the function block to go into an error state This can be useful for certain operating modes e g during the setup of the machine or when the press moves bac
222. fault value High or Low e tag names of the individual bits e activation or deactivation of the individual bits Routing A byte can be either local i e only valid for one or both immediately neighboring stations or global in the entire Flexi Line system A byte that is valid globally is communicated to the entire Flexi Line system All stations can read and change each bit of this byte If a station changes a bit this change will be effective on all other stations A byte that is valid locally is shared with either one or both immediately neighboring stations A station that receives a local byte from a neighboring station evaluates the information from this byte and in turn prepares its own local byte that it sends to one or both its neighboring stations The data received and the data sent are independent of each other during this process 110 Chapter 8 111 Note Flexi Line Default value The default value defines how a bit is affected by a station e Abit with the default value High is set to 1 logic status high if all stations signal a 1 for this bit logical AND As soon as only one station sets the bit to the logic status low the bit is set to 0 e A bit with the default value Low is set to 0 logic status low if all stations signal a 0 for this bit logical OR As soon as only one station sets the bit to the logic status high the bit is set to 1 Activation and deactivation of individual bits You can deactivat
223. figuration That means that if you have made changes to the configuration of any station that have resulted in a change of the Flexi Link IDs then you have to transfer the configuration again to all stations in order to apply the new Flexi Link IDs It does not matter which Flexi Link address is assigned to which station One recommended possibility is to follow the mounting order in the switching cabinet from left to right for better orientation If you change the address assignment of a Flexi Link system you may have to reconfigure the process image and the parts of the logic programming that use input bits from the Flexi Link process image because the Flexi Link address is part of the bit assignment in the process image 7 4 4 Flexi Link stations Flexi Link data in the logic editor The logic editor is the central place where the available information in the Flexi Link network is processed Flexi Link stations are handled like EFI sensors e Each station can use the information of the other stations as input data e Each station can provide its own data as outputs Ensure that all signals are present long enough Very short signals may not be recognized and transferred to other Flexi Link stations especially if the logic cycle time of the source is much shorter than the Flexi Link system s logic execution time Take appropriate measures to ensure that all signals are present long enough to be recognized in the Flexi Link system e g by
224. figuration a binary code to a one out of N one hot or to a priority code Up to 5 inputs can be configured The number of outputs depends on the number of inputs Evaluating inputs A B and C allows to encode binary codes with decimal values from 0 to 7 with a single Binary decoder function block input A 2 input B 2 input C 2 By using the optional inputs D and E it is possible to combine up to four Binary decoder function blocks in order to encode binary codes with decimal values from 0 to 31 Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Encoder mode e One out of N e Priority Inputs e Not inverted e Inverted Number of inputs 1to5 Value range 0 7 e 8 15 only available if more than 4 inputs are used e 16 23 only available if 5 inputs are used e 24 31 only available if 5 inputs are used One out of N In One out of N mode only the output with the number that corresponds to the current input values will be High Priority In Priority mode the output with the number that corresponds to the current input values and all outputs with lower numbers will be High Inputs inverted not inverted Using this parameter it is possible to invert all input values 148 Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks Truth tables for the Binary decoder function block The following applies for the truth table in this section e 0 means logic Low e 1 means logi
225. figure your project as described in Section 7 3 3 The Disconnect command in the System overview will disconnect all Flexi Link stations simultaneously The buttons for Transfer and Upload react the same way as well If you switch to the view for an individual station these buttons will affect only that station 84 Chapter 7 Flexi Link 7 3 2 Setting up a Flexi Link project in the Setting and Monitoring Tool If the required hardware is not available yet you can set up the hardware configuration for your Flexi Link project in the Setting and Monitoring Tool gt Open the Setting and Monitoring Tool on your PC or laptop gt Inthe startup dialog click on Create new Flexi Link project or choose from the Project menu the command New gt Flexi Link system project The Flexi Link System overview screen opens Figure 53 Flexi Link System overview gt Choose whether your Flexi Link system will be wired using only EFI1 or both EFI connections EFI1 allows to exchange up to 26 bits per station using both EFI1 and EFI2 each station can share up to 52 bits with the other stations Note You can change this setting any time later gt Now add the first station to your project Click one of the buttons for adding a new station on the left side of the screen This will open the view for this individual station Alternatively you can also switch to the view for an individual station using the Station buttons in the toolbar
226. function block Do not enter the same name used in any function block for the new customized function block 262 Chapter 9 Figure 252 Select Icon dialog for the customized function block Figure 253 New customized function block in the function block list Note Figure 254 Icons for the grouped function block and for the customized function block 263 Logic programming Function blocks gt If you want to assign another icon to your new customized function block you have two possibilities Click on Browse to choose a user defined icon Or click on Select to open the Select Icon dialog You can choose the icon from a fixed library Select Icon gt Select the desired icon and click OK gt Back in the Edit function block details dialog click OK to confirm your changes The selected grouped function block will appear in the function block list as a customized function block and will be available in all new projects on the same PC Logic Start Edge E Delays Counter and cycle EDM Qutput blocks Muting Press e e E other B Customized Function Blocks Inputs bO Function bl Outputs FB preview Once a customized function block has been placed on the worksheet its content is displayed on a new page In the example the name of the customized function block is Machine 1 The worksheet for the customized function block is displa
227. function block e The icon representing the customized function block may either be user defined or chosen from a fixed library within the Setting and Monitoring Tool It is created within the logic editor will be listed with the other function blocks in the function block list and will be available in all new projects on the same PC e Upon opening a project file containing customized function blocks on another PC you have the following options You can import the customized function blocks into the function block listing on the new PC for further use in new projects Or you can import the customized function blocks for this project only In this case they will not be listed in the function block list When determining the total number of function blocks within a project the customized function block is not counted as a single function block but rather the total number of blocks used within it How to create a customized function block In order to create a customized function block you must have already created it as a grouped function block see Section 9 13 1 gt Open the grouped function block view by clicking on its tab gt Click on Save as CFB in the toolbar The Edit Function Block Details dialog opens Edit function block details Function Block Name Machine 1 Select Function Block Icon Select Browse Co Cancel gt Enter a name for the new customized
228. g diagram 310 Chapter 15 311 Annex Report 4 21 2011 11 44 05 AM 7 2 3 B 4 5 3 7 amp A Interlock Safety Switch Reset EDM E Stop ESZ Inductive 1 reductive proximey 3_ proxim y s_ 24v OV ov ov ov Power Supp Interlock with Motor contactor Lockrg 1 A a 6 3 3 4 1 6 Test pulse parameter acai ce cn Long gap value ms x2 200 1 Annex Chapter 15 15 2 List of function block status in simulation mode Table 117 lists the function block status displayed in the FB Preview window Table 117 Function block status List of function block status in simulation mode Bottom dead center BDC left first time Bottom dead center BDC Bottom dead center BDC Bottom dead center BDC reached second time reached first time left second time Active Discrepancy error Edge detected Error Wait for function test Inactive Monitoring disabled Muting active No edge detected Off delay On delay OK Upper counter limit reached Overrun Cam left Overrun Cam reached Override Required Wait for reset restart pulse Output Enable is active Wait for all monitored inputs becoming active Drive is enabled Run up Cam reached Drive stopped Top dead center TDC left Top dead center TDC reached User mode is changing User mode is valid Lower counter limit reached Valve 1 is activ
229. g sensor of the last muting sensor pair changes to Low sensor clear or e With ESPE When the OSSDs of the protective device e g safety light curtain indicate that the protective field is no longer violated i e the protective field is clear and the OSSDs return to High If after the muting end the OSSD input of the ESPE becomes Low e g by a violation of the protective field of the ESPE before the next valid muting sequence has begun the Enable output of the function block becomes Low The next muting cycle cannot begin until the Muting end condition has been fulfilled 210 Chapter 9 211 Logic programming Function blocks Muting total time The Muting total time is used in order to limit the maximum duration of the muting sequence If the set value for the Muting total time is exceeded the Muting error and Fault present outputs change to High and the Enable output changes to Low The timer for the Muting total time begins when the muting function is activated indicated by the transition of the Muting status output to High The timer for the Muting total time is stopped and reset to zero when the muting function changes to Low If the optional Conveyor input is used the timer for the Muting total time pauses when the Conveyor input is High indicating that the conveyor belt has stopped Add muting time when ESPE is clear The Add muting time when ESPE is clear parameter is used when the Muting end condition has been
230. g the Flexi Link station A button in the toolbar if your project contains also one or two network modules you will find this entry in the submenu under Network modules gt Click on Byte 0 in the EFI1 area to display the tag names for Byte 0 and its bits in the lower half of the window Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Too 1 3 0 New Project ngagogog noaoaaag ogaoga noaoaaan gooagoaaan ngaoaang aog08880 aoEao8a80 Default values for process image J The chosen value will be used when the station has inded by teachi ing ted by the state ed during operation a process image with all values 0 will be used except for the IO error bit This is indicated by the state Station X missing Machine Operator Offline Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified gt Now replace the default tag names e g Safe 0 3 and Safe 0 4 with more expressive tag names e g Global Reset and Global E stop The assigned tag names will be displayed in the logic editor from now on B info 05 Global E stop E Global E stop cPU1 4 E Global Reset E Global Reset CPU A E A It does not make a difference for the routing whether you use the default tag names or change them but assigning clear tag names will help you to keep track of things in your projects 88 89 Chapter 7 Flexi Link Configuring the logic for Station B gt Click on
231. generic term for the WSO0 XTIO and WSO XTDI A generic term for the WSO GETH and WS0 GCC1 About this document Chapter 1 About this document Please read this chapter carefully before working with this manual and the MELSEC WS safety controller 1 1 Function of this document For the MELSEC WS safety controller there are sets of manuals with clearly defined applications as well as user s manuals hardware for each module e All MELSEC WS modules and their functions are described in detail in MELSEC WS series Safety Controller User s manual Use the Safety Controller User s manual in particular for the planning of MELSEC WS safety controllers The Safety Controller User s manual is designed to address the technical personnel of the machine manufacturer or the machine operator in regards to safe mounting electrical installation commissioning operation and maintenance of the MELSEC WS safety controller The Safety Controller User s manual does not provide instructions for operating machines on which the safety controller is or will be integrated Information on this is to be found in the operating instructions of the machine e The software based configuration and setting the parameters for the MELSEC WS safety controller are described in MELSEC WS series Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool Operating Manual The operating manual also contain a description of the diagnostic functions most important for operati
232. ges command from the context menu gt In the Current User Level area click on Log in gt In the Log in dialog box select the logic access level for which you want to log in type the password and click Log in gt Click OK How to log off gt In the hardware configuration right click on the CPU module and select the Change in access for Logic pages command from the context menu gt In the Current User Level area click on Log off gt Click OK How to protect a logic page gt Open the page to protect in the logic editor gt Using the right mouse button click the page and on the context menu select the required logic access level on the Set up access protection for Logic page submenu gt If you are not logged in you will now also be prompted to enter the password for the required logic access level Enter the password and click on Log in 54 Chapter 5 Figure 27 Invalid configuration warnings 55 A ATTENTION The graphical user interface The logic access level for a protected page is displayed at the top left of the page in a light gray font How to remove the page protection from a logic page gt In the logic editor open the page on which you want to remove the protection gt Using the right mouse button click the page and on the context menu select on the Set up access protection for Logic page submenu the Remove access protection for Logic pages command gt If you are not
233. gic pages on which the element clicked is used gt In order to delete an element from the worksheet right click it and select the Delete command from the context menu Table 4 Access levels in the logic editor The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 6 2 Logic access levels The logic access levels function allows you to protect individual pages in the logic editor using a password You can prevent changes to the logic page by unauthorized persons There are the following logic access levels Access level Right Not logged e Edit unprotected pages Logic access level 1 e Edit unprotected pages e Edit protected pages only access level 1 e Setup page protection for unprotected pages only access level 1 e Remove page protection for pages only access level 1 Logic access level 2 e Edit unprotected pages e Edit all protected pages e Setup page protection e Remove page protection from all pages e Disable page protection How to activate page protection gt In the hardware configuration right click on the CPU module and select the Change in access for Logic pages command from the context menu gt Activate the Enable password protection for Logic pages option gt Enter passwords for the logic access levels 1 and 2 gt Click OK How to log in for a logic access level gt In the hardware configuration right click on the CPU module and select the Change in access for Logic pa
234. gnal changes 212 ms 10 ms 222 ms gt Min time between signal changes 230 ms rounded up to multiples of 10 ms Example 3 Zero pulse 10 1 tooth per revolution Switching tolerances 1 gt teeth 9 to 11 corresponds to tow thigh Signal change 349 to 351 corresponds to t to t4 Maximum shaft speed 300 rpm 5 Hz Shaft speed for release 3 rom 0 05 Hz Logic execution time 4 ms Check the maximum signal frequency for incremental signals Max signal frequency 5 Hz x 1 tooth revolution 5 Hz Smallest tiw 1 5 Hz x 9 360 5 ms gt greater than the logic execution time v Smallest thigh 1 5 Hz x 351 360 195 ms gt greater than the logic execution time v Determine the time between signal changes for the speed limit Signal frequency for release 0 05 Hz x 1 tooth revolution 0 05 Hz Max input pattern period 1 0 05 Hz x 11 360 611 ms Time between signal changes 611 ms 10 ms 621 ms gt Min time between signal changes 630 ms rounded up to multiples of 10 ms 176 Chapter 9 Figure 162 Logic example for the Ramp down detection function block Figure 163 Sequence timing diagram for the Ramp down detection function block Figure 164 Sequence timing diagram for the Ramp down detection function block with plausibility check 177 Logic programming Function blocks Logic example SP EDMXTIO 1 14 Motor contactor XTIO 1
235. gnetic switch function block Table 84 Parameters of the Magnetic switch function block 193 Logic programming Function blocks Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Inputs e Single channel e Dual channel equivalent e Dual channel complementary Discrepancy time 0 disabled 10 to 30 000 ms in 10 ms steps If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Number of outputs Use fault present e 1 Enable output e 2 Enable output and Discrepancy error output e With e Without For further information on the behaviour of this function block please refer to Section 9 9 2 9 9 5 Magnetic switch Function block diagram General description The internal logic of the Magnetic switch function block corresponds to the functionality of the Emergency stop function block only with a limited parameter selection The function block allows graphic differentiation in accordance with the application The Magnetic switch function block is a predefined function block for reed switches or other sensors for which discrepancy time monitoring is required When the evaluation of the complementary inputs is High the Enable output is High see Section 9 9 2 Parameters of the function block Parameter Inputs Possible values e Dual channel equivalent e Dual channel complementary Discrepancy time 10 to 3000 ms in 10 ms steps
236. gram Control T Delay 1 gi Delay 2 gi Delay 3 g Delay 4 z General description The Adjustable off delay timer function block delays the switching off of the Enable output by an adjustable duration Four individual delay times can be configured each of which can be activated via a related Delay input The overall delay is the sum of all activated delay times Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Off delay time 1 0 disabled Off delay time 2 0 to 600 seconds in steps of 10 ms If the value is not 0 the related input is activated In this case the value Off delay time 3 has to be greater than the logic execution time Off delay time 4 The overall delay sum of all delay times is limited to 600 seconds The timer begins with the delay sequence when a falling edge High to Low occurs at the Control input If the timer has expired after the selected overall delay period the Enable output changes also to Low provided the Control input remains Low If the Control input changes to High the Enable output is set to High immediately and the delay timer is reset If during a running delay sequence any Delay input changes its value the Time changed output changes to High and remains High until the Control input becomes High again The effective overall delay time depends on the Delay inputs that were High at the moment when the falling edge at the Control input has occurred This
237. grams Figure 147 Sequence timing diagram Ton Ton ToFF Ton Torr Ton for single valve in manual le ar a lt gt lt gt lt gt reset mode Control 1 l l l l Feedback 1 ea ouput tab FL iL DP LL Feedback error Figure 148 Sequence timing diagram A Ton Torr Ton for double valve in manual reset mode P Control 1 l l Feedback 1 l l Feedback 2 l onnea ar b e opita A Laf Lo Feedback error E S ee ee oe el ns Figure 149 Sequence timing diagram Ton Tort Ton for directional valve gt _ gt lt _ Pr Control 1 o on ee Control 2 D a Feedback 1 a oo 2 a en Feedback 2 ad fe if Output 1a b o Loron on Output 2a b eee a a E Directional error D O ee es Oe ee ee 166 Chapter 9 Figure 150 Function block diagram for the User mode switch function block Table 71 Parameters of the User mode switch function block 167 Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 9 User mode switch Function block diagram General description The User mode switch function block selects an output depending on an input value Output x is High if Input x is High The function block supports 2 to 8 inputs and the corresponding outputs Only one input may be High at any time 1 out of n If no input or more than one input is High the output that was High last is kept High for the configured discrepancy time After expir
238. guration steps e Check the minimum duration of the encoder pulses see step 1 below e Determine the time between signal changes for the speed limit see step 2 below Step 1 Check the maximum signal frequency for incremental signals The encoder pulses thigh and ti must both have a minimum duration of the logic execution time This limits the allowed signal frequency and encoder speed depending on the encoder type The following figures show typical signal patterns for different encoder types 174 Chapter 9 Figure 161 Signal pattern for zero pulse encoders Logic programming Function blocks It must be ensured by the design of your system that the minimum duration of the encoder pulses thigh and tow must both be always higher than the logic execution time Take all possible tolerances into account e g switching tolerances tooth wheel tolerances etc The following table shows typical values for different encoder types Encoder type Max allowed encoder signal frequency Hz for logic execution time 4ms 8 ms 12ms 16ms 20ms 24ms 28ms 32ms 36ms 40 ms AIB 90 phase shift 125 0 62 5 41 7 31 3 25 0 20 8 17 9 15 6 13 9 12 5 A ATTENTION 175 1 3 gap 83 3 41 7 27 8 20 8 16 7 13 9 11 9 10 4 9 3 8 3 1 4 gap 62 5 31 3 20 8 15 6 12 5 10 4 8 9 7 8 6 9 6 3 Pulse 180 125 0 62 5 41 7 31 3 25 0 20 8 17 9 15 6
239. h but the Enable output is still Low Typically this output is used to control a signal lamp Enable output The Enable output becomes High if the Release condition fulfilled output is High and a valid restart pulse has been detected at the Restart input provided that all activated Release inputs remain High The Min restart pulse time defines the minimum required duration of the pulse at the Restart input Valid values are 100 ms and 350 ms If the pulse duration is shorter than the configured minimum pulse time or longer than 30 s the pulse is ignored The Enable output becomes Low if one or more Release inputs become Low Ensure that the transitions of the signals for restarting fulfill the requirements In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Sequence timing diagram Restart ml m Release 1 input l f Enable output MPL L ___On T Release condition mr ooo fulfilled Restart required TL 1 ULM Stop gt Run Figure 136 Function block diagram for the Off delay timer function block Table 65 Para
240. h the EFI2 LED 2 Hz You will need the password for Administrator The default password is MELSECWS To stop the LED flashing click the button again it is now labeled Stop identify Check the serial number on the memory plug and compare it with the serial number shown in the Setting and Monitoring Tool Figure 50 Apply settings button Apply settings gt Click on the Apply settings button in the upper left hand corner of the screen The Flexi Link addresses of the stations will be changed Figure 51 Flexi Link Network settings with valid address assignment Boome BEB ronsir Tuor mes EF11 2 QEFIN FlesiLrkDEFI1 26602 Fixi Lik ID EFI2 20600 EJ Ip zF coms 83 Figure 52 Flexi Link System overview Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 Step 3 Read in the hardware settings gt Click on the System overview tab The following view opens EE Type P Connectto the device WS0 CPUT Sarialnumber 0051 0002 pra Firmware version v2 00 0 N Connecta the device Tre wS0 CPUI RS O SERS 9960 SD Consett the device 9960 ESSERE FTN 5253 9 5 a gt Click on the Upload button The Setting and Monitoring Tool will read in the hardware and configuration settings of all devices on this station gt When the hardware configuration is complete click Disconnect You can now con
241. h their new tag names e Some bits are reserved and can not be used or edited These bits are displayed grey in the upper half of the window e You can also delete tag names Bits that have no tag name can not be used They will be displayed grey in the upper half of the window and they are not displayed in the Flexi Link process image see also Section 7 4 2 How to set the default values gt Click on a byte in the EFI1 or EFI2 area to display its content in the lower half of the window gt Now click once on the icon to the right of the tag name field of any bit to toggle this bits default value between 0 Low and 1 High The set default value will be used in the Flexi Link system s process image if the corresponding station has been suspended see Section 7 4 6 Figure 78 Default values for Flexi Link input bits Flexi Link Chapter 7 __ s Note Changing the default value of any bit changes the process image of the configuration A ATTENTION and in consequence the Flexi Link ID for the EFI string the changed bit belongs to You will be warned that you have to transfer the changed configuration to all stations in order to apply the new Flexi Link ID Otherwise the communication in the Flexi Link network will be disrupted due to a Flexi Link ID mismatch see also Section 7 2 2 and Section 7 5 7 4 6 Flexi Link stations Teach function The Teach function allows you to keep a Flexi Link system o
242. have to change the element name in the language that is currently set in the Setting and Monitoring Tool on your PC gt Use the Browse button at the bottom of the screen to assign a custom image to any element or sub element gt If an element contains two or more sub elements the Extractable option is available Elements based on a template that has been configured with this option active can be expanded or split into their sub elements which can then be treated as individual elements see Section 5 5 5 gt If the option Single test output is activated all sub elements of the element must be connected to the same test output Examples for this are the tested user mode switches which must use either inputs 11 13 15 I7 if test output X1 is used or inputs 12 14 16 18 with test output X2 gt Enter the desired BOM bill of material information in the BOM info file card for the used elements and sub elements This information will be used in the Setting and Monitoring Tool report in the material list Create custom element template S Inputtypes General BOM Info Summary E sg Potential Free Contacts and Restart No of devices 1 E New Customized element Internal item l E nnel Type il channel NO l D eee ote Dual channel Part number NC Dual Channel Input ae IE Equivalent Chain Principle Description Manufacturer SICK AG 0 O 40 Chapter 5 Figure 17 Editi
243. he ESPEs may be used to fulfill the requirements for N PSDI mode In conformity with EN 692 and EN 693 for press applications the number of breaks is limited to 1 or 2 Other applications depend on the applicable standards Prevent access to hazardous movements Press systems with a configuration that would allow a person to enter to cross through and to leave the protective field of an ESPE are not permitted for PSDI mode This function block defines a specific sequence of events that trigger a press cycle Breaks are defined as the transition from High to Low to High of the PSDI input signal In PSDI mode of a press an indirect manual triggering of a press cycle is carried out based on a predefined number of breaks in the ESPE If the ESPE e g safety light curtain detects that the operating movements of the operator related to the insertion or removal of parts have ended and that the operator has withdrawn all body parts from the protective field of the ESPE the press may trigger automatically The N break function block can be used in connection with the Universal press contact or Press single stroke function blocks and an input for a safety light curtain The Enable signal of this function block controls for example the Start Release input of a Press single stroke function block The N break function block checks whether the start sequence is valid and when the break counter or the function block have to be reset 250
244. he input signal Release 1 static is mandatory The Enable output always changes immediately to Low if Release 1 static is Low If this function block is used together with a press contact function block e g Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact its Enable output must be connected with the Release 1 static input of this function block Release 2 start The input signal Release 2 start is optional If Release 2 start is configured the Enable output can only change to High e g during switching on when Release 2 start is High When the Enable output is High Release 2 start is no longer monitored Do not use the Release 2 start input for safety purposes Do not use the Release 2 start input for initiating safety stops because this input is evaluated temporarily during the start sequence only Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Top The Top input signal is used in order to determine the end of the press cycle i e the press has reached the top dead center This signal is available at the function blocks Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact Do not use the Top input for safety purposes Connect the Top input only with the Top output of an Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact function block or to an equivalent signal source Do not use the Top input for initiating safety stops Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Upstroke input If u
245. he installation method may cause the module to fail or malfunction due to the deposition of dust or the adhesion of water Wiring Precautions WARNING e Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product The system could start up unexpectedly while you are connecting the devices CAUTION e Individually ground the GND wires of the MELSEC WS safety controller with a ground resistance of 100 Q or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction e Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure e Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction e Mitsubishi MELSEC WS safety controllers must be installed in control cabinets Connect the main power supply to the MELSEC WS safety controller through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of an external power supply must be performed by maintenance personnel who is familiar
246. he machine will be in danger Note The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 6 4 Inputs and diagnostics bits of the main module in the logic editor On the Inputs and Diagnostics tabs in the logic editor the main module provides the following inputs and diagnostic bits Logical 0 and Logical 1 The Logical 0 input can be used to set a function block input permanently to O Low Respectively the Logical 1 input can be used to set a function block input permanently to 1 High This may be necessary to achieve a valid logic configuration if there are function block inputs that are not used but can not be disabled Configuration is valid This diagnostics bit is high if the configuration on the main module is valid Module power supply is OK This diagnostic bit is high if there is no error on the supply voltage for the main module Flexi Line Teaching required This diagnostics bit is high if it is necessary to teach a Flexi Line system Verify status This input is High if the configuration is verified CV LED of the CPU module is static yellow on First logic cycle This input is High for the very first logic cycle after every transition from the Stop state to the Run state For all following logic cycles it remains Low This input can be useful to trigger initialization functions in the logic program Simulation bit You can be set this bit to 0 Low or 1 High in simulation mode or force mode Otherwise the bit is always 0
247. hen in any such event the disclaimer of and limitations on pecuniary or economic consequential and incidental damages shall nevertheless be enforceable to the fullest extent allowed by law f In no event shall any cause of action arising out of breach of warranty or otherwise concerning the Products be brought by Customer more than one year after the cause of action accrues g Each of the limitations on remedies and damages set forth in these terms is separate and independently enforceable notwithstanding the unenforceability or failure of essential purpose of any warranty undertaking damage limitation other provision of these terms or other terms comprising the contract of sale between Customer and MELCO 4 Delivery Force Majeure a Any delivery date for the Products acknowledged by MELCO is an estimated and not a promised date MELCO will make all reasonable efforts to meet the delivery schedule set forth in Customer s order or the purchase contract but shall not be liable for failure to do so b Products stored at the request of Customer or because Customer refuses or delays shipment shall be at the risk and expense of Customer c MELCO shall not be liable for any damage to or loss of the Products or any delay in or failure to deliver service repair or replace the Products arising from shortage of raw materials failure of suppliers to make timely delivery labor difficulties of any kind earthquake fire windstorm flood
248. her with a press contact function block e g Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact the Enable output of this press contact function block must be connected with the Release 1 static input of the Press setup function block Release 2 start The input signal Release 2 start is optional If Release 2 start is configured the Enable output can only change to High e g during switching on if Release 2 start is High If the Enable output is High Release 2 start is no longer monitored Do not use the Release 2 start input for safety purposes Do not use the Release 2 start input for initiating safety stops because this input is evaluated temporarily during the start sequence only Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Top The Top input signal is used in order to determine the end of the press cycle i e the press has reached the top dead center This signal is available at the function blocks Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact The Top input signal is used for single stroke protection When the Single stroke protection configuration parameter is set to With the Enable output changes to Low when the Top input changes from Low to High Do not use the Top input for safety purposes Connect the Top input only with the Top output of an Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact function block or to an equivalent signal source Do not use the Top input for initiating safety
249. here are logic function blocks and application specific function blocks The following table lists all function blocks available in the CPU modules Logic e NOT e AND e OR e XOR exclusive OR e XNOR exclusive NOR e Multiple release JK Flip Flop Multiple memory Binary decoder Binary encoder Routing 1 N signal duplication Routing N N e RS Flip Flop N inputs to N outputs parallel Start Edge e Reset Start warning e Restart Edge detection Delays e On delay timer e Off delay timer Adjustable on delay timer Adjustable off delay timer Counter and cycle e Event counter up down up and down e Clock generator Ramp down detection Frequency monitor Log generator EDM Output blocks e EDM e Valve monitoring Fast shut off with bypass Fast shut off Muting Press e Sequential muting e Parallel muting e Cross muting e Universal press contact e Press single stroke Press setup Press automatic N break PSDI Press with N PSDI mode Eccentric press contact Other e User mode switch e Emergency stop e Safety gate monitoring e Magnetic switch e Light curtain monitoring e Tolerant dual channel monitor Two hand control type IIIA Two hand control type IIIC Multi operator Switch synchronization Error output combination User defined function blocks e Grouped function block Customized function block 122 Chapter 9 Figure 93
250. his case a complete start sequence is necessary so that the Enable output can return to High e g in order to start the press The PSDI timer starts when the press is stopped at the top dead center i e the Top input changes from Low to High and after all other stop conditions have been fulfilled The basic setting for the PSDI time monitoring is 30 s in accordance with the maximum PSDI time allowed for eccentric presses defined in EN 692 If the PSDI time monitoring is set to 0 PSDI time monitoring is disabled Start of first PSDI pulse PSDI input Low High The Start of first PSDI pulse PSDI input Low High parameter determines under which circumstances a break is regarded as valid If the Start of first PSDI pulse PSDI input Low High parameter is set to After the start of upstroke a break is valid if the beginning of the break i e falling edge High to Low at the PSDI input occurs after the rising edge at the Upstroke input no matter whether the Top input has changed to High already If the Start of first PSDI pulse PSDI input Low High parameter is set to After Top has been reached a break is only valid if the beginning of the break i e falling edge High to Low at the PSDI input occurs after the rising edge at the Top input In both cases the end of the break i e rising edge Low to High at the PSDI input must occur after the rising edge at the Top input no matter whether the Top input is still High or has
251. his is the case if Number of BDC signals per cycle is 0 2 e g hydraulic press and the press moves back and forth in the bottom section Figure 220 Press cycle for the Universal press contact function block with 2 BDC transitions Upstroke output BDC 1 gt 0 Up 0 If in this setting no BDC pulse at all occurs during the cycle the Upstroke output will remain Low for the complete cycle Note If the BDC input is already High when the monitoring of the contact inputs begins e g in the first logic cycle after resetting an error or after enabling monitoring with Disable monitoring input the Upstroke output will remain Low during the first cycle The next BDC transition from Low to High is only accepted after a transition from High to Low has occurred at the Top output 235 Figure 221 Contact monitoring with the Universal press contact function block with Overrun cam enabled Figure 222 Contact monitoring with the Universal press contact function block with BDC enabled Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 TDC monitoring There must be exactly one TDC pulse per cycle A violation of this rule can be detected only if the Overrun cam input is enabled and or the BDC input is enabled and the parameter Number of BDC signals per cycle is set to 1 e g eccentric press Overrun cam monitoring If Overrun cam is enabled the Overrun cam input signals must accord with Figure 221 and the foll
252. ibility CHECK cr a E A 274 11 3 Verification of the configuration eesseeeeeesseeeseerrsseerrsserrssrrnssrrrssrerrssreens 275 11 4 Activating the write protection of the configuration in the Salety controle aaran erR a R An I A ER T 278 11 5 Configuration CHECKSUMS eececeeeeeeeeeeetene eset teres ee taeeeeetaeeeeetieeeertnaeeeenes 278 11 6 Deletion of the configuration in the safety controller ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 278 12 Device states of the MELSEC WS safety controller 279 12 1 Changing the device state 00 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeetieeeeetnaeeeee 280 12 2 Behaviour on Startup nci aa aa a ae cess donnie 280 12 3 Software reset of the CPU module ec cece ce eeeeeeeeeteeeeetneeeeetnaeeeeees 280 13 Technical COMMISSIONING iaai anrai EE AAAA E 281 13 1 Wiring and voltage SUPPLY oiriin iniae ie 281 13 2 Transferring the configuration aeseseessseeeeerseeeenneseernessnnnestennsernnneseenneernna 281 13 3 Technical test and COMMISSIONING ssseeseseeeseeressserreserrrsstrrsstirrssrrrrssrens 282 13 Troubleshooting sea anara R aed dele A eee 283 ANNEX Ae a Sacer reper a a E a 284 15 1 Example application reports ceccececceceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseseceeeaeeeeeeeseneeaees 284 15 1 1 Example application Newspaper palletizer ccceceeseeeeeeeeeeees 284 15 1 2 Example application Wood Scanner ccccceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeteestnaeeeeees 295 15 1 3 Example app
253. ical care dialysis and life support facilities or equipment 4 amusement equipments 6 handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals 5 incineration and fuel devices 7 mining and drilling 8 and other applications where the level of risk to human life health or property are elevated REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision September 2009 SH NA 080856ENG A First edition March 2010 SH NA 080856ENG B A new module CC Link interface module was added July 2011 SH NA 080856ENG C Description on Flexi Link system was added August 2012 SH NA 080856ENG D Setting and Monitoring Tool was upgraded August 2014 SH NA 080856ENG E A new module WS0 CPU3 module was added Description on Flexi Line system was added Setting and Monitoring Tool was upgraded Japanese manual version SH 080853 F This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS a tanh iela aes eae eee 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT eccccecceceeeeeeeee
254. ick on an input or output to edit its tag name Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project Edit mode Configuration of grouped function black can be modified Drag and drop input or outputs Double Click an UO tag to set name andi 260 Chapter 9 Figure 248 Grouped function block with devices attached Figure 249 Switching between internal and external view Note 261 Logic programming Function blocks The inputs and outputs that have been added to the grouped function block will appear on the function block itself in the main program and devices can be attached to them Once a device is attached it will be displayed in the logic of the grouped function block when the view is switched to external view In Out Summary Page IO matrix Page1 Machine 1 x g emmo p i JE csoooxmonnz gt ss F Safety switch xTO 1I 1 gt PE Ret me RES xT 1 1i GR Satety switch xTio t ug _ st Single channel NC XTI To switch between the internal tag names of the grouped function block internal view and the external I O descriptions external view click on Switch View in the toolbar i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New Project Device Extras mad Wa EIB Hardware configuration Logic e Com settines J 3connect 123 i E Save as customized function block
255. ick the Export Flexi Line definition button and export the Flexi Line definition gt Configure the logic for the station as described in section 5 6 and in section 8 3 2 Setting up the other stations in Setting and Monitoring Tool gt Configure the hardware for the remaining Flexi Line stations in the same way as for the first station gt Once the hardware configuration for a station is complete drag the Flexi Line element from the list box for the elements to the CPU module A pop up window opens gt In this window click the name of the file with the Flexi Line definition saved pre viously to import it Or gt Click on Use existing Flexi Line definition A file selection dialog opens Select the desired file and click on Open gt Then configure the logic for the station Commissioning of the Flexi Line system gt Connect the individual Flexi Line stations as described in the user s manuals hardware gt Place in operation each individual station as a standalone system The stations change to the Teach required status and the LINE LED flashes Green at 2 Hz gt Once all stations are in the Teach required status change to the Flexi Line view while Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to any station gt Click the Teach button on the toolbar to place Flexi Line in operation The topology of the system is then checked and confirmed and the Flexi Line system is started 8 3 2 Conversion of a Flexi Line sy
256. iguration and diagnostics of the stations is still possible then For more information on how to correct a Flexi Link ID mismatch please see Section 7 5 Note Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 7 3 Getting started This section describes how to set up a new Flexi Link system In order to do this you need to configure the hardware for your project first You have two possibilities e You can first set up and wire the hardware then connect your PC to the system and read in the hardware setup using the Setting and Monitoring Tool e Ifthe required hardware is not available yet you can set up the hardware configuration for your Flexi Link project in the Setting and Monitoring Tool and transfer the configuration later when you have assembled the hardware Either way once the hardware configuration for your Flexi Link project is complete you can proceed with the software configuration The last step is to transfer the finished configuration to the stations to verify the configuration of the stations and to run the system 7 3 1 Connecting to an existing Flexi Link system Step 1 Assemble and wire the hardware gt Set up the hardware for your Flexi Link system WSO CPU1 or WSO CPU3 modules safety I O modules and connected devices such as sensors switches actuators etc For information on wiring please see the Safety Controller User s Manual Step 2 Establish a connection to your Flexi Link system gt Connect a PC or notebook to
257. igure 2 The view can be selected below the menu bar The graphical user interface 5 3 Standard views The Setting and Monitoring Tool has the following views that can be accessed via buttons below the menu bar CPU3 Module Operator l OFfine JA Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not varified e The structure of a MELSEC WS safety controller consisting of various hardware modules as well as the configuration of the inputs and outputs and the connected elements are specified in the Hardware configuration view e The function logic can be configured by means of logic function blocks and application specific function blocks in the Logic editor view This view is not available unless a CPU module has been selected beforehand in the hardware configuration If the project contains at least one network module or if RS 232 communication is enabled the Network module 13 view is available Here you can configure the network module and the data that are transferred to and from the network Note Do not save the project data while Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to the 27 MELSEC WS safety controller Before saving the project data disconnect the PC from the MELSEC WS safety controller e Complete information on the currently loaded project and all settings including the logic programming and wiring diagrams is available in the Report view Furthermore additional information on the proj
258. igured The number of outputs depends on the number of inputs An optional Fault present output is available Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of inputs 2 to 8 Encoder mode e One out of N e Priority e Priority to binary Input 1 dominant Use fault present e With e Without One out of N In One out of N mode only one input may be High at the same time The outputs are set dependent on the index input 1 1 input 2 2 of the High input If all inputs are Low or if more than one input is High at the same time all outputs are set to Low and Fault present becomes High Priority In Priority mode more than one input may be High at a time The outputs are set dependent on the High input with the highest index input 1 1 input 2 2 If all inputs are Low at the same time all outputs are set to Low and Fault present becomes High Logic programming Function blocks Priority to binary input 1 dominant Chapter 9 In this mode all outputs are set to Low if input 1 is High regardless of the other inputs If input 1 is Low the function block behaves as in Priority mode If all inputs are Low at the same time all outputs are set to Low and Fault present becomes High Truth tables for the Binary encoder function block The following applies for the truth tables in this section e 0 means logic Low e 4 means logic High y
259. igured in 2 steps e Inthe first step the first station is configured and the process image defined e The second step comprises the configuration of the other stations During this step the process image must be transferred to these stations Note Each station in a Flexi Line system must be configured in Setting and Monitoring Tool as an individual station and placed in operation Configuration of the first station in the Setting and Monitoring Tool gt Open the Setting and Monitoring Tool software on your PC or notebook gt Inthe startup dialog click on Create new Flexi Link project or choose from the Project menu the command New Standalone station project The Hardware configuration window is opened gt First add anew WSO CPU3 gt Then add the required hardware as described in section 5 5 1 and in section 5 5 3 gt Once the hardware configuration for the selected station is complete drag the Flexi Line element from the list box for the elements to the CPU module A pop up window opens gt In the pop up window click New Flexi Line definition The Flexi Line view opens 116 Chapter 8 Recommendation 117 Flexi Line gt Configure the Flexi Line process image as described in section 8 2 2 Plan the Flexi Line process image carefully If you change the process image subsequently then you must transfer it again to each of the individual stations in the Flexi Line system gt On the Flexi Line toolbar cl
260. ill the requirements of the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs A ATTENTION Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Input parameters and input signals of the function block Stop request The Stop request parameter determines the Stop state of the Press automatic function block If this parameter is configured as When Start Release input is Low the Start Release input signal is used to control the Enable output directly If configured to When Stop input is High the Enable output changes to Low when the Stop request input is High In both cases the Enable output changes to High when the following conditions are fulfilled A transition from Low to High occurs at the Start Release input and e the Stop request input is Low if it is connected and e no other reason is present that would normally trigger a stop signal e g Release 1 static is Low Do not use the Start Release and Stop inputs for safety stops Independent of the configured stop request mode the inputs Sta
261. in gray In the area on the left you can select the individual bits in the byte currently shown The processing of these bits is shown in detail on the right Flexi Line Chapter 8 Figure 87 Flexi Line diagnostics Bi3 disconnect By Transfer fe upload itor BBE Network Modules 23 Report g amp Diagnostics gt Data Recorder co CPU3 Module f iu Tech Rest Locktoproteot GE a anp tOieiEsp uj iow gogoan upk 2 Global Reset ajh Low w 76586220 s Da Torbia mom eate Output bita to Fiai Line net merion O peed oupa pp N a gt ae a Diagnostics B a __ EE _ ES amp Byte 2 bow goace880 bytes I o 20908200 bytes pw GGEG8aGo Bytes gt in GoEGGaGo 7 Byte 6 p gt tow gogogaga amp Byte 7 ap tow Gac8a80 Valid configuration Executing Operator System Online A Device configuration is not verified In the example in Figure 87 bit 0 from byte 2 with the tag name Reset has been selected This bit is low in the process images that are received from the neighboring stations but high at the local input marked in green For this reason this bit is also high in all process images sent by this station 8 3 Getting started 8 3 1 Configuration and commissioning of a Flexi Line system This section describes how you can setup a new Flexi Line system and place it in operation A Flexi Line system is conf
262. in the selection list on the left hand side gt After you have completed your selection click Refresh report The report is now assembled and displayed in the right hand window section How to save or print a report The report can be printed or saved as PDF gt To save the report as PDF click on the Save button gt To print the report click on the Print button A PDF preview of the report will be created that you can subsequently print Figure 34 Diagnostics view Table 8 Meaning of the diagnostics information The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 8 Diagnostics view Once you have completed your project and connected to your MELSEC WS safety controller you can perform a diagnostics on your system In the Diagnostics view a complete history of all messages information warnings and error messages of a connected MELSEC WS safety controller is available in the upper part of the window If you click on one of the entries in the list details on the selected message are displayed in the lower part of the window v1 Safety Controller Setting and Monitorine Too 1 2 0 Now Project CBIR CPU1 module i Time 13073520 Power Oycle 310 Current 1 Historical 71 Extension module 1 Supply voltage for outputs too low 13 04 57 43 4 25 2011 10 49 11 AM 310 Warning non volatile Extension module 1 01 00 01 00 1 00 00 04 4 s 13 04 57 43 1141063 s 8 o ARB Authorized client 2 Syst
263. input If the timer has expired after the selected overall delay period the Enable output changes also to High provided the Control input remains High If the Control input changes to Low the Enable output is set to Low immediately and the delay timer is reset If during a running delay sequence any Delay input changes its value the Time changed output changes to High and remains High until the Control input becomes Low again The effective overall delay time depends on the Delay inputs that were High at the moment when the rising edge at the Control input has occurred This means that a change on the Delay inputs during a delay sequence has no effect on the current delay sequence If the Control input is High in the first logic cycle after transition from the Stop state to the Run state the Enable output becomes High immediately without delay Sequence timing diagram Control LL Delay 1 a a ee Delay 2 te ey eee O On delay time 1 2 On delay time 1 rimer value 0 Enable output J l J l Stop Run Figure 144 Function block diagram for the EDM function block Table 69 Parameters of the EDM function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 8 7 EDM External device monitoring Function block diagram EOM feedback gi Monitored Input _ General description The EDM External device monitoring function block allows to control an external device e g a con
264. international rules and regulations apply to the installation use and periodic technical inspection of the MELSEC WS safety controller in particular e Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Provision and Use of Work Equipment Directive 89 655 EC e Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC The work safety regulations safety rules e Manufacturers and owners of the machine on which a MELSEC WS safety controller is used are responsible for obtaining and observing all applicable safety regulations and rules e The notices in particular the test notices of this manual e g on use mounting installation or integration into the existing machine controller must be observed e The test must be carried out by specialised personnel or specially qualified and authorized personnel and must be recorded and documented and retraced at any time by third parties e The external voltage supply of the device must be capable of buffering brief mains voltage failures of 20 ms as specified in EN 60204 e The modules of the MELSEC WS safety controller conform to Class A Group 1 in accordance with EN 55011 Group 1 encompasses all the ISM devices in which intentionally generated and or used conductor bound RF energy that is required for the inner function of the device itself occurs e The MELSEC WS safety controller fulfils the requirements of Class A industrial applications in accordance with the Interference emission basic specification
265. ion A opens gt Add a CPU1 or CPU3 and then an WSO XTIO module for Station A gt Connect a single channel emergency stop button to input 11 and a single channel reset button to input I2 of the Station A WSO0 XTIO module gt Connect a single channel robot to output Q1 and a lamp to output Q2 of the Station AWS0 XTIO module gt Now click on the button for Station B in the toolbar The Hardware configuration view for Station B opens gt Add a CPU1 or CPU3 and then an WSO XTIO module for Station B gt Connect a single channel robot to output Q1 and a lamp to output Q2 of the Station B WS0 XTIO module Configuring the logic for Station A gt Click on the button for Station A in the toolbar Then switch to the Logic editor view for Station A gt Using the connected input and output elements on the WSO XTIO module and a Restart function block create the following logic configuration Robot XTIO 1 01 P 3 Reset XTIO 1 12 E Stop E521 XTION N 4 s Lamp XTIO 1 02 y 86 Chapter 7 Flexi Link Configuring the Flexi Link routing for Station A gt In the Logic editor for Station A add an additional Routing N N function block configure it for two inputs and outputs and connect its inputs to the WS0 XTIO inputs for the reset button and the emergency stop button gt Drag two outputs of the Station A CPU module on the logic editor worksheet You will find the outputs in
266. ithout Min restart pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Ensure that the transitions of the signals for restarting fulfill the requirements of the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed e Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs 240 Chapter 9 241 A ATTENTION A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Input signals of the function block The Press setup function block supports the following input signals Start Release The Start Release input signal is used to indicate the beginning and the end of the press movement A rising edge Low to High at the Start Release input signals a start of the press A Low Start Release input signals a stop of the press If Restart interlock is set to When Release 1 or Start Release is Low a valid restart sequence is required after a stop that was caused by a Low Start Release input signal Release 1 static The input signal Release 1 static is mandatory The Enable output always changes immediately to Low if Release 1 static is Low If this function block is used toget
267. ivated e Double Control 1 Output 1a Output 1b Feedback 1 Output 2a Output 2b Feedback 2 activated e Directional Control 1 Output 1a Output 1b Feedback 1 Control 2 Output 2a Output 2b Feedback 2 Directional error activated 50 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms 0 disabled only with CPU firmware V2 00 0 or higher If this parameter is disabled then the option Continuous monitoring when valve is active has to be deactivated as well Max switch on feedback delay time If this parameter is enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time 50 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms 0 disabled only with CPU firmware V2 00 0 or higher If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time Min reset pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Use fault present e With e Without Max switch off feedback delay time Connect the feedback signals correctly The signals for Feedback 1 and Feedback 2 have to be protected against short circuits to the signals for outputs e g Output 1a 1b 2a and 2b as well as against each other e g by means of protected wiring or wiring of these signals solely within the control cabinet Output 1a to Output 2b Both outputs of a pair Output 1a and Output 1b or Output 2a and Output 2b have always the same value This way two outputs per valve are available to connect two output elements directly Output 1a 1b or Output 2a 2b become High
268. kwards If the Disable monitoring input is High the Enable output of the Eccentric press contact function block is Low and the monitoring of the cam signal sequence and overrun is inhibited provided there is no error pending The error output states are not affected by this If the Disable monitoring input is High and an error is pending a reset of the error is possible When the Disable monitoring input changes from High to Low the function block behaves in the same way as after a change from the Stop state to the Run state i e the Enable output will become High again 9 11 3 Universal press contact Function block diagram Drive released y Reset gi Overrun cam y Disable monitoring gi General description The Universal press contact function block can be used for different press types e g hydraulic presses and eccentric presses i e mechanical presses The minimum configuration requires only TDC Top dead center Optionally the BDC Bottom dead center and Overrun cam inputs can be connected The Upstroke output is available only if the BDC input is enabled e Overrun monitoring is possible only if the Overrun cam input is enabled If BDC and Overrun cam are not used a plausibility check is not possible for the function block In this case a check for overrunning cannot be carried out The only remaining function in this case is the provision of the Top output signal Do not use this functi
269. l l wi o n S L Enable Start Release Top Enable Upstroke muting Start Release y Release 3 safety Top Upstroke Enable 246 Chapter 9 Figure 232 Function block diagram for the Press automatic function block Table 111 Parameters of the Press automatic function block A ATTENTION 247 Logic programming Function blocks 9 12 3 Press automatic Function block diagram Start Release yj Stop request a Release 1 static Release 2 start y 2 g Upstroke a Restart a General description The Press automatic function block is used in connection with press applications in which the workpieces are moved automatically to and from the press but where occasionally access to the press is required for example to change a tool To this purpose the function block can generate a stop signal for the press i e the Enable output changes to Low in a position in which the tool can be changed easily e g in the top position when a stop has been requested before Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Restart interlock after stop condition e With e Without Stop request e When Start Release input is Low e When Stop input is High Upstroke input e With e Without Release 2 start input e With e Without Min restart pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Ensure that the transitions of the signals for restarting fulf
270. l sequence as a transported object The placement of the muting sensors is determined by the form of the object to be detected To this purpose the following options are amongst others available with differing numbers of sensor input signals e two sensors e two sensors and an additional signal C1 e four sensors two sensor pairs e four sensors two sensor pairs and an additional signal C1 Muting sensor signals can be generated by the following external sensors e optical sensors e inductive sensors e mechanical switches e signals from the control system If you use optical sensors for muting applications use sensors with a background suppression in order to ensure that only the transported material fulfills the muting condition These sensors detect material only up to a specific distance Objects that are further away can therefore not fulfill the input conditions of the muting sensors Three different function blocks are available for muting e Parallel muting muting with two parallel sensor pairs e Sequential muting muting with two sequential sensor pairs e Cross muting muting with one crossed sensor pair e The muting cycle is the specified sequence of all processes that are executed during muting e The muting cycle begins when the first muting sensor is activated The muting cycle ends depending on the configuration in the function block for the muting end condition It is not possible to activate muting again
271. l version V1 7 0 or higher e You can also use Flexi Link or EFI communication at the same time as Flexi Line i e it is possible to connect either EFl compatible devices or Flexi Link stations e The process image is transferred from station to station with a fixed update rate The processing logic on the individual stations is however not necessarily simultaneous as the stations are not synchronized with each other e The update rate of the Flexi Line system is dependent on the maximum length of cable between two stations and the size of the process image Max cable length 32 bits 64 bits 96 bits 125 m 2 ms 2 ms 4 ms 250 m 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 500 m 4 ms 8 ms 12 ms 1000 m 8 ms 12 ms 20 ms Flexi Line Chapter 8 8 2 Principle of operation Flexi Line 8 2 1 Topology The individual stations within a Flexi Line system are not identified using addresses Instead each station is connected to its immediate neighbors Communication is with the previous station and the next station The arrangement of the stations in the Flexi Line system must be confirmed during commissioning by means of a teach process and subsequently monitored If a station is disconnected from the system replaced or added then the arrangement of the stations must be confirmed again see section 8 2 5 8 2 2 Flexi Line configuration The heart of the Flexi Line system is the process image This process image defines how many and
272. le Can transfer verified configuration Can be changed by Can connect to the system transfer diagnostics Administrator Cannot verify a configuration Administrator Default MELSECWS May create and edit configurations offline Can be changed by Can transfer verified and non verified Administrator configuration Can connect to the system transfer diagnostics Can use Force mode Can verify a configuration Switch to the user group Operator If you leave the PC connected to devices without personal attendance or supervision you must log off from the user levels Maintenance or Administrator and switch to the user level Operator to make sure that no unauthorized person can transfer configurations to the devices The password protection relates to the configuration of the current devices The password is saved in the memory plug This means that the password will remain the same even if the CPU module is replaced How to change the user level gt In the Hardware configuration view click on the Log in symbol on the left side of the Configuration area while you are online The Change user group dialog will open gt Select the desired user level enter the password and click on Log On How to assign or to change the password for a user level gt Go into online mode gt Open the Hardware configuration view gt With the right mouse button click on the CPU module gt From the context menu select
273. le 98 Output values for the Muting lamp output 215 Logic programming Function blocks The following timer functions are influenced by the value of the Conveyor input Monitoring function Effect of the Conveyor input Monitoring of the e Ifa belt stop is detected these timer functions pause total muting time e If the conveyor belt starts up again the timer continues its function with the value stored before the belt stop has been detected If Concurrency this occurs the first time the total muting time is increased once by monitoring 5 seconds The Sensor signal gap monitoring is not influenced by a belt stop Min override pulse time The Min override pulse time determines the minimum High duration for a valid pulse sequence at the Override input Muting status output The Muting status output indicates the state of the muting function in accordance with the following table Condition Muting status output Muting cycle inactive no error Low Muting cycle active no error High Muting error detected Low Override active no error High Muting lamp output The Muting lamp output is used in order to indicate an active muting cycle The value for the Muting lamp output depends directly on the value of the Muting status output as shown in the following table Status of the Muting function block Value of the Muting lamp output Muting status output is Low Low Muting st
274. lication Ramp down detection ccccceeseeseeeeeeeees 304 15 2 List of function block status in simulation MOdEe eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 312 15 9 Precautions 22 0 denne ne ea ee ee aie 313 TSA SICK CONTAC Sica e a da sects aa aa aa e a E a E eats 314 14 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 15 Senorg Description term abbreviation WS0 MPLO The abbreviation for the WS0 MPL000201 MELSEC WS safety controller memory plug WSO MPL1 The abbreviation for the WSO MPL100201 MELSEC WS safety controller memory plug WSO0 CPUO The abbreviation for the WSO0 CPU000200 MELSEC WS safety controller CPU module WS0 CPU1 The abbreviation for the WS0 CPU130202 MELSEC WS safety controller CPU module WS0 CPU3 The abbreviation for the WS0 CPU 320202 MELSEC WS safety controller CPU module WS0 XTIO The abbreviation for the WS0 XTIO84202 MELSEC WS safety controller safety I O combined module WSO XTDI The abbreviation for the WSO XTDI80202 MELSEC WS safety controller safety input module WS0 4RO The abbreviation for the WS0 4RO4002 MELSEC WS safety controller safety relay output module WS0 GETH The abbreviation for the WS0 GETH00200 MELSEC WS safety controller Ethernet interface module WS0 GCC1 The abbreviation for the WS0 GCC100202 MELSEC WS safety controller CC Link interface module CPU module A generic term for the WSO CPU0 WSO CPU1 and WS0 CPU3 Safety I O module Network module A
275. licking on the hardware symbol for a station will open the routing view for this station where you can edit the tag names for the bits and bytes sent from this station see Section 7 4 4 96 Chapter 7 Figure 72 Flexi Link Network settings view 97 Note Flexi Link 7 4 3 Flexi Link system Network settings The Network settings view is where you can assign the Flexi Link address A B C or D to the individual stations in the Flexi Link network This is a prerequisite for the configuration because it enables the Flexi Link Designer to address each station and to identify the bits in the Flexi Link process image e g Station A EFI1 Byte 0 Bit 0 The Network settings view is opened automatically if you connect to a Flexi Link system and the Setting and Monitoring Tool detects an erroneous address assignment e g if two or more connected stations have the same Flexi Link address This will be the case if you have created a Flexi Link system with new CPU modules or if you have replaced one or more CPU modules in an existing system If at least one station of a Flexi Link system is online all connected stations are shown with their current address assignment address A to D Additionally the memory plug serial number and the current Flexi Link IDs for EFl1 and EFI2 of each station are displayed here You can update this information using the Scan button at the top left of the win
276. lock has three inputs The J input and K input have only an effect on the outputs when a rising edge is detected at the Clock input In this Case e lf J input is High and K input is Low the Q output will be High and the Q Q inverted output will be Low e If J input is Low and K input is High the Q output will be Low and the Q output will be High e f both inputs are Low the last values of outputs Q and Q will be held e If both inputs are High the outputs will toggle i e their last values will be inverted Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of outputs e 1 Q e 2 Qand Q Invert Clock input Invert K input Invert J input Each input of this function block can be inverted see Section 9 5 2 Note Table 36 Truth table for the JK Flip Flop function block Figure 107 Logic connections for the multiple memory function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Truth table for the JK Flip Flop function block The following applies for the truth table in this section e 0 means logic Low e 1 means logic High e 7 means that a rising edge has been detected at the input e y means that a falling edge has been detected at the input e n 1 references the preceding value e n references the current value e x means any 0 or 1 The following truth table is valid for a
277. logged in you will now also be prompted to enter the password for the required logic access level Enter the password and click on Log in 5 6 3 Validation of the configuration The Setting and Monitoring Tool performs an automatical check of the logic program If an error is detected the configuration is marked as invalid and a warning icon appears in the upper right corner of the screen Additionally a warning icon marks the erroneous page of the logic program and the function block that is not connected correctly e g one or more inputs are not connected is displayed orange Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project GETHII3 xnony E Sofey switchXTIO 12 As long as the configuration is invalid it is not possible to start the simulation mode or to transfer the configuration to the MELSEC WS safety controller How to correct an invalid configuration gt Connect all unconnected function block inputs As soon as all function blocks are connected correctly they will be displayed yellow and the invalid warnings will disappear Check your application thoroughly for correctness The Setting and Monitoring Tool checks only for connection errors in your logic program You are responsible to check whether your application conforms to your risk analysis and avoidance strategy and also fulfils all applicable standards and regulations Otherwise the operator of t
278. logic editor A CPU marker consists of an output marker and an input marker The input marker always takes the same value High or Low as the corresponding output marker with a delay of one logic execution time Take the delay caused by CPU markers into account CPU markers always cause a delay of one logic execution time because the input marker always uses the value of the output marker in the previous logic cycle The resulting delay must be considered for the response time calculation and for the functionality How to use a CPU marker gt Connect a CPU output marker e g Marker 0 0 from the Outputs tab of the logic editor to the function block output that you want to use Each CPU output marker can be used only once in a project gt Connect the corresponding CPU input marker e g Marker 0 0 from the Inputs tab of the logic editor to the function block input where you want to use the signal from the first function block as shown in the following screenshot CPU input markers can be used several times in a project Mode1XTON N og Terre H Mode 2 XTIO 1 2 DD _ Marker 0 0 58 Chapter 5 Figure 29 Example of jump addresses A ATTENTION with and without loop back 59 The graphical user interface 5 6 8 Jump addresses Jump addresses can be used basically in the same way as CPU markers They consist of a source jump address and a destination jump address The destinati
279. ls of the function block Standard or Sweden mode The Mode parameter specifies the complete start sequence for the N break function block Standard mode requires that the configured number of breaks is carried out followed by a valid restart sequence Sweden mode first requires a valid restart sequence followed by the configured number of breaks 251 Figure 235 Sequence timing diagram for a complete start sequence in Standard mode in two cycle mode Figure 236 Sequence timing diagram for a complete start sequence in Sweden mode in two cycle mode Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Requirements for the start sequence If the Enable output changes to Low because of one of the following conditions a complete start sequence can be necessary e Release 1 static is Low e the Unexpected PSDI output is High while Cycle 0 and there is no active upstroke muting and no stop at the top dead center e incase of a PSDI timeout e after the Control of drive has been switched on If the Unexpected PSDI output is High and the Enable output is Low and the PSDI input is also Low and Restart interlock is set to Without a restart is possible without a complete restart sequence This can also apply during the press upstroke if Restart interlock is set to Always The minimum break time at the PSDI input is 100 ms or 350 ms Shorter breaks are not evaluated as valid i e they are ignored If the Condition for Release 2 star
280. lt t Set total muting time s TiN Light curtains TIN Muting sensor Response time of the light curtain or the muting sensors in the MELSEC WS safety controller See the Safety Controller User s Manual In this example the material can either be moved in both directions or a fixed direction of transportation can be defined as follows With the optional input C1 If used the C1 input always has to be activated before both muting sensors of the first sensor pair e g A1 and A2 become High By means of the Direction detection configuration parameter The sensor layout shown in this example is suitable for all types of sensors Avoid mutual interference of the sensors Increase the protection against manipulation and the safety level by using the following configurable functions concurrency monitoring monitoring of the total muting time muting end via ESPE sequence monitoring Information on wiring can be found in Section 9 10 3 Sequence timing diagram The function block requires that a valid muting sequence takes place Figure 204 shows an example of a valid muting sequence based on the basic parameter setting for this function block Muting sensor A1 se ee a _ ee Muting sensor A2 an a OSSDs of the safety sensor O os ie os ns oo he Muting sensor B1 S O 2 ee ee ee e ere Muting sensor B2 poa a a E a Enable D n n a Muting error Muting status tt a pram wees Figure 205
281. lues of inputs A B and C and the configured Encoder mode One out of N or Priority f Input D and Input E are set to a lower value than the Value range parameter e g Input E 0 Input D 1 and Value range 16 23 all outputs are Low independent of the configured Encoder mode One out of N or Priority f Input D and Input E are set to a higher value than the Value range parameter e g Input E 1 Input D 1 and Value range 16 23 in One out of N mode all outputs are set to Low in Priority mode all outputs are set to High 150 Chapter 9 Figure 125 Function block diagram for the Log generator function block Note Table 60 Parameters of the Log generator function block Figure 126 Configuration example for Log generator with two emergency stop buttons and a safety switch 151 Logic programming Function blocks 9 7 16 Log generator Function block diagram General description The Log generator function block monitors up to eight inputs If at one of these inputs an edge is detected according to the configuration the function block sets the corresponding output to High for the duration of the logic execution time and adds a user defined text message to the diagnostics history This can be read out in online mode using the Setting and Monitoring Tool diagnostic function see Section 5 8 These messages will be deleted when the voltage supply for the MELSEC WS
282. m a Motor XTIO 1 01 J caooxnonne P F Satety switch XTION 13 P e el RE11 RE21 RE31 XTIOLE Safety switch XTIO 1 14 4 Single channel NC XTIO Figure 246 New logic editor page for the new grouped function block Note Figure 247 Adding inputs and outputs to a grouped function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 The content of the new grouped function block is stored on a new page In the example the name of the new grouped function block is Machine 1 The worksheet for the grouped function block is displayed orange Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project de Configuration of grouped function block can be modified Drag and drop input or outputs Double Click an UO tag to set name and icons The name and the icon associated with a grouped function block can be edited here by clicking on the function block s icon in the FB Group Info view By clicking on the associated tab here Machine 1 you can edit the grouped function block How to add inputs and outputs to a grouped function block gt Click on the tab for the grouped function block gt Switch to the FB Group Info view on the left side of the screen gt Drag and drop inputs or outputs onto the function block worksheet and attach them within the logic as needed Automatic wiring is not supported gt Double cl
283. machine downtime the configured time for the Sensor signal gap monitoring should furthermore be shorter than the time span that the transported object requires to pass a muting sensor pair e g A1 A2 or B1 B2 C1 input The C1 input is used as an additional measure to avoid manipulations If C1 is used a transition from Low to High has to take place before the first muting sensor pair becomes High Input C1 must then remain High until both sensors of the muting sensor pair are High so that a valid muting condition can arise If this condition is not fulfilled this results in a muting error indicated by the Muting error output The C1 input subsequently has to return to Low again before the next muting cycle is permitted Override input An Override input signal is used to remove transported objects that have remained in the protective field of the protective device e g safety light curtain after power failures triggering of an emergency stop muting errors or similar circumstances The Override status output available from firmware V3 02 changes to high and the Override required output pulses at 2 Hz if the following conditions are met e Muting is currently inactive i e Muting status is Low e Atleast one muting sensor is High e The OSSDs of the ESPE are Low e g safety light curtain is interrupted e The Enable output is Low If the conditions for the Override required output are fulfilled and a valid override pulse sequen
284. means that a change on the Delay inputs during a delay sequence has no effect on the current delay sequence If the Control input is Low in the first logic cycle after transition from the Stop state to the Run state the Enable output remains Low as well Sequence timing diagram Control M UA aN Uee Delay 1 M Delay 2 J Off delay time 1 2 Off delay time 1 Z a 0 Timer value l l l Enable output J l l l Stop Run Figure 140 Function block diagram for the On delay timer function block Table 67 Parameters of the On delay timer function block Figure 141 Sequence timing diagram for the On delay timer function block Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 5 On delay timer Function block diagram input g Chapter 9 General description The On delay timer function block delays the switching on of the output signal by a specified duration Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Delay time 0 disabled 0 to 300 seconds in steps of 10 ms If the value is not 0 it has to be greater than the logic execution time The timer begins with the delay sequence when a rising edge Low to High on the input occurs If the timer has expired after the configured delay period the Enable output changes also to High provided the input remains High If the input changes to Low the Enable output is set to Low immediately a
285. ment will be imported 5 5 8 Connection of SICK EFl compatible devices You can connect SICK EFl compatible devices to your CPU module if your project contains a WSO CPU1 or WS0 CPU3 gt Drag and drop the desired SICK EF I compatible device e g a C4000 safety light curtain from the Elements selection window to the EFI connection of the CPU module The Device selection wizard will open where you can select the exact device variant or enter its type code directly gt Click Finish to confirm your selection and to connect the selected SICK EFI compatible device The EFI bits for the connected SICK EF l compatible device are now available in the logic editor as inputs and outputs for the CPU gt Double click an SICK EFl compatible device to open its configuration dialog e The configuration of an SICK EFl compatible device must be uploaded or transferred separately in the configuration dialog of the SICK EFl compatible device To do this you have to connect the Setting and Monitoring Tool with the MELSEC WS safety controller first e For details of the SICK products please contact your local SICK representative see Section 15 4 http www sens control com e Depending on the devices already connected there may be restrictions which devices can be connected on the other EFI connection Switching of the EFI address In some combinations of SICK EFl compatible devices it is mandatory that the MELSEC WS safety controller has the EFI a
286. meters of the Off delay timer function block Figure 137 Sequence timing diagram for the Off delay timer function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 8 3 Off delay timer Function block diagram Input gi Enable General description The Off delay timer function block delays the switching off of the output signal by a configurable duration Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Delay time 0 disabled 0 to 300 seconds in steps of 10 ms If the value is not 0 it has to be greater than the logic execution time The timer begins with the delay sequence when a falling edge High to Low on the input occurs If the timer has expired after the configured delay period the Enable output changes also to Low provided the input remains Low If the input changes to High the Enable output is set to High immediately and the delay timer is reset Sequence timing diagram Input UNT LNA Setpoint 0 Enable output J l J l j l Stop Run 158 Chapter 9 Figure 138 Function block diagram for the Adjustable off delay timer function block Table 66 Parameters of the Adjustable off delay timer function block Figure 139 Sequence timing diagram for the Adjustable off delay timer function block with Off delay time 1 and Off delay time 2 159 Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 4 Adjustable off delay timer Function block dia
287. n 3 Wa 4 no Single channel NO Single channel 4 Ww I5 wa EDM channel a m 5 23W a w Singje channe NO Single channel 6 wi 7 wo Single channel NO Single channel A 9 23W n e 53000 Safety Laser Scanner 3000 ay asi ip Type 3 3 43 3 Outputs Page 10 293 Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM Mode Title Tag name 7 a3 Lamp Single channe 8 channel Q a Lamp Singje 0 Ss a H Motor contactor Dual channel 3 4 3 4 Power Supply Title Tag name 1 wv ra Ai XTIOB Power Supply w A2 3 4 3 5 Wiring diagram g 2 2 4 5 000 4 sa ae ts 3000 Reset Singe chanel EDM Singe channel NO ND WwSsS0 XTIO 24v OV ov ov Power Supply Motor contacte 1 a wh 10 ov ov Lamp Lamp amp Q 7 8 Page 11 294 Chapter 15 Annex 15 1 2 Example application Wood scanner Report SICK Mitsubishi Application name CPU0 Module CRC Tool 0x58B85518 CRC Device 0x00000000 Configuration date and time 4 20 2011 9 32 00 PM 295 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM Content Page 2 296 Chapter 15 297 Annex Report 4 21 2011 11 17 34 AM 1 Bill of material a a a AY_A2 MITSUBISHI XTD ave X5 XO XT XB 1 RE300 Reed switch dual REIO0 XTDEZ NI2 channel antivatent XTD Input expansion module Page 3 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011
288. n 0 the Release 3 safety signal is muted Top The Top input signal is used in order to determine the end of the press cycle i e the press has reached the top dead center This signal is available at the function blocks Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact The Top input signal is used for single stroke protection The Enable output changes to Low when the Top input signal changes from Low to High Do not use the Top input for safety purposes Connect the Top input only with the Top output of an Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact function block or to an equivalent signal source Do not use the Top input for initiating safety stops Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger Mode for upstroke muting If the Max Up Stroke muting time is not set to 0 the Upstroke input has to be connected Connect the Upstroke input only with the Upstroke output of an Eccentric press contact or a Universal press contact function block In this case the Release 3 safety and Start Release input signals are muted muting of the Start Release input depends on the parameter settings when the Enable output is High and the Upstroke input is High This function block does not carry out a plausibility check of the Upstroke input signal If the Upstroke input is High several times during a single press cycle it is possible to mute the corresponding input of the function block several times If a signal shall not be mut
289. n profiles the Setting and Monitoring Tool must be in offline mode gt If you are in online mode click on the Disconnect button to change into offline mode gt Click on COM settings The dialog for editing the connection profiles is opened Connection settings ara Yoo Add COM connection profile Gy Add TCP IP connection profile y Add USB connection profile Check all connection profiles Network settings Standard Serial Port TOMT e Yo COMautodetection Baudrate Auto scan use a use Identifier WS0 CPU3 Yo PathChain 1 1 1 1 3 TCPIP TCPAP Address 0 0 00 Qo AitF 7265 9628 Port 3000 O fiv configure the connection please proceed as follows To a a A 3 a All existing connection profiles are displayed here The currently activated profile is marked light green and with bold typeface the profile selected for editing is marked blue At the bottom of the dialog an overview of the current settings is displayed The symbols for editing the profiles have the following meaning Symbol Meaning H Save profile with the current project Activate profile X Edit profile il Remove profile r Check connection 70 Chapter 6 Figure 42 Create new profile dialog serial port 71 Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller How to add a COM profile serial port gt Click on the Add COM profile button The Create new profile dialog is opened Creat
290. n resolution e 300 MB free hard disk memory Setting and Monitoring Tool is a NET Framework application It requires NET Framework Version 3 5 or higher Information on the current NET Framework versions supported operating systems and Regional and Language Options settings is available on the Internet at http www microsoft com Microsoft NET Framework Version 3 5 or higher and any other components that may be needed can also be downloaded from http www microsoft com downloads Use a standard user account or higher in Windows Vista or Windows 7 To display text of Setting and Monitoring Tool in Chinese use Chinese version of Windows operating systems To display text of Setting and Monitoring Tool in Japanese or Chinese in Windows XP English version add the language in the Regional and Language Options dialog box The dialog box can be accessed from Control Panel 4 2 Installation and Update For the acquisition of Setting and Monitoring Tool including information for installation please contact your local Mitsubishi representative gt Start the installation by running the setup exe file and then follow the further instruction New software versions may contain new functions and support new MELSEC WS modules The version of the Setting and Monitoring Tool can be found in the Extras menu under About Remove the old software version before installing a new one The working directory in which the project data
291. nal Function block parameters Parameters Possible values each for frequency 1 and frequency 2 Min period duration 20 ms to 2 54 s in 10 ms increments The value must be greater than the logic execution time Max period duration 30 ms to 2 55 s in 10 ms increments The value must be greater than the min period duration the logic execution time Average value of the pulse duration thigh 0 inactive 10 ms to 2 53 s in 10 ms increments With 0 inactive the pulse duration is not evaluated The pulse duration is then always valid for the evaluation If the value is not 0 it must meet the following conditions e gt 2 x Logic execution time and e lt Min period duration Tolerance of the pulse duration Tolerance of the pulse duration thigh 10 ms to 310 ms in 10 ms increments The value must be greater than the logic execution time Error message if period duration too short eWith eWithout Use Fault present eWith eWithout This parameter applies to the function block and therefore to both Frequency 1 and Frequency 2 178 Chapter 9 A ATTENTION Table 79 Examples for effective limits for the period duration 179 Note Logic programming Function blocks Pay attention to the accuracy of the monitoring The minimum duration for the pulse duration t ig and the minimum duration of the space between pulses tiow on the pulse generat
292. nal sequence and the correct stopping overrun of the press The outputs of these function blocks indicate the current press cycle phase in which the press is operating e g upstroke or top Typically the Enable output Top output and Upstroke output of a contact monitoring function block are connected to the corresponding inputs of one or more press cycle control function blocks Eccentric press Universal press Typical press types Eccentric press Eccentric press Hydraulic press Press travelling Forward Forward and backward directions Cams Overrun cam Top dead center TDC Upstroke cam Bottom dead center BDC Dynamic cam Overrun cam Top position When Overrun cam High When TDC Low condition Upstroke condition Overrun monitoring When Upstroke cam High Optional When BDC High Optional Disable monitoring Optional Optional 9 11 2 Eccentric press contact Function block diagram General description Drive released _ Overrun cam y Upstroke cam g Dynamic cam y The Eccentric press contact function block can be used for specific types of eccentric presses i e mechanical presses The minimum configuration requires an Overrun cam and the Upstroke cam Optionally a Dynamic cam can also be connected 226 Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks Parameters of the function block Table 107 Parameters of the
293. ncy time can be set to 0 inactive or to a value from 4 ms to 30 s It will be rounded automatically to the next greater multiple of 4 ms due to the internal sampling frequency of the modules e If signals of tested sensors are connected to WSO XTDI and WSO XTIO modules the discrepancy time has to be greater than the test gap the max Off on delay of the used test output You can find these values in the project report under Configuration I O module Test pulse parameter e If you try to set a lower discrepancy time than allowed the minimum value will be shown in the dialog window Table 114 Dual channel evaluation Note I O modules Chapter 10 The following truth table describes the discrepancy conditions for the dual channel equivalent and the dual channel complementary input evaluation eee Input A Input B DAR Status of the Safety I O Saman i i a 14 13 12 14 T Y dual channel module input in ie y i yp 15 17 16 18 evaluation the logic editor Equivalent 0 0 0 Inactive 0 0 0 1 s Dinetepancy Discrepant 0 Unchanged time 1 0 Dise epancy Discrepant 0 Unchanged time 1 1 0 Active 1 0 2 Di x x Bey Error 0 1 time timeout Comple 0 1 0 Inactive 0 0 mentary lt Di 0 0 cists Discrepant 0 Unchanged 2 time lt Discrepanc x 1 1 j eke Discrepant 0 Unchanged 2 time 1 0 0 Active 1 0 2 Discrepanc X x i pay Error 0 1 time timeout 14 I
294. nd the delay timer is reset Sequence timing diagram Enable output nt T Lo n i oy Setpoint 0 A a a L Delay time Stop Run 160 Chapter 9 Figure 142 Function block diagram for the Adjustable on delay timer function block Table 68 Parameters of the Adjustable on delay timer function block Figure 143 Sequence timing diagram for the Adjustable on delay timer function block with On delay time 1 and On delay time 2 161 Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 6 Adjustable on delay timer Function block diagram Control Delay 1 g Delay 2 g Delay 3 g Delay 4 g General description The Adjustable on delay timer function block delays the switching on of the Enable output by an adjustable duration Four individual delay times can be configured each of which can be activated via a related Delay input The overall delay is the sum of all activated delay times Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values 0 disabled 0 to 600 seconds in steps of 10 ms On delay time 1 On delay time 2 If the value is not 0 the related input is activated In this case the value On delay time 3 has to be greater than the logic execution time On delay time 4 The overall delay sum of all delay times is limited to 600 seconds The timer begins with the delay sequence when a rising edge Low to High occurs at the Control
295. nditions for muting sensors Condition Description A1 amp A2 Muting applies as long as this condition is fulfilled and furthermore the requirements mentioned above existed Equations and prerequisites for calculating the distance L 2vx Tin Muting sensor vxt gt L L3 Tin Light curtain Tin Muting sensor 224 Chapter 9 Note Figure 210 Valid muting sequence using the basic configuration setting C1 input without Override input without Conveyor input without 225 Logic programming Function blocks Where L4 Minimum distance between the detection line of the ESPE and the detection by A1 A2 L Distance between the two detection lines of the sensors Sensors activated sensors clear L3 v Velocity of the material e g of the conveyor belt t TiN Light curtain TIN Muting sensor Response time of the light curtain or the muting sensors in the MELSEC WS safety controller See the Safety Controller User s Manual e Material flow is possible in both directions in this example e In order for material to be moved in both directions place the intersection of the muting sensors exactly in the course of the light beams of the ESPE e In order to move material in one direction only place the intersection with regard to the direction of the transport behind the light beams of the ESPE see Section 9 10 8 e The sensor layout shown in this example is suitable for both thr
296. ne v Device configuration is verified TMF JwK The Data recorder view contains the following windows and elements Selection window for the Trigger and trace configuration You can record data either continuously or only once a specific trigger condition is met e Status control selection window Is used to start and stop the recording In addition the data recorder configuration can be read from the device or transferred to the device here e Selection windows for the Inputs or Outputs on which the signals are to be recorded For this purpose drag the required inputs and outputs from the selection window to the data display window e Data display window 1 where the signals recorded on the inputs and outputs are displayed e Toolbar with icons to import export and delete the data recorded to increase or reduce the size of the view or to reset it to its original size In addition you can show and hide markers using the toolbar You can use the markers e g to determine the intervals between signal changes Recording data To record data the data recorder configuration in the device and in Setting and Monitoring Tool must match With the aid of the buttons in the Status control selection window you can transfer the data recorder configuration either from Setting and Monitoring Tool to the device or read it from the device 66 Chapter 5 67 The graphical user interface If you have loaded the configuration from
297. nfiguration options shall not be editable uncheck the Visible checkbox for these options How to transfer a customized element to another PC gt Save the project file and open it on the other PC Customized elements contained in the project will be imported automatically Importing customized elements requires Setting and Monitoring Tool version 1 3 0 or higher How to delete a customized element gt In the Elements window in the Hardware configuration view right click on the customized element you want to delete gt From the context menu select the command Delete template You will be asked for confirmation gt Click OK It is not possible to delete a standard element template Note Note The graphical user interface Chapter 5 How to export customized elements as XML files gt In the Elements window right click on the customized element you want to export and choose the Export command from the context menu A folder selection dialog opens gt Select or create the folder where you want to save the customized element and click on OK The customized element is then saved as an XML file How to import customized elements as XML files gt In the Elements window right click on any element or element group and choose the Import command from the context menu A file selection dialog opens gt Select the XML file for the customized element that you want to import and click on Open The customized ele
298. ng the configuration settings of a customized element Note Note 41 The graphical user interface gt Select the customized element or the sub element that you want to configure and click on the Settings file card to edit the configuration settings Create custom element template Input types 5 ag Potential free contacts and restart M Element contieuration editable a Dual ci uate Mode jno Dual channel equivalent chain ITI principle NO k Default 3000 m 0 100000 ms Fw Test period inimum 40 laximum 100000 Discrepancy time p ON OFF filter reaction time extended by 8 ms o OFF ON filter reaction time extended by 8 ms Element is connected to test output Test gap time se ir El ct i EZ gt Adjust the settings e g Discrepancy time ON OFF filter OFF ON filter etc as described in Section 5 5 5 In addition to editing the configuration options you can also activate or deactivate them completely and enter maximum minimum and preset values gt Check the Mandatory checkbox for a function if elements based on this template must be used on modules supporting this function e g to create an element that requires connection to a module with test outputs gt Check the Element configuration editable checkbox if Elements based on this new template shall be editable within the limits that are preset on the Settings file card gt If only selected individual co
299. nged For the behaviour of the double dual channel evaluation see Section 9 9 2 and Section 9 9 3 The synchronization evaluation for the Two hand control type IIIC function block differs from the Safety gate monitoring function block with regard to the condition for the Inactive synchronization status For the Two hand control type IIIC function block both dual channel evaluations must be Inactive i e the inputs A B of both input pairs must be Low High at the same time Furthermore the Two hand control type IIIC function block has no Synchronization error output because with a two hand control it is not regarded as an error if not both manual switches are actuated within the specified 500 ms However this synchronization time may not be exceeded because otherwise the Enable output will not change to High Sequence timing diagram Input iA SOL LS EET Input 1B l l l l mput2a POL L T L Input 2B l l l J l J Enable rd mr Discrepancy error pair m a Discrepancy error J l pair 2 Fault present T ee S a Stop Run T 2 TDisc T 2 Tsync TDisc Discrepancy Tsyne Synchronization time time Figure 194 Function block diagram for the Multi operator function block A ATTENTION Table 91 Parameters for the Multi operator function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 9 11 Multi operator multiple two hand control Function block diagram Enable Operat
300. not hinder a switch off when the Fast shut off is activated The Fast shut off with bypass function block however allows to temporarily bypass the Fast shut off function using the bypass input The Fast shut off with bypass function block is only available with WSO XTIO with firmware version V2 00 or higher Example In the following logic example the C4000 will switch off the Q2 motor XTIO 1 12 Reset XTIO 1 Q2 Motor conta LU J xtio 1 1314 c4000 Simple logic such as this can be accomplished within the Fast shut off function block itself see how to configure below The signal path from the output of the Fast shut off function block to the physical output that is selected in the Fast shut off function block must be configured in such a way that switching off of the output of the Fast shut off function block always results in a direct switching off of the physical output as well Typically the AND Restart or EDM function blocks can be used in the signal chain for this An OR function block however does not comply to this rule A ATTENTION Table 42 Parameters of the Fast shut off function block Figure 114 Configuration example for Fast shut off with three light curtains Figure 115 I O settings dialog for the Fast shut off function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Always consider the total response time of the entire safety function The respo
301. nput Release 1 static The Release 1 static input signal is mandatory The Enable output always changes immediately to Low if Release 1 static is Low If this function block is used together with a press contact function block e g Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact its Enable output must be connected with the Release 1 static input of this function block Release 2 start The input signal Release 2 start is optional If Release 2 start is configured the Enable output can only change to High e g during switching on if Release 2 start is High If the Enable output is High Release 2 start is no longer monitored Do not use the Release 2 start input for safety purposes Do not use the Release 2 start input for initiating safety stops because this input is evaluated temporarily during the start sequence only Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger 244 Chapter 9 245 AN ATTENTION Note A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Release 3 safety The Release 3 safety input signal is an optional signal The Enable output can only change from Low to High if Release 3 safety is High If Release 3 safety is Low and Upstroke is Low the Enable output is set to Low and a restart sequence has to occur in accordance with the settings If Release 1 static and Upstroke are High and the maximum upstroke muting time is configured to a value higher tha
302. nput does not change from High to Low before Tepy has expired or e the Monitored input changes from High to Low and the EDM feedback input does not change from Low to High before Tepy has expired or e the Monitored input is Low and the EDM feedback input changes to Low for longer than Tepm or e the Monitored input is High and the EDM feedback input changes to High for longer than Tepw 162 Chapter 9 Note Figure 145 Sequence timing diagram for the External device monitoring EDM function block Figure 146 Function block diagram for the Valve monitoring function block configured for a directional valve 163 Logic programming Function blocks The EDM error and Fault present outputs become Low if a signal sequence is detected that sets Output 1 and Output 2 to High Alternatively an error can also be reset with the aid of the Error reset input from firmware V3 02 The EDM error and Fault present outputs change to low if the Error reset input changes from low to high and one of the two following conditions is met e The Control input is low and the EDM feedback is high Or e The Control input is high and the EDM feedback is low Only if the second of these two possible conditions is met are the outputs Output 1 and Output 2 also high If you require a delay of the Output 1 and Output 2 signals then you have to realize the output delay with another function block before the EDM function block and not after
303. nse time of the Fast shut off function block is not the same as the total response time of the entire safety function The total response time includes multiple parameters outside of this function block For a description of how to calculate the total response time of the MELSEC WS safety controller please see the Safety Controller User s Manual Parameters of the function block Possible values Fast shut off 1 to 8 Parameter Number of inputs Fast shut off with bypass 1 to 7 Select output for fast shut All outputs of the safety I O module whose inputs are connected off to the function block if the output is not already used for Fast shut off How to configure the Fast shut off function block The following example shows the function with three light curtains attached to a Fast shut off function block Reset XTIO 1 15 J c4o00 xT10 1 1112 a Input J c4000 xTIo 1 1314 od u EJ C4000 XTIO 1 1718 P t Inpu 3 PNP output XTIO 1 93 Ep PNP output XTIO 1 0304 Release condition fulfilled Reset Required Indication To configure the Fast shut off function block perform the following steps gt Connect input elements to the function block Double click the function block to open the configuration dialog and click the I O Settings tab E Fast shut off Parameter In Out Settings In Out Comment Info Input Output Settings Number of inputs N
304. ntary 0 1 0 Inactive 0 Unchanged lt Discrepancy 2 0 0 Discrepant 0 Unchanged time lt Discrepanc 1 1 5 pansy Discrepant 0 Unchanged time 1 0 0 Active 1 0 2 Di x x y oe Error 0 1 time timeout 141 If the discrepancy time is active gt 0 the discrepancy timer is restarted on the first signal change resulting in a discrepant status If the discrepancy time is inactive 0 the discrepancy timer does not start i e a timeout will never occur 2 Unchanged Last status is preserved 3 If the correct sequence has been observed For the change between the different states of the dual channel evaluation the following rules apply A dual channel evaluation can only change to Active Enable output changes from Low to High if e since the last Active status at least once the status was Inactive i e it is not possible to switch from Active to Discrepant and back to Active and e the discrepancy time has not elapsed or the discrepancy time is deactivated and A discrepancy error timeout is reset if the Active status has been reached i e the Enable output changes to High When defining values for the discrepancy time the following must be observed The discrepancy time e must be greater than the logic execution time e has a tolerance of 10 ms in addition to the logic execution time The logic execution time depends on the number and type of function blocks used and is sh
305. o be running or has been stopped Typically this is the Enable output of a subsequent Press setup or Press single stroke function block Do not connect any physical input signals to the Drive released input Connect the signal that controls the physical output for the press drive using a jump address or a CPU marker e Ifajump address is used make sure that this signal is a loop back This is indicated by a clock icon on the destination tag of the jump address To this purpose connect the outputs of this function block to the following function blocks before you connect the jump address to the Drive released input This applies especially if all connections to the following function blocks are also realized using jump addresses e Ifa CPU marker is used then a Routing function block must be used to split the signal to the physical output for the press drive and to the CPU marker output Disable monitoring Using this optional input it is possible to deactivate the monitoring functionality under certain conditions in order to prevent the function block to go into an error state This can be useful for certain operating modes e g during the setup of the machine or when the press moves backwards If the Disable monitoring input is High the Enable output of the Universal press contact function block is Low and the monitoring of the cam signal sequence and overrun is inhibited provided there is no error pending The error output states are not
306. o expand an element gt Place the element e g an interlock in the Parking area gt Right click the element to open the context menu gt Select the Expand command The element in the Parking area is replaced by its sub elements which can be treated like individual elements 36 Chapter 5 Figure 13 Element settings window for an ES21 emergency stop button 37 The graphical user interface 5 5 6 Parameterization of connected elements Input and output elements can be parameterized when they are located in the Parking area or in the Configuration area Depending on the type of element you can assign a tag name identifying name for the element set evaluation parameters for the element for example the discrepancy time ON OFF or OFF ON filter connection to a test output test pulses enabled disabled etc How to parameterize a connected element gt Double click on the element or right click an element in the Parking area or in the Configuration area and select Edit from the context menu The Element settings window is opened Element settines E Stop ES21 Settings Summary Dual channel Tag name Nr of devices 1 s v Discrepancy time Value 3000 ms ON OFF filter reaction time extended by 8 ms OFF ON filter reaction time extended by 8 ms Element is connected to test output Tag name gt Enter a Tag name for the
307. oad input have priority over the Up input and the Down input Up Down Rese Reload Counter Counter Overflown Underflow n to zero valuen valuen AEI 0 Y Y 1 0 0 Y 1 a Heg 0 Y Overflow 1 0 value 0 1 or ee ie tT 0 0 Overflow Overflow 4 0 if value value AESP 0 0 Y Y 1 0 0 rae lee 0 0 Y Y 1 0 0 1 oong 0 0 Y 0 Y 0 0 1 t T 0 0 Y Y 0 0 x x 1 0 Y Resetito 0 0 zero 0 1 Y Reload 0 0 1 1 y Reset to 0 0 zero 138 Chapter 9 Figure 112 Function block diagram for the Fast shut off and Fast shut off with bypass function blocks Note Figure 113 Fast shut off example Note 139 Logic programming Function blocks 9 7 12 Fast shut off and Fast shut off with bypass Function block diagram General description The Fast shut off and Fast shut off with bypass function block is used to minimize the response time of a safety switching path within the MELSEC WS safety controller To use this block both the input and output for the switching path must be connected to the same safety I O module i e WS0 XTIO This is necessary because the Fast shut off function block generates a direct switch off at the safety I O module resulting in a shorter switch off time which is independent of the logic execution time For the Fast shut off function block the consequence of this is that logic between the Fast shut off input and the Fast shut off output can
308. ock can be used to this purpose To this purpose the two input signals have to be configured as single channel signals and applied to the inputs of the function block Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Inputs Dual channel equivalent Discrepancy time 0 disabled 10 to 500 ms in 10 ms steps If enabled the value has to be greater than the logic execution time e 2 Enable output and Discrepancy error output Number of outputs e 1 Enable output Use fault present e With e Without 194 Chapter 9 Figure 182 Function block diagram for the Safety gate monitoring function block Table 86 Parameters of the Safety gate monitoring function block 195 Logic programming Function blocks 9 9 7 Safety gate monitoring Function block diagram Input 1A gj Input 18 gi Input 2A a Input 2B g Function test request gi General description The function block can be used for the evaluation of dual channel switches 1 pair or 2 pairs can be selected For the behaviour of the dual channel evaluation see Section 9 9 2 and Section 9 9 3 Additionally the function block allows an optional function test monitoring Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Inputs e Single channel e Dual channel equivalent 1 pair e Dual channel complementary 1 pair e Dual channel equivalent 2 pairs e Dual channel complementary 2 pairs
309. ode Lock LDL Inch forward Inch backward Reset C Enable Forward active Backward active Startup active j i Signal Impulse H Signal Timpulse H 7 time time H itime itime g Warning iWaiting Release H Waiting Release i time time y time time Figure 173 Sequence timing diagram for the Start warning Release start sequence function block in Locked Control mode Lock Stop Inch forward Inch backward Reset Enable l H Forward active Backward active Startup active j Signal Impulse Signal Impulse Signal Impulse time time time time i itime time Warning Waiting Release Waiting Release jj Waiting Release Release time time time time time time time Note The start sequence is started by a rising edge of the Inch forward input e Arising edge at the Inch backward input causes a restart of the waiting time during the start sequence e Arising edge at the Inch backward input causes a stop of the inch mode if the Inch forward input is High 186 Chapter 9 Figure 174 Note Example for single channel evaluation 187 Note Logic programming Function blocks 9 9 Function blocks for dual channel evaluation The MELSEC WS safety controller supports applications up to SIL3 in accordance with IEC 62061 and Performance Level PL e in accordance with EN ISO 13849 1 Possible sources for function block inputs are
310. odule User s Manual 13JZ33 F A WS CC U E Safety Controller CC Link Interface Module User s Manual 130245 Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool Operating SW1DNN WSOADR B O E Manual 13JU67 WS CPU U HW E Safety Controller CPU Module User s Manual Hardware 13JZ91 Safety Controller Safety I O Module User s Manual WS IO U HW E Hardware 13JZ92 Safety Controller Safety Relay Output Module User s Manual WS SR U HW E Hardware 13JZ93 Safety Controller Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual WS ET U HW E Hardware 13JZ95 Safety Controller CC Link Interface Module User s Manual WS CC U HW Hardware 13J209 1 2 Target group These user s manuals are addressed to the planning engineers designers and operators of systems which are to be protected by a MELSEC WS safety controller They also are addressed to people who integrate the MELSEC WS safety controller into a machine commission it initially or who are in charge of servicing and maintaining the unit These user s manuals do not provide instructions for operating the machine or system in which a MELSEC WS safety controller is integrated Information of this kind will be found in the operating instructions for the machine or system Note About this document Chapter 1 1 3 Function and structure of this manual This manual instructs the technical personnel of the machine manufacturer or machine operator in the software configuration operation and diagnos
311. odules can be used in a Flexi Line system It is not possible to connect any other CPU modules WS0 CPUO0 WS0 CPU1 A uniform process image is defined for the entire Flexi Line system Each byte of this process image is either global i e in the entire system or local i e only for the related station and its neighboring stations Each Flexi Line station communicates with its neighboring stations via this process image The topology permits communication without addressing Flexi Line overview Features e Reliable connection of up to 32 MELSEC WS stations via the Flexi Line interface e Topology without addressing In case of a change in the order of the stations it is sufficient to confirm the new arrangement using a Teach pushbutton e The EFI interface remains available without limitation Itis possible to connect EFl compatible sensors It is possible to connect a Flexi Link system A global process image is defined for all stations e Within the process image global or local bytes can be defined e The process image can contain up to 12 bytes or 96 bits The maximum cable length between 2 stations is 1000 meters The possible total length of a system with 32 stations is therefore 31 kilometers 8 1 1 System requirements and restrictions for Flexi Line For Flexi Line the following system requirements must be met as a minimum System component Version Hardware WS0 CPU3 Software Setting and Monitoring Too
312. ogic programming Function blocks 9 7 5 XNOR exclusive NOR Function block diagram Input i g Input g General description The output is High only if both inputs are equivalent have the same value both inputs High or both inputs Low Truth table The following applies for the truth table in this section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High Truth table for XNOR evaluation Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 o o ia 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 9 7 6 Multiple release Function block diagram General description Using the multiple release function block an AND operator can be applied to up to 7 inputs along with the Release input 7 times AND Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Function block parameters Table 31 Parameters for the multiple release function block Parameter Possible values Number of inputs 4107 o without Release input Invert input x Each input of this function block can be inverted see section 9 5 2 Invert Release Truth table For the truth table identified in this section the following applies e 0 means logic low e 1 means logic high Table 32 Truth table for the multiple release function block Release Output X 0 0 1 Input x 9 7 7 RS Flip Flop Function block diagram Figure 105 Function block diagram for the
313. on jump address takes the same value High or Low as the corresponding source jump address without delay provided that it is not a loop back In this way jump addresses differ from CPU markers Take logic loop backs into account A logic loop back is created if a function block input is connected to a destination jump address and the related source jump address is connected to an output of the same function block or to an output of another function block that has a higher function block index the function block index is displayed at the top of each function block and shows the function block s position in the logic execution sequence In this case the logic result from the current logic cycle is only available at the destination jump address in the following logic cycle i e with a delay of the logic execution time If a jump address causes a loop back this is indicated automatically by an additional clock symbol shown on the destination jump address icon The resulting delay is equal to the execution time and must be considered for the response time calculation and for the functionality E Stop E521 XTIO 1 5 al Direct jump 2 Direct jump Loop back Pi Oy Loop back How to use a jump address gt First add a source jump address per drag amp drop to your project A dialog opens where you must enter a label for the new source jump address Each source jump address label must be unique an
314. on and detailed information on the identification and rectification of errors Use the operating manual in particular for the configuration commissioning and operation of MELSEC WS safety controllers e MELSEC WS network interface modules and their functions are described in detail in the user s manuals for each network interface module The network interface module interface manuals are designed to address the technical personnel of the machine manufacturer or the machine operator in regards to safe mounting electrical installation commissioning as well as on maintenance of the MELSEC WS network interface modules The network interface module user s manuals also contain important information on the configuration of the network interface module using the software Setting and Monitoring Tool on the exchange of data with networks as well as information on the status the planning and the related mapping e The user s manuals hardware are included with each MELSEC WS module They provide basic technical specifications on the modules and contain simple mounting instructions Use the user s manuals hardware when mounting the MELSEC WS safety controller 16 Chapter 1 Table 1 Overview of the MELSEC WS manuals 17 About this document The following shows the relevant manuals Title Number WS CPU U E Safety Controller User s Manual 13JZ32 A WS ET U E Safety Controller Ethernet Interface M
315. on block for safety purposes without BDC and Overrun cam If this function block is used without the BDC and Overrun cam inputs then it must be used for automation control only i e not for safety functionality Otherwise the operator of the press will be in danger 232 Chapter 9 Table 108 Parameters of the Universal press contact function block A ATTENTION 233 Logic programming Function blocks Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Overrun cam input e With e Without BDC input e With e Without Number of BDC signals per cycle e 1 e g eccentric press e 0 2 e g hydraulic press Min reset pulse time e 100 ms e 350 ms Reset input e With e Without Disable monitoring input e With e Without Use fault present e With e Without Enable output The Enable output is used to stop the press and is connected to another complementary press function block e g Press setup or Press single stroke If no error was detected the Enable output is High If any error in the contact signal sequence is detected the Enable output changes to Low the corresponding error output changes to High and the Reset required output changes to High A valid reset sequence at the Reset input is then required The Enable output also changes to Low if Monitoring gets disabled Reset input A valid reset sequence at the Reset input is a Low High Low transition with a minimum pulse dura
316. on contains also a network module this button can be found in the Network module menu 100 Chapter 7 Figure 77 Flexi Link station A view Note 101 Flexi Link i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New Project 17 Tes a 2 3 fo aoaceaao ngagogog ngaonang pgaoaana Default values for process image The cho val Il be d when the station has been suspended by teaching process is is indicated by the state k B n05 Global E Stop A Global Reset A Si If the station is removed during operation a process image with all values 0 will be used except for the IO erro by the state Station X missing AAAA Authorized client 23Offline Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified The toolbar The toolbar contains icons for the following actions from left to right e Reset to default Sets the tag names and configured default settings for all bits and bytes to the default values e Clear selected byte Deletes all tag names for the selected byte and its bits and sets the default value for all bits of this byte to Low e Undo the last action e Redo the last action How to edit the tag names gt Click on a byte in the EFI1 or EFI2 area to display its bits in the lower half of the window gt Change the displayed tag names as desired The bits will appear in the logic editor in the Outputs tab wit
317. onsists of the following sub windows e Menu bar with the menus Project Device Extras Toolbar with icons for rapid access to menus that are often used e Tabs for switching between the Hardware configuration Logic editor Network module 13 if the project contains at least one network module Report Diagnostics and Data Recorder view Specific toolbar for the logic editor with the following functions Add Delete Rename page Print current page Zoom Copy Cut Paste Delete elements Undo Redo last action Open dialog to edit logic result markers Show Hide grid Show grid of lines dots Show function block I O description Search function block Start simulation mode and Start forcing mode Selection windows for Function block Inputs Outputs and Diagnostic inputs FB preview window on the bottom left for displaying the important system resources such as the number of used available function blocks or the current logic execution time cycle time of the logic When the cursor is moved over a function block in the worksheet additional information on this function block is displayed in the FB preview window Worksheets Pages for creating the logic I O summary page and I O matrix that can be selected alternatively by using tabs 52 Chapter 5 53 Exercise Note The graphical user interface 5 6 1 Exercise for using the logic editor gt In the Hardware configuration view combine a CPU module at least one WS0 XTIO mod
318. or Disconnect button in the menu bar for the Flexi Link system overview will connect to or disconnect from the entire Flexi Link system when you click Connect there you will be asked which stations you want to connect to e Itis not possible to set all stations into the Run state or to stop them all simultaneously in the Flexi Link system overview You need to switch to the station view for each station and to log in individually to each station as Administrator with the password for this station in order to run it or to verify the configuration 95 Figure 71 Flexi Link process image Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 7 4 2 Flexi Link system Process image The Flexi Link process image allows you to monitor the information that is exchanged between the Flexi Link stations In the left area of the screen the hardware configuration for each station is displayed on the right side the bits for EFl1 and EFI2 if used are displayed with their tag names Bits that are currently High in the process image are highlighted green Fes Link D EFL 26600 Bea sled moa Wa moze mias moas mias moni miat moss besa moaz Reed Aeons mos Fesoved i030 essed Bea Ayla ios dea moze mias moas mias moni piat moss miesa moa Rested e Ifa station is not in the Run state its process image will be set to Low and its I O error status bits will be set to High see Section 5 6 5 e Double c
319. or Fast shut off Therefore the hardware output may remain Low although the inputs are forced High in the logic because the Fast shut off on the WSO XTIO is controlled directly via the physical inputs Forcing has no effect on inputs whose values are not being controlled by the logic program but are transferred directly to a programmable controller via a network module e Force mode always applies to the complete project This means for logic programs using more than one page in the logic editor that a forced input will be set to the same value on each page of the logic editor where it is used not only on the currently displayed page e If forcing an input in a logic program causes more than 16 outputs to switch at the same time then some of these outputs will be switched with a delay of one or more logic cycles due to the limited transmission capacity of the RS 232 or USB interface The logic execution time depends on the size of your logic program It is calculated automatically in the logic editor and is displayed in the top right corner of the FB preview window e Unlike the simulation mode the force mode allows you to use the EDM or Valve monitoring if corresponding devices are connected that will send the required feedback signal when the outputs are activated e When using a network module please note that the process image of the network modules always reflects the actual physical value of the inputs and outputs of the connected d
320. or I g Operator 2 g Operator 3 Release 1 g Release 2 g Cycle reguest g General description The Multi operator function block is used to monitor simultaneous operation of up to three two hand controls For example several two hand controls or foot switches can be necessary in a press application with more than one operator in order to trigger the downward movement of the press Typically each Operator input is connected to a Two hand control function block Release inputs e g safety light curtains can be connected optionally in order to ensure that the assigned devices are High before the Enable output can become High Resetting and restarting need to be handled independently of this function block The Cycle request input can be used to enforce that each connected two hand control is released at least once before another start is possible Typically this input is connected to a signal that generates a pulse with each machine cycle In this way it can be prevented that one or more of the two hand controls remain actuated permanently The Operator inputs and the Release inputs must be pre evaluated signals e Connect only safe pre evaluated signals to the Operator inputs e g the Enable output of a Two hand control type IIIA or Two hand control type IIIC function block A safety relevant evaluation of the inputs of a two hand control has to be effected either by another function block e g Two hand control or Ligh
321. or input B outputs indicate which input has not followed in the expected time A discrepancy error time out is reset once the active state has been achieved i e a correct sequence has been followed and as a result the Release output changes to high Sequence timing diagrams For the change between the individual states of the tolerant dual channel monitor the following rules apply The tolerant dual channel monitor can only transfer to active Release output changes from low to high if the following criteria are met e both inputs have each switched off once since the last active state and e the discrepancy time has not elapsed or the discrepancy time monitoring for switching on is deactivated This means that it is not possible to change from active to discrepant and back again if only one input has switched off The sequence timing diagrams shown in this section relate to the equivalent input mode For the complementary input mode input B is to be considered inverted Input A t H H i t Status Enable output t Figure 188 Sequence timing diagram for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block resetting errors Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Fault present and resetting errors The Fault present output is a combined error output and changes to high if one of the following cases occurs e The discrepancy time on switching on is activated and has elapsed or
322. or signals must be greater than the logic execution time Otherwise there is a risk that an increased frequency shorter period duration will not be detected because all signal changes are not measured Limits for reliably valid signal The limits for the average period duration that a signal must meet to be evaluated as a valid signal are tighter than the limits selected with the parameters The effective tighter limits are always the next multiple of the logic execution time The average period duration means here that although the individual periods of the signal may have outliers jitter these outliers must be compensated over several periods Limits for reliably invalid signal The limit for the average period duration that a signal must exceed to be evaluated as an invalid signal corresponds to the tolerance for the related parameters On this subject see chapter 9 6 Essentially this means that a static low or high is detected as an invalid signal at the latest after max period duration logic execution time 10 ms The response time of the signal path used is increased by this amount If the average period duration of the signal is greater than the limit for a reliably valid signal but lower than the limit for an reliably invalid signal then it can take several periods until the deviation has accumulated adequately such that an invalid signal is then evaluated Number of periods logic execution time 10 ms real average
323. ort buttons you can import and export a configuration including the tag names used as a CSV file comma separated values This allows you to import and use tag names you have assigned in the MELSEC WS project in the Programmable controller program and vice versa If you import a configuration all previously made changes that have not been saved will be lost You can not undo this action The Import button is only available for the RS 232 to MELSEC WS routing configuration Figure 26 The logic editor The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 6 Logic editor view The Setting and Monitoring Tool includes a graphical Logic editor The function logic is program med by using logic and application specific function blocks The inputs function blocks and outputs are positioned on a worksheet and are connected correspondingly As soon as a MELSEC WS CPU module is located in the Configuration area the Logic editor can be accessed via the tab of the same name Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project cru Status EFI 1 Status EFI 2 Verity status Statico static 1 First logic cycle GETHI13 xmon xto CPU marker YO matrix InfOut summary page_ Page 1 Inputs Function block E gt Outputs FB preview i TE Machine Operator offline Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified The Logic editor window c
324. ot counted as a single function block but rather the total number of blocks used within it How to create a grouped function block gt Select the function blocks which are to be grouped gt Right click on one of the selected function blocks to call up the context menu 258 Chapter 9 Figure 243 Edit Function Block Details dialog for the Grouped function block Note Figure 244 Select Icon dialog for the Grouped function block Figure 245 New grouped function block on the worksheet 259 Logic programming Function blocks gt Click on Group The Edit Function Block Details dialog opens Edit function block details Function Block Name Machine 1 lect Function Block Icon gt Enter a name for the new grouped function block Do not enter the same name used in any existing grouped function block for the new grouped function block gt If you want to assign another icon to the new grouped function block click on Select to open the Select Icon dialog You can choose the icon from a fixed library Select Icon a Cancel gt Select the desired icon and click OK gt Back in the Edit Function Block Details dialog click OK to confirm your changes and to leave the dialog The selected function blocks will be reduced to a single grouped function block on the worksheet for the main program eomxrows
325. ough beam photoelectric switches and photoelectric reflex switches e Avoid mutual interference of the sensors Increase the protection against manipulation and the safety level by using the following configurable functions Length of material in conveyor direction Set total muting time s concurrency monitoring monitoring of the total muting time muting end via ESPE e Information on wiring can be found in Section 9 10 3 Sequence timing diagram The function block requires that a valid muting sequence takes place Figure 210 shows an example of a valid muting sequence based on the basic parameter setting for this function block Muting sensor A1 th Muting sensor A2 es a es il ener oes OSSDs of the safety sensor l Enable Muting error Muting status ee ee Table 106 Overview of the press contact monitoring function blocks Figure 211 Function block diagram for the Eccentric press contact function block Logic programming Function blocks 9 11 9 11 1 Overview and general description Chapter 9 Function blocks for press contact monitoring For press applications there are two complementary types of function blocks offered This section describes the contact monitoring function blocks which provide signals for the press cycle control function blocks There are two different function blocks for press contact monitoring which can be used to monitor the correct cam sig
326. owing rules TDC Overrun cam There must be exactly one Overrun cam pulse per cycle The rising edge of the Overrun cam input Low High transition must occur before the falling edge of the TDC input The falling edge of the Overrun cam input High Low transition must occur after the rising edge of the TDC input This means that at any time at least one of both inputs must be High BDC monitoring If BDC is enabled and Overrun cam is disabled the BDC input signals must accord with Figure 222 and the following rules 2 Low TDC BDC High 1 High 1 The beginning of the BDC Low High transition must be close to 180 and has to occur while the TDC input is High 2 The end of the BDC High Low transition has to occur before the rising edge Low High transition of the TDC input In other words BDC must be Low when a Low High transition at the TDC input occurs 236 Chapter 9 Figure 223 Contact monitoring with the Universal press contact function block with BDC enabled 237 Logic programming Function blocks BDC and Overrun cam monitoring If BDC and Overrun cam are enabled the BDC input signals must accord with Figure 223 and the following rules 2 Low 1 High amp High Low before 1 The beginning of the BDC Low High transition must be close to 180 and
327. own in the Setting and Monitoring Tool in the logic editor on the FB info tab and also in the report Figure 176 Sequence timing diagram for the Emergency stop function block Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 e If signals from tested sensors are connected to WSO XTDI or WSO XTIO modules the discrepancy time should be at least the set Test gap ms plus the Max off on delay ms because a signal change at the module input can be delayed for this time Both values are displayed in the Setting and Monitoring Tool report for the used test output e lf both inputs of a pair are connected to the same input signal the evaluation corresponds to the single channel evaluation i e no equivalence check or antivalence check and no discrepancy time monitoring is carried out Sequence timing diagram Emergency stop function block Dual channel equivalent logic Input A ff a Input B TTT Lt ts Enable output l j Discrepancy error a Le output Fault present a A E T a lt Stop gt Run T gt Tpisc T lt TDisc TDisc Discrepancy time 9 9 3 Double dual channel evaluation 2 pair synchronization evaluation and synchronization time Note This section relates to the Safety gate monitoring and Two hand control type IIIC Figure 177 Double dual channel evaluation with the Safety gate monitoring function block function blocks Input 1A g input 1B z Input 2A g Input 2B z
328. p monitoring function allows to filter out brief faults without muting being interrupted When Sensor signal gap monitoring is enabled a Low signal from a muting sensor input is ignored for the duration of the set value for Sensor signal gap monitoring The function block continues to interpret this signal as an uninterrupted High as long as only one sensor per pair A1 A2 or B1 B2 has a signal gap If a signal gap has been detected at a sensor the simultaneous occurrence of a further signal gap at the other sensor of the sensor pair results in the termination of muting Table 93 Requirements for sequence monitoring Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Sequence monitoring Sequence monitoring is used to define a special mandatory sequence in which the muting sensors have to be High Table 93 shows the valid sequence for muting sensor input signals This parameter is only available for configurations with four muting sensors for example for parallel muting or sequential muting Requirement for the muting sensor signal inputs for Direction detection gies sequence monitoring Disabled A1 before A2 before B1 before B2 or B2 before B1 before A2 before A1 Forward A1 before A2 before B1 before B2 Backward B2 before B1 before A2 before A1 This parameter depends on the function block Deviations from the sequence shown above result in a muting error indicated by the Muting error output In order to avoid
329. partial application Note Note The graphical user interface Chapter 5 The configuration of any connected SICK EFI compatible devices is not included in the exported partial application Therefore these devices have to be reconfigured How to exchange a safety I O module in a project gt Load the project with the safety I O module you want to exchange gt Add the desired new safety I O module to the hardware configuration gt Move the connected elements from the old module to the new module This way the logic connections will be preserved gt Delete the old module e This method does not work for elements that are used in combination with a Fast shut off function block because these elements can not be moved to another module anymore e This method does not work either for grouped elements like e g operating mode selector switches and switches with interlock 46 Chapter 5 A ATTENTION Figure 21 Activating RS 232 routing 47 The graphical user interface 5 5 10 RS 232 routing You can access the input and output data on the MELSEC WS safety controller via the RS 232 interface on the CPU This feature makes possible e g communication between the MELSEC WS safety controller and a Programmable controller connected without using a network interface module or the connection of an HMI Do not use the RS 232 interface for safety related applications The communication protocol used for the RS 232 interfa
330. perable and running even if one or more stations in the system are missing i e switched off Teaching the missing station or stations will suspend them such that the other stations will simulate their existence Each suspended station will be treated as if it were online and running The Flexi Link process image will contain the values that have been configured as default values for this station see Section 7 4 5 This can be useful e g while setting up a system or for maintenance purposes If the Teach function is active on any station and this station is connected to the system and in the Run state it will trigger the complete system to perform a network scan and to treat all missing stations as suspended l e the system will function as if these stations were still online and use their default process images Before you use the Teach function check whether a dangerous state can occur If the Teach function is used the safety outputs on any of the still active stations may be High gt Analyze your application and check whether additional safety measures have to be implemented if the Teach function is enabled gt Consider how to handle the disconnected machine modules Point out that the control parts and sensors have no effect to the previously connected machine modules e g install out of order signs at E stops gt The teach function must be considered as a configuration process Therefore the teach function nee
331. perating a control device the operator must have full visual command of the hazardous area The muting sensors have to be located in such a way that the hazardous area can only then be accessed after an intervention in the protective field if the dangerous state has been terminated before One condition here is that the required safety distances defined in EN ISO 13855 are observed At least two muting signals that are independent of each other are required Muting may only be activated for the period in which the object that triggered the muting condition blocks access to the hazardous area The area between the ESPE and the muting sensors must be protected against standing behind For Parallel muting between ESPE and sensors A1 A2 and between ESPE and sensors B1 B2 see Figure 200 For Sequential muting between ESPE and sensor A2 and between ESPE and sensor B1 see Figure 203 For Cross muting between ESPE and sensor A1 and between ESPE and sensor A2 see Figure 206 Muting has to be carried out automatically but may not depend on a single electrical signal The material to be transported has to be detected along the entire length meaning that an interruption of the output signals may not occur see Suppression of sensor signal gaps Muting must be triggered by at least two independently wired signals e g by muting sensors and may not depend completely on software signals e g from a programmable controller The
332. plementing a safety relevant functional logic ensure that the regulations of the national and international rules and standards are observed in particular the controlling strategies and the measures for risk minimisation that are mandatory for your application 20 Chapter 2 21 Note On safety 2 3 General protective notes and protective measures Observe the protective notes and measures Please observe the following items in order to ensure proper use of the MELSEC WS safety controller e When mounting installing and using the MELSEC WS safety controller observe the standards and directives applicable in your country e The national and international rules and regulations apply to the installation and use as well as commissioning and periodic technical inspection of the MELSEC WS safety controller in particular Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Provision and Use of Work Equipment Directive 2009 104 EC and the supplementary Directive 35 63 EC Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Work safety regulations and safety rules e Manufacturers and owners of the machine on which a MELSEC WS safety controller is used are responsible for obtaining and observing all applicable safety regulations and rules Version compatibility and features Table 2 Required firmware and software versions Version compatibility and features Chapter 3 For the MELSEC WS series several firmware
333. pstroke muting is enabled i e if the Max Up Stroke muting time is greater than 0 the PSDI input of the function block is bypassed if the Upstroke input is High and the Top input remains Low Connect the Upstroke input only with the Upstroke output of an Eccentric press contact or a Universal press contact function block Restart input If Restart interlock has been set to Without a Restart signal is not required in order to restart the press after the Enable output has changed to Low If Restart interlock has been set to Always and the Enable output changes to Low the Enable output can only be reset after a valid restart sequence with a Low High Low transition minimum 100 ms or 350 ms shorter pulses and pulses longer than 30 s will be ignored has been carried out The only exception to this rule is formed by the cycle beginning In this case the Restart interlock parameter does not have any effect on the function block If Restart interlock has been set to Always and the Max Up Stroke muting time has been configured to 0 s a Low signal at the PSDI input during the runup sets the Enable output immediately to Low Figure 239 Sequence timing diagram when the PSDI input is Low Upstroke muting is inactive and Restart interlock is set to Always Figure 240 Sequence timing diagram when the PSDI input is Low Max Up Stroke muting time gt 0 and Restart interlock is set to Deactivation on upstroke only for PSDI
334. quence the start sequence is aborted and another start sequence can only be initiated after the Lock input has changed to High again This input can be used for safety stops If inch mode is active a falling edge at the Lock input will stop inch mode and set the function block back into Waiting for start mode Stop input A start sequence can only be initiated if the Stop input is High If the Stop input changes to Low during a start sequence the start sequence is aborted and another start sequence can only be initiated after the Stop input has changed to High again This input can be used for safety stops If inch mode is active a falling edge at the Stop input will stop inch mode and set the function block back into Waiting for start mode Inch forward Inch backward If a rising edge transition from Low to High is detected on the Inch forward or on the Inch backward input while the other input remains Low the start sequence will begin A rising edge on both inputs or a rising edge on one of these inputs while the other input is High is considered an invalid input state If this occurs during a start sequence waiting time or release time running these rising edges have no effect If this occurs during inch mode the inch mode will be stopped and the release time starts again 184 Chapter 9 Figure 171 Logic example for a combination of two Start warning function blocks 185 Logic programming Function blocks Reset
335. r and also to some extent in the logic editor and in the hardware configuration dialog box e g for expansion modules In the Tag names area of the MELSEC WS to RS 232 configuration dialog it is not possible to edit the tag names Configuration of the output data RS 232 to MELSEC WS gt Click the RS 232 to MELSEC WS button on the left The following dialog will be displayed Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 7 0 test lt unsaved gt ee t fa Project Device Extras H BLA com settings A Connect 73 disconnect Pyg transfer Hey upload S B Hardware configuration Logic editor kt Network Modules 3 Report 2 Diagnostics 3 gt Data Recorder CPU3 Module m GB B Reset to default Cearall 19 MELSEC WS to R5232 1 Bytet oo BEE00880 amp si oo AGACA E oo 2080an oo BZGEG8880 RS232 to MELSEC WS p lt a RS232 0 7 2 RS232 06 RS232 0 5 RS232 0 4 RS232 03 RS232 0 2 RS232 0 1 RS232 0 0 Goaeqoooags ITIITI Operator 33 Offline A Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is not verified Basically this dialog is divided into two areas RS 232 data 1 and Tag names 2 The RS 232 data area shows the current configuration of the output data 50 Chapter 5 Figure 25 Tag names for the RS 232 output data in the logic editor Note 51 The graphical user interface The Tag names area shows the tag names associated to the byte selected in the R
336. ration of the MELSEC WS module and of the logic program in order to ensure that these behave in accordance with your risk avoidance strategy Take additional safety measures if the safe value may lead to a dangerous condition The safe value of process data and outputs is Low which is applied if an error is detected If the safe value signal Low may lead to a dangerous condition in the application additional measures must be taken e g evaluation of the status of the process data and switching off the related output signals if the status evaluation detects an error This needs especially to be considered for inputs with edge detections Take unexpected rising or falling edges into account Special attention is required for applications where an unexpected rising or falling edge at an input with edge detection may lead to a dangerous situation An error on an input can generate such edges e g network or EFI communication interruption cable interruption at digital input short circuit at digital input connected to test output The safe value is applied until the error reset condition is fulfilled Due to this the related signal can behave as follows e It changes temporarily to High instead of remaining Low rising edge and falling edge i e transition from Low to High to Low or e it changes temporarily to Low instead of remaining High as under faultless condition falling edge and rising edge i e transition from High to Low to
337. ration of the pulse at the Reload input Valid values are 100 ms and 350 ms If the pulse duration is shorter than the configured minimum pulse time or longer than 30 s the pulse is ignored Ensure that the transitions of the signals for resetting or reloading value fulfill the requirements In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Overflow limit and Counter reset The Counter reset parameter determines what happens when the counter value reaches the Overflow limit If this parameter is configured to Automatic and the internal counter equals the Overflow limit the Overflow output becomes High for the duration of the logic execution time The value of the internal counter is subsequently reset to zero If the Counter reset parameter is configured to Manual and the Overflow limit has been reached the Overflow output is set to High and remains High until the counter value changes again either by counting downward by a valid Reset to zero pulse sequence or by a valid pulse sequence at the Reload input if the start value is smaller than the ov
338. rator amp L ff Lef L_ Operator2 ff Lf Lf L Operator3 T 6 gt G J Lf L_ Release E Y L Cycle rues fe so Se S a configured as a falling edge Enable output l Enable remains Low because Operator 2 has not yet performed Falling edge detected on the a cycle e g High Low High Cycle request input after the last Cycle request Figure 195 Sequence timing diagram for the Multi operator function block 205 Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 10 Function blocks for Parallel muting Sequential muting and Cross muting 9 10 1 Overview and general description Muting is the automatic temporary suppression of safety oriented area monitoring using electro sensitive protective equipment ESPE while certain objects e g pallets with material are moved into the hazardous area Muting sensors monitor the presence of the material while it is being transported Careful selection of the type and layout of the sensors makes it possible to differentiate between objects and persons In combination with the muting sensors and the ESPE the transported object generates an exactly defined signal sequence while it is moved through the hazardous area The muting sensors have to ensure that all dangers are excluded when a person enters an area protected by the ESPE i e any dangerous state has to be terminated immediately It has to be impossible for a person to generate the same signa
339. rcuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Safety relevant signals have to conform to standards and regulations to be applied Always take the valid national regional and local regulations and standards into consideration for your application Type C standards such as EN 692 and EN 693 contain requirements how safety relevant signals have to be used For example the restart signal may have to be protected by suitable means in case of overrun errors e g by a key switch or in a closed control cabinet If the Reset input is disabled an error can be reset only by stopping the logic execution e g by a power cycle or by changing the system state from the Run state to the Stop state and back to the Run state with the Setting and Monitoring Tool 227 Figure 212 Press cycle for the Eccentric press contact function block without Dynamic cam Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Top output and Upstroke output The Top output is typically used to stop the press and is connected to another complementary press function block e g Press setup or Press single stroke The Upstroke output is typically connected to another complementary press function block e g Press single stroke or Press Setup Additionally it can be used to initiate upstroke muting This function block sets the Upstroke output and the Top output based on value changes of the cam inputs If the fun
340. rent test sources for the cam signals the TDC BDC and Overrun cam inputs need to be connected to different WS0 XTDI or WSO XTIO modules Note One WSO XTDI has 2 test sources only even if it has eight test output terminals 238 Chapter 9 Figure 225 Overrun monitoring with the Universal press contact function block Note 239 Logic programming Function blocks Overrun monitoring If the Overrun cam input is enabled the Universal press contact function block monitors the overrunning of the press i e it checks whether the Overrun cam cam is left although the press is expected to have stopped The Drive released input signal must then accord with Figure 225 and the following rule Top output Lae Pea s 3 a Y Low gt High Drive released or Overrun cam a i High mm High Don t care At the Drive released input there has to be either a Low to High transition between the Low High transition of the Top output and the end of Overrun cam High Low transition or the Drive released input has to be High at the end of the Overrun cam High Low transition If none of these two conditions is fulfilled the Enable output becomes Low and the Overrun error output becomes High The Drive released input must be connected to the signal that controls the physical output of the press drive so that the function block can determine whether the press is currently supposed t
341. rer a a a Input 3A ml SEEN Le S eee ee Input 3B i leh SONEA EET PR Cascade input N NAM T _ Output 1A ne eee VE EEE S Output 1B S an ee ee eee Output 2A eae eee ee ee Output 2B eae Soe SAN meses aN mez Output 3A a aan es ee See Output se oe ees acre ara Cascade output I ee ee A SAREES UE OED see The Cascade input receives signals from another Switch synchronization function block Figure 156 Function block diagram for the Error output combination function block Table 74 Parameters of the Error output combination function block Figure 157 Logic example for the Error output combination function block Table 75 Truth table for Error output combination Logic programming Function blocks 9 8 11 Error output combination Function block diagram Input I gj input 1B z Input 2A gj Input 2B zj Input 3A gj Input 3B zj Erorinput 1 a Eror input 2 g General description Chapter 9 The Error output combination function block was designed to improve the integration of SICK safety scanners e g S3000 It can be used to set the outputs to predefined values under certain conditions e g in order to output a dedicated error output combination in case of an antivalence error of the Switch synchronization function block Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of error inputs 1 error input e 2 error inputs Number of inputs or Numb
342. result in inconsistencies of the configuration and the diagnostics as well as in operational errors gt Click on the Connect button The Setting and Monitoring Tool will try to connect to your MELSEC WS safety controller using the currently activated connection profile If a connection is established successfully the Setting and Monitoring Tool goes into online mode and you can perform the following activities depending on your user level e Log in see Section 6 4 e Transfer the configuration to the device upload it from the device or verify the configuration see Chapter 11 e Run or stop the CPU module see Section 12 1 e Start the force mode see Section 9 14 76 Chapter 6 Table 12 User level authorisations 77 A ATTENTION Note Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller 6 4 User levels in the Setting and Monitoring Tool If the Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to the devices in a project i e is in online mode you can switch to the user levels of the Setting and Monitoring Tool These user levels have different authorisations for the transfer of configurations to the devices User level Password Authorisation Operator None May create and edit configurations offline Cannot connect to the system diagnostics only Cannot transfer any configuration Cannot verify a configuration Maintenance Default None May create and edit configurations offline i e no login possib
343. rocess has been finished without an antivalence error The behaviour of the outputs 1A to 3B however is independent of the result of the antivalence check In order to obtain a defined output value combination in case of an antivalence error the Error output combination function block can be used see Chapter 9 8 11 Behaviour on startup On transition from the Stop state to the Run state the outputs will be set immediately according to the input values and the antivalence check will be executed if configured In this case the function block does not wait for the Hold time for outputs to expire 170 Chapter 9 Figure 154 Sequence timing diagram for the Switch synchronization function block without cascading Figure 155 Sequence timing diagram for the Switch synchronization function block with cascading 171 Logic programming Function blocks Sequence timing diagrams Antivalence error First input New valid input output change combination Hold time Hold time Hold time Input 1A ss l Input 1B U aA Input 2A fe PEE E tented sale H Input2B T hai 1 Input3A E a T A EE i E A SA Input 3B T Lo f ear F Output1A _ a o Output 1B Lhee Output 2A nJ oO S Output 2B iepa l a Output 3A feces Output 3B a ee EE Antivalence error First input New valid input output change combination Hold time Hold time Hold time Inputi1A T l EEEN Ee Input 1B T L Pc A eae Ale cadens Input 2A TL Input 2B Saec
344. rogramming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 9 2 Dual channel evaluation 1 pair and discrepancy time This section relates to the Safety gate monitoring Emergency stop Light curtain monitoring Magnetic switch Two hand control type IIIA and Two hand control type IIIC function blocks It does not relate to the Tolerant dual channel monitor function block Note that the safety I O modules e g WSO XTIO or WSO XTDI can carry out a dual channel evaluation when predefined input elements from the Elements window e g RE27 C4000 are connected to them If such an input element is selected you do not need a separate function block for dual channel evaluation e g light curtain monitoring safety gate monitoring or magnetic switch For detailed information on discrepancy monitoring on the safety I O modules see Section 10 1 Alternatively you can connect non pre evaluated input signals to both input channels of a function block with a dual channel input configuration In this case the dual channel evaluation takes place in the function block The disadvantage of this alternative is that it requires one function block more in the logic which can lead to a higher logic execution time The advantage is that a discrepancy time error is made available via the output of the function block and can be evaluated in the logic The following function blocks generate the same output value for a dual channel input signal that was pre evaluated by the
345. rt Release and Stop request must not be used for initiating safety stops These inputs can only be used for setting automation control stop requests Signals initiating safety stops e g safety stop must be connected to the Release 1 static input of the function block Upstroke input If the Upstroke input parameter is configured as With a High signal at the Upstroke input allows the press to stop both during the downstroke and in the top position If this parameter is set to Without regular stops are only possible in the top position Connect the Upstroke input only to the Upstroke output of an Eccentric press contact or a Universal press contact function block Start Release The Start Release input signal is used to provide signals for the beginning and end of the press movement If a rising edge Low to High is detected at the Start Release input the Enable output becomes High provided that the Stop request input is Low and no other reason is present that would normally trigger a stop signal e g Release 1 static is Low A valid restart sequence can be required before a signal transition of Start Release if the Restart interlock after stop condition parameter is set to With If you connect a command device e g a two hand control to the Start Release input you must ensure that unintentional restarting is not possible Stop request If the Stop request parameter is set to When Stop input is High the Stop request input is used
346. s e Integration of the local data for the station into the Flexi Line process image All local information of relevance for the Flexi Line process image must be integrated into the process image with the aid of a Routing function block e Creation of the local logic with the aid of the process image data Example of simple Flexi Line logic The following example shows a station with an emergency stop pushbutton and a reset pushbutton This station switches a machine via a single channel safety output The following figure shows the hardware configuration comm X2 A1 A2 nBK AL A2J X1 X2 A1 A2 MITSUBISHI n 2 68 4 MS cpus xTIO fom 12 6 6 m7 8 Are B AnextB A en1 B Acmn2B Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 ABAB is 6 I7 l8 ABAB Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 The station is connected via Flexi Line to identical or similarly configured stations on which the states of the two buttons should also be available For this purpose two bits are used in the process image e Bit 1 global byte default value high name E stop This bit collects all emergency stop commands from all stations If an emergency stop pushbutton is actuated on any station this bit is set to low logical AND e Bit 9 global bit default value low name Reset This bit collects all the reset commands from all stations If a reset pushbutton is actuated on any station this bit is set to high logical OR The signals from the two pushbuttons connected are now routed to the Fl
347. s The MELSEC WS safety controller is therefore only suitable for use in an industrial environment and not for private use Installation Precautions WARNING e Do not use the MELSEC WS safety controller in flammable gas atmosphere or explosive gas atmosphere Doing so may result in a fire or explosion due to such as an arc caused by switching the relays CAUTION e Use the MELSEC WS safety controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product e Latch the module onto the DIN mounting rail Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module e To ensure full electromagnetic compatibility EMC the DIN mounting rail has to be connected to functional earth FE Ensure that the earthling contact is positioned correctly The earthling spring contact of the module must contact the DIN mounting rail securely to allow electrical conductivity e Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product e Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module e The MELSEC WS safety controller is only suitable for mounting in a control cabinet with at least IP 54 degree of protection Failure to meet t
348. s High 0 No 0 No No 0 No 1 No No Yes if the maximum 0 Yes 0 puss atanz ese menet override cycles is not exceeded 0 Yes 1 No No 1 No 0 No No 1 No 1 No No 1 Yes 0 No No 1 Yes 1 No No Figure 198 shows an example sequence for Override and Override required Override required sequence Override required TLFLFLILI Li 1 Override input __ Lo Enable J thigh thign has to be equal to or greater than the minimum override pulse time 100 ms or 350 ms but less than or equal to 3 s If thigh is shorter than the minimum override pulse time or greater than 3 s the Override input is ignored If you use Override check whether the system is in a safe state The Override function is used to activate the safety output i e the Enable output of the muting function block although the safety device e g a safety light curtain signals that a dangerous state may exist The Override input should only be used when the hazardous area has been checked visually and nobody is in the hazardous area or has access to the hazardous area while the Override input is being used Ensure that the transitions of the signals for Override fulfill the requirements of the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous stat
349. s the Flexi Line communication Communication is only re initialized and restarted after the Teach function is run Before you use the Teach function check whether a dangerous state can occur If the Teach function is used the safety outputs on any of the still active stations may be High gt Analyze your application and check whether additional safety measures have to be implemented if the Teach function is enabled gt Consider how to handle the disconnected machine modules Point out that the control parts and sensors have no effect to the previously connected machine modules e g install out of order signs at E stops gt The teach function must be considered as a configuration process Therefore the Teach function needs to be secured according to the respective safety requirements e g by using a key operated switch that is wired to the logic teach input and a restart function block in the logic to check the timing condition gt Only authorized and especially trained personnel are allowed to activate the Teach function gt Before using the Teach function make sure that nobody is in the hazardous area or has access to the hazardous area while the Teach function is active gt After using the Teach function check the safety function of the entire Flexi Line system Figure 85 Configuration of the Teach function in the logic editor Flexi Line Chapter 8 Teaching using Setting and Monitoring Tool In the Fl
350. s to the functionality of the Emergency stop function block only with a limited parameter selection The function block allows graphic differentiation in accordance with the application Input A and Input B form a dual channel evaluation and must be equivalent When the evaluation of the inputs is High the Enable output is High see Section 9 9 2 The discrepancy time is set to 500 ms the discrepancy time is fixed and cannot be changed Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Inputs Fixed value Dual channel equivalent Discrepancy time Fixed value 500 ms equivalent to the discrepancy time according to EN 574 Number of outputs e 1 Enable output e 2 Enable output and Discrepancy error output Use fault present e With e Without 9 9 10 Two hand control type IIIC Function block diagram Input 1A NO gi Input 1B NC zi Input ZA NO zi Input 2B NC gi General description The Two hand control type IIIC function block provides the logic for monitoring the inputs of a two hand control in accordance with EN 574 ISO 13851 Use the Two hand control type IIIC function block only in combination with a WS0 XTIO or a WSO XTDI module The Two hand control type IIIC function block requires the usage of a WSO XTIO or a WS0 XTDI module Otherwise the requirements of EN 574 ISO 13851 are not fulfilled 202 Chapter 9 Table 90 Parameters of the Two hand control type
351. safety controller is interrupted Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of inputs 1to8 Messages Message assignment Up to 64 user defined messages per project e Rising edge e Falling edge e Rising or falling edge How to configure the Log generator function block The following example shows the Log generator function block with two emergency stop buttons and a safety switch attached Result 0 0 oe XTIO 1 1 E Stop E521 E XTIO 1 2 E Stop S21 ss Result 0 1 amp XTIO 1 3 Satety switch a a Result 0 2 oe Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 To configure the Log generator function block proceed as follows gt Connect input elements to the function block Double click on the function block to open the configuration dialog and click then on the I O settings tab Figure 127 I O settings for the Log generator function block E Loe Generator Messages Message Assignment In Out Settings In Out Comment Info Input Output Settings Number of inputs 3 Number of outputs 3 Optional Output j Cancel gt Choose the number of inputs that you wish to attach to the function block gt Then click the Messages tab and enter the messages that shall be output in the diagnostics Figure 128 Messages of the Log
352. se of Products with or in any application involving power plants trains railway systems airplanes airline operations other transportation systems amusement equipments hospitals medical care dialysis and life support facilities or equipment incineration and fuel devices handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals mining and drilling and other applications where the level of risk to human life health or property are elevated d MELCO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS SALES OR REVENUE FOR INCREASED LABOR OR OVERHEAD COSTS FOR DOWNTIME OR LOSS OF PRODUCTION FOR COST OVERRUNS OR FOR ENVIRONMENTAL OR POLLUTION DAMAGES OR CLEAN UP COSTS WHETHER THE LOSS IS BASED ON CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OR WARRANTY VIOLATION OF STATUTE NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE e In the event that any damages which are asserted against MELCO arising out of or relating to the Products or defects in them consist of personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages as well as damages of a pecuniary nature the disclaimers and limitations contained in these terms shall apply to all three types of damages to the fullest extent permitted by law If however the personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages cannot be disclaimed or limited by law or public policy to the extent provided by these terms t
353. se settings are primarily the required combination of the size of the process image segment length and update rate as well as the name of the process image and its revision number e You can define the data for the process image in Byte configuration Each byte is given a range a default value and a name All bits used can also be given a tag name By deactivating unused bits these bits can be hidden in the logic and the diagnostics 108 Chapter 8 Figure 81 Flexi Line General settings view 109 Note Flexi Line Flexi Line toolbar The Flexi Line toolbar contains buttons for the following functions e importing a Flexi Line definition saved previously e exporting a Flexi Line definition e Teach function confirmation of the topology of the Flexi Line system during commissioning as well as on changes to the topology e Reset restarts the entire Flexi Line system e Configuration lock Using the slider you can lock the Flexi Line configuration to prevent unintentional changes General settings afety Controller Setting and Monitoring Too 1 Project Device Extras MH BLAH com settings ff connect f Disconnect By transfer Mey Upload HS B Hardware configuration Logic editor MBE Network Modules CPU3 Module Lock to protect a a _ No of bits max segment cable length transmission cycle time The name is used for identification of the Flexi Line definition and may Sele
354. se the safety function may be impaired and a dangerous state may occur The names of software menus submenus options and commands selection boxes and windows are highlighted in bold Example Click Edit in the File menu The term dangerous state The dangerous state standard term of the machine is always shown in the drawings and diagrams of this document as the movement of a machine part In practical operation there may be a number of different dangerous states e machine movements e electrical conductors e visible or invisible radiation e acombination of several risks and hazards Keys are shown in uppercase Keys to be pressed sequentially are hyphenated with Example CTRL ALT DEL indicates to press these keys simultaneously F12 2 indicates to press these keys sequentially The key names are based on the standard keyboard Some users may use a keyboard with a different language layout such as German On safety Chapter 2 On safety A ATTENTION This chapter deals with your own safety and the safety of the equipment operators gt Please read this chapter carefully before working with a MELSEC WS safety controller 2 1 Qualified safety personnel The MELSEC WS safety controller must be installed configured commissioned and serviced only by qualified safety personnel Qualified safety personnel are defined as persons who e have undergone the appropriate technical training and e h
355. section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High Truth table for NOT Input Output 0 1 1 0 Figure 100 Function block diagram for the AND function block Table 21 Parameters of the AND function block Table 22 Truth table for AND evaluation with one input Table 23 Truth table for AND evaluation with two inputs Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 9 7 2 AND Function block diagram Input 1 Input 2 a Input 3 g Input 4 Input 5 g Input g Input a Input g General description The output is High if all evaluated inputs are High Up to eight inputs are evaluated Example If eight emergency stop buttons are attached to the inputs of the function block the output would become Low as soon as one of the emergency stop buttons is pressed Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Number of inputs 2to8 Invert input x Each input of this function block can be inverted see Section 9 5 2 Truth table The following applies for the truth tables in this section 0 means logic Low 1 means logic High x means any 0 or 1 Truth table for AND evaluation with one input Input 1 Output 1 0 0 1 1 Truth table for AND evaluation with two inputs Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 0 x 0 x 0 0 1 1 1 128 Chapt
356. shall give MELCO i notice of a warranty claim to MELCO and the authorized dealer or distributor from whom the Products were purchased ii the notice shall describe in reasonable details the warranty problem iii the notice shall be provided promptly and in no event later than thirty 30 days after the Customer knows or has reason to believe that Products are not as warranted and iv in any event the notice must given within the warranty period 2 Customer shall cooperate with MELCO and MELCO s representatives in MELCO s investigation of the warranty claim including preserving evidence of the claim and its causes meaningfully responding to MELCO s questions and investigation of the problem grant MELCO access to witnesses personnel documents physical evidence and records concerning the warranty problem and allow MELCO to examine and test the Products in question offsite or at the premises where they are installed or used and 3 If MELCO requests Customer shall remove Products it claims are defective and ship them to MELCO or MELCO s authorized representative for examination and if found defective for repair or replacement The costs of removal shipment to and from MELCO s designated examination point and reinstallation of repaired or replaced Products shall be at Customer s expense 4 If Customer requests and MELCO agrees to effect repairs onsite at any domestic or overseas location the Customer will pay for the cos
357. ss Global Reset CPU1 A E g 99 Figure 76 Flexi Link input bits from Station A in the logic editor of another station Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 Using data from the Flexi Link network You will find all available information from the other stations in the Flexi Link network in the Inputs tab of the logic editor under the symbol of the respective station s CPU module cpu Lb GY Global Reset A CPUT A EFI 1 GY Global E Stop A CPUT ALEFI1 E Info o5 CPUTIALEFI 1 E Info 0 6 CPUTIALEFI 1 BB info 0 7 cPUT ALEFI 1 GB info 1 0 CPUT A EFI 1 x 2 inputs Function block Outputs i FB preview You can use these inputs just as any other input e Inputs can be used several times e Inputs that are already used at least once in this station s logic are displayed green e The Flexi Link inputs are displayed with their respective tag names You can edit the tag names in the Flexi Link station X view of the originating station see Section 7 4 5 7 4 5 Flexi Link stations Station X view and process image In the Flexi Link station X view you can do the following e Edit the tag names for the bits and bytes that this station sends to the Flexi Link network e Set the default values for this station s process image bits to Low or High see also Section 7 4 6 gt To open the Flexi Link station X view press the corresponding button in the toolbar If the stati
358. ss cycle control function block 230 Chapter 9 Note Figure 216 Overrun monitoring with the Eccentric press contact function block Note 231 Logic programming Function blocks In order to fulfill the safety standards it may be necessary to use tested switches for the cam input signals each with different test sources To use different test sources for the cam signals the Overrun cam Upstroke cam and Dynamic cam need to be connected to different WSO XTDI or WSO XTIO modules One WSO XTDI has two test sources only even if it has eight test output terminals Overrun monitoring The Eccentric press contact function block monitors the overrunning of the press If the Overrun cam is left although the press is supposed to have stopped then the function block detects an Overrun error The Drive released input signal must then accord to Figure 216 and the following rule HighLow Top output Overrun cam Low gt High or Drive released Saa Low m High Don t care At the Drive released input there has to be either a Low to High transition while the Top output is High or the Drive released input has to be High at the end of the Overrun cam High Low transition If none of these two conditions is fulfilled the Enable output becomes Low and the Overrun error output becomes High The Drive released input must be connected to the signal that controls the physical output o
359. sssrresssrresesrnessrrnesennnesinanesrrnnaennnneseen 202 9 9 10 Two hand control type IMCO asssssesssssssssisesrnsessrresssrsssnrassrsnnseninnasinnnnsnns 202 9 9 11 Multi operator multiple two hand Control ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaes 204 9 10 Function blocks for Parallel muting Sequential muting and Cross muting sen dalels a dovveeindeviy E E dewvie oa eee tt A dawvieidivs headin vie 206 9 10 1 Overview and general description 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeceeneeeseenaeeeeeeaas 206 9 10 2 Parameters of the function DIOCKS 0 0 00 eeeceeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 209 12 9 10 3 Information ON WIIG a T E T T 216 9 10 4 State transition from Stop to RUN cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 217 9 10 5 Error states and information on resetting cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaes 217 9 10 6 Parallel MUNG isc T R ed aetebed gaauiraedeatiedee 218 9 10 7 Sequential MU NG edasipidi i i a 220 9 10 8 Cross muting direction of movement only forwards or backwards 222 9 10 9 Cross muting material transport in both directions eeeeeeeeeeeee 224 9 11 Function blocks for press contact Monitoring eeesseeeesseerreseerrssrerrssrerrs 226 9 11 1 Overview and general description 0 0 0 eect eeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 226 9 11 2 Eccentric press CONtACL ccccceceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeceneaeceeeeeeesenesesaneeeeeees 226 9 11 3 Universal press contact
360. st pulses enabled disabled etc See also Section 5 5 6 gt Close the Element settings window by clicking OK The graphical user interface Chapter 5 5 5 4 Safe and non safe elements in the hardware configuration Safe and non safe elements are shown in the hardware configuration using different colors e Safe elements are marked yellow e Non safe elements are marked gray The majority of elements are only marked as safe or non safe when they are dragged to a corresponding input or output e Safe elements that are dragged to a safe input or output are marked yellow e f an element marked gray is dragged to a safe input or output it remains marked gray but can be marked yellow by editing How to mark an element as a safety element gt Double click a gray or red marked element or click it using the right mouse button and select Edit on the context menu The Element settings window opens gt Activate the Safety element checkbox gt Click on OK to close the Element settings window The element is now marked yellow 5 5 5 Expanding elements Some elements consist of a group of two or more sub elements such as an interlock that consists of a safety switch as input element and an interlock with locking as output element Normally these elements must be connected to one module e g WSO0 XTIO but some of these elements can be expanded so that the individual sub elements can be connected to different modules How t
361. stem New stations can be added to an existing Flexi Line system if these systems have a Flexi Line definition that matches the existing system This action is also possible while the existing system is in operation As soon as the stations in the system detect the addition they change to the Teaching required status and the LINE LED flashes Green at 2 Hz If one or more stations are removed from a correctly configure Flexi Line system while it is switched off after it is switched on again this system changes to the Teaching required status and the LINE LED flashes Green at 2 Hz If one or more stations are removed from a Flexi Line system while it is in operation then the neighboring stations signal a Flexi Line error state i e the LINE LED flashes Red at 1 Hz The error state can be reset in this case with a teaching process If a station that is no longer required is bypassed while the system is in operation this action will result in a Flexi Line error In this case the system cannot be reset by teaching instead it must be switched off and on again After switching on the system changes to the Teaching required status and the LINE LED flashes Green at 2 Hz Figure 88 Example hardware configuration for a Flexi Line system Figure 89 Routing of local signals to the Flexi Line process image Flexi Line Chapter 8 8 3 3 Configuration of the Flexi Line logic The logic for a Flexi Line station is programmed in 2 step
362. sually and nobody is in the hazardous area or has access to the hazardous area while the CPU module is being reset If the configuration is verified the CPU module will change back into the Run state automatically after the reset If the configuration is not verified you will have to start the CPU module manually using the Setting and Monitoring Tool 280 Chapter 13 281 Technical commissioning Technical commissioning A ATTENTION The configuration of the MELSEC WS safety controller has to be completed before you begin with the technical commissioning 13 1 Wiring and voltage supply When connecting the MELSEC WS safety controller observe the technical data in the Safety Controller User s Manual gt Connect the individual field devices to the corresponding signal connections and check for each safety input test signal output and safety output whether these behave as required for the application Diagnostics information from the MELSEC WS module s LEDs support you in validating the individual field signals Check whether the external circuit the realisation of the wiring the choice of the pick ups and their location at the machine fulfill the required safety level gt Eliminate any faults e g incorrect wiring or crossed signals at each safety input test signal output or safety output before you continue with the next step gt Switch on the voltage supply As soon as the supply voltage is applied to the connec
363. t input is configured as Necessary for first start or as Necessary for every start the Release 2 start input also must be High if a complete start sequence is required Release 1 static OOo o Release 2 start l PSDI L_J L Restart STL Enable T LO Release 1 static l Release 2 start J L o PSDI L L Restart SL E Enable Z S e S After the initial complete start sequence has been executed and the press has completed a press cycle the Top input must indicate that the press has currently reached the top dead center This is indicated by a rising edge Low to High of the Top input When this happens the internal break counter is reset A cycle start sequence is required in order to trigger a subsequent cycle In this case the Enable output is set to High when the configured number of breaks has occurred and the remaining configured conditions have been fulfilled e g Condition for Release 2 start input can be configured as Necessary for every start 252 Chapter 9 Figure 237 Valid breaks when the Start of first PSDI pulse PSDI input Low High parameter is set to After the start of upstroke 253 Note Logic programming Function blocks PSDI time monitoring The PSDI time monitoring parameter specifies the required time both for a complete start sequence and for a cycle start sequence If the PSDI time monitoring is exceeded the PSDI timeout output changes to High In t
364. t 2A fp Input2B J Lat L LLL Enable output J l j l j l Discrepancy error pair 1 Discrepancy error pair 2 Synchronization 2S ee eee error Fault present oe gt _ lt _ gt Tsync Tsync Tsync Tsyne Synchronization time Stop Run 9 9 4 Emergency stop Function block diagram B Fault present General description The Emergency stop function block allows the implementation of an emergency stop function with an emergency stop pushbutton If a corresponding dual channel input element is configured in the hardware configuration of the Setting and Monitoring Tool this function block is no longer required in the logic since the pre evaluation is then carried out directly on the safety 1 O module e g WSO XTDI or WSO XTIO module But if the Fault present output is required for further processing the function block can be used To this purpose the two input signals have to be configured as single channel signals and applied to the inputs of the function block In the case of emergency stop pushbuttons a Reset and or Restart function block has to take over the processing of the reset restart conditions for the safety chain when the Enable output is set to Low This can also be necessary for emergency stop pushbuttons with a combined push pull to unlatch mechanism 192 Chapter 9 Table 83 Parameters of the Emergency stop function block Figure 180 Function block diagram for the Ma
365. t curtain monitoring or as a part of the configuration of the safety inputs e g configuration of the inputs with dual channel evaluation e The Cycle request input must not be used for safety functionality This input is for automation control functionality only Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Cycle request condition e Rising edge e Falling edge Number of operators e 2 operators e 3 operators Number of static releases 0 1 2 204 Chapter 9 Logic programming Function blocks The Enable output changes to High if e all Release inputs are High and stay High and e each activated Operator input has changed to Low at least once this may occur at different times as well after the MELSEC WS safety controller has changed from the Stop state to the Run state or after a rising or a falling edge depending on the configuration has been detected at the Cycle request input and e all activated Operator inputs have changed to High subsequently The Enable output changes to Low if e one or more of the Release inputs is Low or e one or more of the Operator inputs is Low or e arising or a falling edge depending on the configuration has been detected at the Cycle request input Sequence timing diagram All Operator inputs have performed a cycle after the falling edge on the Cycle request input or after the start and the activated Release input is High Ope
366. t is in a perfect condition in particular the muting sensors visual inspection When it has been necessary to activate an override subsequently check whether the equipment functions properly and the layout of the muting sensors During long muting cycles i e longer than 24 hours or during longer machine downtimes check that the muting sensors function correctly A muting and or override lamp has to be used in order to signal that the muting or override function is active It is possible to use an external muting override lamp or one that is integrated in the protective device ESPE It may be necessary to monitor the muting override lamp depending on your local regional and national regulations and standards If this is the case this has to be realized by additional means WS0 XTIO and WSO XTDI modules do not support lamp monitoring Always position the muting or override lamp so that it can be seen well It must be possible to see the muting or override lamp from all positions around the hazardous area and for the system operator If safety relevant information i e distributed safety input values and or safety output values is transferred via a safety field bus network always take the corresponding delays into account These delays can influence both the system behaviour as well as the requirements for the minimum safety distances that are connected to the response times 208 Chapter 9 Table 92 Parameters of th
367. tactor and to check on the basis of its feedback signal whether it has switched as expected To this purpose the external device is connected to Output 1 and or Output 2 The feedback signal is connected to the EDM feedback input The Monitored input is connected to the logic signal that represents the desired state for the external device e g the Enable output of a Reset function block Parameters of the function block Parameter Possible values Max feedback delay 100 to 1 000 ms in 10 ms steps The value has to be greater than the logic execution time Use fault present e With Use Error reset e Without Output 1 and Output 2 Both outputs have always the same value This way two outputs are available to connect two output elements directly Output 1 and Output 2 become High if the EDM feedback is High and the Monitored input changes from Low to High subsequently Output 1 and Output 2 become Low if the Monitored input is Low or if an EDM error is present EDM error output is High EDM error and Fault present Generally it is expected that the EDM feedback input always takes the inverted value of the Monitored input before the configured Max feedback delay Tepm has expired The EDM error and Fault present outputs become High if e the Monitored input changes from Low to High and the EDM feedback input is Low irrespective of Tepm or e the Monitored input changes from Low to High and the EDM feedback i
368. tag names for devices on EFI interface 1 and 2 RS232 HMI RS 232 I O tag names The tag names of the selected type are listed in a tree view on the right side of the screen If a device type is not available in your project e g no SICK EFl compatible device connected then the corresponding section is displayed grey i e inactive How to edit the tag names gt Click on one of the active sections on the left side to choose the device type whose tag names you want to edit gt Navigate through the tree view on the right side to select the bit whose tag name you want to edit and enter the desired name in the input field Table 7 Buttons for exporting and importing tag names The graphical user interface 5 6 11 Import and export tag names Chapter 5 With the aid of the Import tag names and Export tag names buttons at the top left of this window you can save the tag names as a text file in the CSV format comma separated values or import tag names from a CSV file or Excel file Symbol Meaning ge Import tag names m Export tag names 62 Chapter 5 Figure 33 Report view 63 Note The graphical user interface 5 7 Report view In the Report view a comprehensive report on the current project and all configuration settings including the logic program and detailed wiring information is available You can individually configure the contents of the report i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring
369. tation of the material Equations and prerequisites for calculating the distance L 2 gt vx2xTyn Muting sensor vxt gt L L L4 lt Lo Tin Light curtain lt Tin Muting sensor 218 Chapter 9 Note Figure 201 Valid muting sequence using the configuration basic setting C1 input without Override input without Conveyor input without 219 Logic programming Function blocks Where L Distance between the sensors layout symmetrical to the detection area of the ESPE L3 Length of material in conveyor direction v Velocity of the material e g of the conveyor belt t Set total muting time s TiN Light curtains TIN Muting sensor Response time of the light curtain or the muting sensors in the MELSEC WS safety controller See the Safety Controller User s Manual The material can be moved in both directions or a fixed direction of transportation can be defined for it as follows With the optional input C1 If used the C1 input always has to be activated before both muting sensors of the first sensor pair e g A1 and A2 become High By means of the Direction detection configuration parameter In parallel layout the position of the muting sensors also determines the width of the permissible object The objects always have to pass the muting sensors with an identical width Optical probes and all types of non optical sensors can be used for this application Use sensors and probes with
370. tch the devices actually physically present a question mark is displayed in the hardware configuration in Setting and Monitoring Tool at the related EFI connection e An EFl compatible device is physically present on this EFI connection but not in the configuration of the CPU module If you now upload the configuration using the Transfer project command this device will be added to the configuration of the CPU module Exception If the configuration in the CPU module is verified the sensor is not corrected In this case the configuration in the CPU module remains unchanged e An EFI compatible device is configured on this EFI connection but is not present physically In this case the icon for the device is displayed with a question mark If you now upload the configuration using the Transfer project command this device will be removed from the configuration of the CPU module Exception If the configuration in the CPU module is verified the sensor is not corrected In this case the configuration remains unchanged How to configure the EFI system integrity test gt If the Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to the WSO CPU1 or WS0 CPU3 click on Disconnect or change to the Edit mode gt Right click on the CPU module and select the Edit command from the context menu In the following dialog click on the EFI button on the left side Module 0 Settings gt Check all param
371. te You can run or stop each station also in the Hardware configuration view for the 91 respective station Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 Verify the configuration gt Switch to the Hardware configuration view for any station in your project If the device configuration is valid and equal with the configuration in the Setting and Monitoring Tool but not yet verified the CV LED on the CPU module will flash as well as the Upload and verify configuration button on the left side of the configuration area gt Click the Upload and verify configuration button The Setting and Monitoring Tool will upload the configuration from the module and compare it to the configuration in the Setting and Monitoring Tool If both configurations match the result will be displayed as a report and you will be asked whether you want to set the device to Verified Read the report carefully You can print the report or save it in PDF format gt If you have checked the report and want to set the device to Verified click Yes The device will be set to Verified If it is currently not in the Run state you will now be asked whether you want to start it gt Repeat this for all stations in your Flexi Link system For more detailed information on transferring and verifying a configuration please see Chapter 10 92 Chapter 7 Figure 66 Flexi Link system and station buttons Figure 67 Flexi Link system menu bar Figure 68 Flexi Link station menu bar
372. tection is started by a falling edge of the Drive released input signal A stop of the drive is detected when no signal change falling or rising edge at any Incremental input has occurred for at least the configured Min time between signal changes In this case the Ramp down ended output will change to High If the Drive released input signal becomes High this will immediately set the Ramp down ended output to Low and will also cancel a currently running ramp down detection During the running state i e while the Drive released input is High and during the stop detected state Ramp down ended output is High the Incremental inputs are not monitored for signal changes see Figure 163 The function block allows an optional plausibility check of the Incremental inputs to detect cable interruptions provided that the encoder provides appropriate signals e g complementary outputs or proximity switches and a tooth wheel with 270 tooth width and 180 phase shift If the plausibility check is enabled at least one signal within a signal pair must be High at any time The Plausibility error incremental output is set to High if this condition is not fulfilled for two consecutive logic cycles This means that both inputs of a pair may be Low for the duration of the logic execution time without causing an error see also Figure 164 The Plausibility error incremental output is reset to Low if at least one signal within a signal pair is High and the
373. ter any kind of stop The Restart interlock parameter can also be set to the following values e When Release 1 or Release 3 or Start Release is Low e When Release 1 or Release 3 is Low or Top changes to High e Always e When Release 1 or Release 3 is Low This parameter determines when a Restart signal is expected as input signal for the function block If the Enable output changes to Low because of the above mentioned settings of the configuration parameters for the Restart interlock the Enable output can only be reset after a valid restart sequence with a Low High Low transition minimum 100 ms or 350 ms shorter pulses and pulses longer than 30 s will be ignored has been carried out Disable Restart Interlock for EN3 on Top The Disable Restart Interlock for EN3 on Top parameter prevents the restart interlock being activated if the Release 3 safety input changes to Low during a regular stop of the press This means that if the Disable Restart Interlock for EN3 on Top parameter is configured as Yes and the Enable output changes to Low as a result of the Top input changing to High then the Restart required output will not change to High if the Release 3 safety input changes to Low as long as the press has not been restarted Output signals of the function block Restart required The Restart required output is High when a valid restart sequence is expected at the Restart input Sequence timing diagrams Start Release l l
374. terface Edit tag names The Edit tag names button opens the central Tag name editor see Section 5 6 10 Online edit mode button If you need to change the configuration while the Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to the system you can use the Online edit mode button in the upper right corner of the screen over the configuration area to switch into the edit mode This way it is possible to edit the configuration without disconnecting from the system first 5 5 1 Exercise for configuring the MELSEC WS modules gt Create a new standalone project using the New Project button All available MELSEC WS modules are displayed in the Modules selection window All modules are grayed out with the exception of the CPU modules gt Select the function package from the dropdown list under the desired CPU module WSO0 CPUO WSO CPU1 or WSO CPU3 Function package Revision V 2 xx requires CPU firmware version 2 01 or higher see Chapter 3 gt Use the mouse to drag the CPU module into the Configuration area The CPU module is displayed magnified there The inputs outputs and terminals are visible The CPU modules are now grayed out and the other modules network modules I O modules can be selected in the Modules selection window gt Move further safety I O modules in the Configuration area Green arrows indicate where the new module will be positioned Grey arrows indicate possible other positions The CPU module is
375. termine the operating procedure so that the safety can be ensured Furthermore before performing online operations for the MELSEC WS safety controller from the PC determine corrective actions to be taken for communication errors caused by failure such as a poor contact e Create an interlock program using a reset button to prevent the MELSEC WS safety controller from restarting automatically after the safety function is activated and the safety controller turns off the outputs CAUTION e Ensure that an entire system using the MELSEC WS safety controller meets the requirements for the corresponding safety category e The life of safety relays in the safety relay output module depends on the switching condition and or load Configure a system satisfying the number of switching times of the safety relays in the module e Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100 mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise e If a mechanical switch such as a relay is connected to an input terminal of a safety I O module consider contact bounce e Observe the protective notes and measures Observe the following items in order to ensure proper use of the MELSEC WS safety controller e When mounting installing and using the MELSEC WS safety controller observe the standards and directives applicable in your country e The national
376. the Change password command If you are not logged in as Administrator you will be prompted to log in now gt In the Change password dialog select the user level for which you want to change the password enter the new password twice and confirm with OK Connecting to the MELSEC WS safety controller Chapter 6 Note The password may consist of 8 characters maximally Figure 47 Change password dialog Chanee password Change password for Maintenance personnel Authorized client New password Please confirm the new password K by entering twice pok 6 5 Identify project The Identify project command is equivalent to the Connect to physical device command that can be executed upon program start of the Setting and Monitoring Tool gt In the Device menu choose the Identify project command The current project will be closed gt The Setting and Monitoring Tool will search for connected MELSEC WS modules and load the hardware configuration into the Hardware configuration dialog Once all modules have been identified the Setting and Monitoring Tool will ask whether the configuration shall be uploaded gt Click Yes if you want to upload the configuration 78 Chapter 7 Flexi Link Table 13 Minimum system requirements for Flexi Link Table 14 Available status bits depending on the connection method 79 Note Flexi Link 7 1 Flexi Link overview Flexi Link allows you
377. the button for Station B in the toolbar Then switch to the Logic editor view for Station B gt Inthe inputs selection window find the two inputs from the Station A CPU module that are routed via Flexi Link You can recognize them by their tag names Figure 60 Routed inputs from Station A in the Station B logic editor cpu A StationA A Global Reset CPU1 A EFI 1 E Global E stop CPU1 A EFI 1 E info O 5 CPUT AEFI 1 E info 0 6 CPUT ALEFI 1 lt Inputs Function block Outputs FB previe gt Using these inputs the output elements on the Station B WS0 XTIO module and a Restart function block create the following logic configuration Figure 61 Logic configuration example Station B ZY Global Reset cpu A E Robot XTIO 1 01 gt GJ Global E stop CPU1 A s Lamp XTIO 1 02 yl With this step the example project is finished The input from the emergency stop button and from the reset button connected to Station A is routed to Station B via Flexi Link so that the robots connected to both stations can be controlled simultaneously Figure 62 Flexi Link system overview system not connected Figure 63 Connect dialog Flexi Link Chapter 7 7 3 4 Transferring and verifying the Flexi Link configuration To start your Flexi Link system connect the PC with the system transfer and verify the configurations and switch the stations into
378. the configuration that is saved in the memory plug for each CPU3 module connected Figure 83 Routing of local signals to the Flexi Line process image Figure 84 Usage of signals from the Flexi Line process image in the logic Flexi Line Chapter 8 8 2 4 Flexi Line data in the logic editor Each Flexi Line station automatically prepares a local instance of the process image from the data received from its neighboring stations If local information on the related station affects global bits these values are also immediately taken into account in the local instance of the process image The output process image is prepared with the aid of Routing function blocks Here the signals on the local inputs must each be routed to a Flexi Line output Then the values on these local inputs are available in the entire Flexi Line system as Flexi Line inputs via the Flexi Line process image In the context of the logic programming the Flexi Line inputs do not differ from other types of safety inputs 112 Chapter 8 113 Note A ATTENTION Flexi Line 8 2 5 Teach function The topology of the Flexi Line system must be confirmed to activate the function It can be executed using the Setting and Monitoring Tool If it is to be possible to change the topology of the system later an integrated Teach function is also available in the logic Any change in the topology of a Flexi Line system immediately stop
379. the file cards at the bottom e The Input view contains the input values for the connected MELSEC WS modules and EFI devices as well as the module status data If your MELSEC WS safety controller contains network interface modules the input data on the network interface modules i e the data the network interface modules receive from the network are also available here e The Output view offers the output values for the connected MELSEC WS modules and EFI devices as well as the Logic results from the logic editor All sources supported by the current configuration are displayed in black e connected MELSEC WS modules e connected EFI devices e configured logic results e gateway input data and gateway output data Sources currently not configured will be displayed in grey Activating the Show only available data checkbox in the upper left corner hides the unused sources from the view Sources that are used in the logic program are marked with a small symbol beside the text 1 In the default configuration only the first logic result byte Logic Result 0 is active and available You can activate more output bits for logic results in the logic editor How to add a data byte to the routing table gt Drag and drop an element i e byte from the Available data area to a free slot in the Gateway data set to network area If the desired position is not free you will have to clear it first by deleting or moving the byte currently assigne
380. the next possible moment When clicking on an input in stopped mode a blue box will appear around it denoting that it is ready to switch at the next cycle of the simulation This makes it possible to switch one or more elements at the same time and see their direct effect on the logic After activation of the desired inputs the simulation must be continued either by pressing the green Start button or by using one of the time increment buttons in order for the logic and outputs to switch accordingly If the EDM or the Valve monitoring function block is being used it is recommended to remove them from the logic before simulating These function blocks expect a high signal on their feedback input within 300 ms of their associated output being activated This can only be simulated by using small increments and not in real time 266 Chapter 9 267 Note A ATTENTION Note Logic programming Function blocks 9 15 Force mode In force mode you can set the inputs in the MELSEC WS logic program to High or Low via Setting and Monitoring Tool independently of the values of the actual physical inputs while the MELSEC WS safety controller is in the Run state The MELSEC WS safety controller and the programmed logic will react exactly in the same way as if the physical inputs had actually the respective values This enables you e g during commissioning or maintenance to test the wiring of your system and the function of your programme
381. the output selection window under CPU1 or CPU3 Figure 56 CPU outputs in the output selection window f ceur nfo 0 3 CPU1 4 A 1 nfo 0 4 CPU1 4 EFI 1 nfo 0 5 CPU1 4 EFI 1 nfo 0 6 CPU1 A EFI 1 nfo 0 7 CPUT A EFI 1 nfo 1 0 CPU1 4 EFI 1 0 error CPU1 A EFI 1 nfo 1 4 CPU1 A EFI 1 BEBBBBB8 Note A square with the letter A D within it denotes a bit within the Flexi Link process image e Each output can be used only once Used outputs are displayed green e Connect the outputs of the Routing N N function block to the two CPU1 A outputs e g Info 0 3 CPU1 A EFI1 and Info 0 4 CPU1 A EFI1 as shown in Figure 57 Figure 57 Flexi Link routing logic example 3 Reset XTIO 1 12 Robot XTIO 1 01 P E Stop ES21 XTION M Lamp XTIO 1 Q2 Y 2 Safe 0 3 CPU1 4 EFI 1 p a Safe 0 4 CPUI A EFI1 J gt Note which input is being routed to which output Recommendation In more complex projects configure the routing connections on a separate page in the logic editor Otherwise the logic design could get confusing 87 Figure 58 Flexi Link routing table and tag names Figure 59 Assigned Flexi Link tag names in the routing configuration and in the logic editor Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 Assigning tag names for the Flexi Link routing gt Still in the Station A view switch to the Flexi Link routing table usin
382. tically respective to the size of the programmed logic since they represent multiples of the logic execution time By clicking on one of these time buttons the simulation jumps forward by the specified time increment Additionally the input field on the right 7 allows you to enter a user specific time period in ms by which the simulation will jump forward when the yellow button 8 beside the input field is pressed By entering a large number such as 40000 40 s into this field you can jump forward in order to avoid waiting for timers to complete their cycle for example The entered time will be rounded to the nearest possible cycle time Figure 256 Simulation mode started simulation off Figure 257 Simulation mode started simulation running Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Machine Operator HgpOine A Settne and Monitoring Taci confieurarion is rot verifie While the simulation is running you can set an input to High by clicking on it High inputs will be displayed green with a blue frame Another click will set the input back to Low again 00 00 07 460 Uo matric nOus page Page 1 test Px F Situs EF Marker 0 0 Osum i s 2 am Fiat r S 4 maT at aT ti 3 F F Machine Operator 2 Otfline A Settne and Monitoring Tool configuration is rot verified When the simulation is stopped it is possible to select inputs to switch at
383. tics of a MELSEC WS safety controller using the Setting and Monitoring Tool It only applies in combination with the Safety Controller User s Manual Planning and using SICK protective devices also require specific technical skills which are not detailed in this documentation Chapter 2 contains fundamental safety instructions These instructions must be read When operating the MELSEC WS modular safety controller the national local and statutory rules and regulations must be observed For the acquisition of Setting and Monitoring Tool please contact your local Mitsubishi representative The SICK EF l compatible devices and SICK configuration and diagnostics software CDS are the products of SICK For details of the SICK products please contact your local SICK representative see Section 15 4 http www sick com 1 3 1 Recommendations for familiarising yourself with Setting and Monitoring Tool We recommend the following procedure for users who want to familiarize themselves with Setting and Monitoring Tool for the first time gt Read Chapter 5 to familiarize yourself with the graphical user interface and do the exercises for the configuration of example applications 1 3 2 Recommendations for experienced users We recommend the following procedure for experienced users who have already worked with Setting and Monitoring Tool gt Familiarize yourself with the most recent version of the software by reading Section 1 4
384. tion area under the respective WSO XTIO module 273 Transferring the system configuration Chapter 11 Transferring the system configuration Note Note Note Note Note Initially the configuration of the MELSEC WS safety controller only exists as a project meaning as a MELSEC WS configuration file The configuration has to be transferred to the memory plug via the CPU The memory plug and the CPU module communicate via an internal interface Direct connection of a PC to the memory plug is not possible Data can only be loaded to the memory plug or read from it via a compatible CPU module The configuration data are checked for compatibility during transfer to the memory plug and can subsequently be verified through reading and comparing and optionally have a write protection assigned to it With the memory plug the project data can be transferred without further processing using the Setting and Monitoring Tool to any number of MELSEC WS safety controllers The configuration data are copied exactly in the process including the verification and any write protection information that were set during the configuration of the first safety controller with these data Before using standby hibernation or sleep mode of PC disconnect the PC from the MELSEC WS safety controller Before removing the RS 232 USB converter WS0 UC 232A disconnect the PC from the MELSEC WS safety controller 11 1 Transferring project data to the saf
385. tion of 100 ms or 350 ms and maximum 30 s Shorter and longer pulses are ignored Ensure that the transitions of the signals for resetting fulfill the requirements of the safety standards and regulations In case of a short circuit to High to 24 V DC at a physical input the evaluated signal can have a pulse when the signal is reset due to the short circuit detection If such a pulse can result in a dangerous state in the machine the following points have to be observed Ensure protected cable laying for the signal line due to cross circuiting to other signal lines e No short circuit detection i e do not reference to test outputs Safety relevant signals have to conform to standards and regulations to be applied Always take the valid national regional and local regulations and standards into consideration for your application Type C standards such as EN 692 and EN 693 contain requirements how safety relevant signals have to be used For example the restart signal may have to be protected by suitable means in case of overrun errors e g by a key switch or in a closed control cabinet Figure 218 Press cycle for the Universal press contact function block with falling edge of TDC before BDC Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 If the Reset input is disabled an error can be reset only by stopping the logic execution e g by a power cycle or by changing the system state from the Run state to the Stop st
386. tions A1 and A2 of the CPU modules or the WSO0 XTIO modules the MELSEC WS safety controller automatically carries out the following steps internal self test loading of the saved configuration testing of the loaded configuration for validity The system does not start up if the steps described above could not be carried out successfully If there is an error this is indicated correspondingly by the LEDs see the Safety Controller User s Manual and the safety controller only transfers Low values 13 2 Transferring the configuration After you have configured the hardware and the logic in the MELSEC WS safety controller and have checked whether they are correct transfer the configuration to the safety controller via the Setting and Monitoring Tool Technical commissioning Chapter 13 13 3 Technical test and commissioning The machine or system that is protected by a MELSEC WS safety controller may only be started up after a successful technical check of all safety functions The technical test may only be performed by qualified safety personnel The technical test includes the following test items gt Uniquely mark all connection cables and connectors at the safety controller in order to avoid confusion Since the MELSEC WS safety controller has several connections of the same design you must ensure that loosened connection cables are not connected back to the wrong connection gt Verify the configuration of the MELSEC WS
387. to 10 s in 10 ms increments If the value is not 0 the value must be greater than the logic execution time Use outputs Status e Without input A and Status input e with B Use Fault present e Without e With Dual channel monitor The value necessary on the two signals to achieve the required state depends on the Input mode selected There are two possibilities e equivalent evaluation e complementary sampling Input mode Input A Input B State of the tolerant dual channel monitor Equivalent 0 0 Inactive 0 1 Discrepant Input A switched off 1 0 Discrepant Input B switched off 1 1 Active if correct sequence has been followed Complementary 0 1 Inactive 0 0 Discrepant Input A switched off 1 1 Discrepant Input B switched off 1 0 Active if correct sequence has been followed 198 Chapter 9 Figure 186 State diagram for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block Note Figure 187 Sequence timing diagram for the tolerant dual channel monitor function block change to active 199 Logic programming Function blocks Discrepant Discrepancy time An optional discrepancy time can be defined The discrepancy time defines how long the two inputs are allowed to have discrepant values after a change in one of the two inputs without this situation resulting in an error The Discrepancy error input A and Discrepancy err
388. to signal a stop to the press When the Stop request input is High the Enable output is set to Low This input should only be used if the Stop request parameter has been set to When Stop input is High The Stop request input is not used when the Stop request parameter has been set to When Start Release input is Low A valid restart sequence can be required before a signal transition of Start Release when the Restart interlock after stop condition parameter is set to With The Stop request input is designed for the connection of signals that are not safety relevant e g from a programmable controller Safety relevant signals may only be connected to the Release 1 static input not to the Stop request input 248 Chapter 9 A ATTENTION A ATTENTION Figure 233 Sequence timing diagram for the Press automatic function block using the Stop request and Upstroke inputs 249 Logic programming Function blocks Release 1 static The input signal Release 1 static is mandatory The Enable output always changes immediately to Low if Release 1 static is Low If this function block is used together with a press contact function block e g Eccentric press contact or Universal press contact its enable signal must be connected with the Release 1 static input of this function block Release 2 start The input signal Release 2 start is optional When Release 2 start is configured the Enable output can only change to
389. to the Safety Controller User s Manual 7 5 1 Flexi Link ID mismatch Error description If no process image transfer is possible between the stations in your system and all CPU modules show a recoverable error MS LED flashing Red at 1 Hz and EFI1 and EFI2 LEDs light up Red this could be due to a Flexi Link ID mismatch This means that at least one of the stations in the system has one or two Flexi Link IDs that differ from the other stations Flexi Link IDs Diagnostics gt Switch to the Flexi Link System overview gt If the Setting and Monitoring Tool is not connected to the system connect to all stations gt Check the status messages of the stations for indication of a Flexi Link ID mismatch Correction of the error If different Flexi Link IDs exist in the system the current configuration must be transferred to all stations again gt Check whether the configuration in the Setting and Monitoring Tool is correct gt Connect to all stations gt Transfer the configuration to all stations gt Switch to the view for each station and verify the configuration if necessary 106 Chapter 8 Flexi Line Table 17 System requirements for Flexi Line Notes Table 18 Update rate for a Flexi Line system as a function of the maximum length of cable and the size of the process image 107 Flexi Line 8 1 Flexi Line enables you to reliably network up to 32 MELSEC WS safety controller Only WSO CPU3 m
390. to the other stations in the Flexi Link system depends on the connection method Connection method Available status bits per station EFI1 26 EFI1 2 52 e You can not use Flexi Link and EFI communication at the same time i e it is not possible to connect other SICK EFl compatible devices on the EFI2 connection while EFI1 is used for Flexi Link e The process data sent by any station are received almost simultaneously by all other stations The processing logic in the individual stations is however not necessarily simultaneous as the stations are not synchronized e The data on EFI1 and on EFI2 are consistent The data on EFI1 and EFI2 can however be inconsistent for a short time as they are transferred separately Note Flexi Link Chapter 7 7 2 Function principle The configuration of a Flexi Link project requires two steps The first step is the configuration of the network settings and the Flexi Link address Wiring errors or the presence of devices that are not suitable for Flexi Link projects are detected in this step automatically by the system e The second step is the configuration of the individual stations in the system CPU module safety I O modules connected elements network modules logic and the process image for the Flexi Link network 7 2 1 Flexi Link address The Flexi Link address is required by the Setting and Monitoring Tool to uniquely identify each of the up to 4 stations in a Fl
391. tools Add Adds a new station in the current slot A to D and switches to i the view for the new station This function is only available if no station has been configured for this slot yet Icon Function Description Edit Switches to the view for this station There you can edit its if properties including the station name configure the connected hardware program the logic verify and lock the configuration etc Recognize Connects to this station uploads its hardware configuration jH then prompts you whether the software configuration shall be uploaded from this station Delete Deletes this station from the current configuration FK Note You will not be asked to confirm this command and there is no Undo function Unsaved changes will be lost Connect Connects to this station so that you can upload transfer or verify 4 A ee J t3 the configuration run or stop the application etc Disconnect Disconnects from this station so that you can e g edit the d t configuration Note Ifa function is not available the corresponding icon is displayed grey e Instead of clicking the Add or Edit button you can also switch to the view for an individual station by clicking the corresponding button for Station A to D or by double clicking on that station s graphical representation e The Connect or Disconnect buttons next to each station perform their function only for this station while the Connect
392. troller The input status specifies whether the data transferred from the input device to the CPU module are e Low because this is the output value at the input device or e Low because there is a fault at the input device Status bit Value Meaning Status input Low One or more input bits of the corresponding module are set to Low data due to an detected error e g cross circuit detected or communication failure detected meaning that the input bits may have different values as in error free operation High The inputs of the corresponding module are error free Status output Low For one or more outputs of the corresponding module an error has data been detected e g overload detected short circuit detected or communication failure detected meaning that the outputs may have different values as in error free operation High The outputs of the corresponding module are error free Note A ATTENTION Figure 28 Example for the usage of a CPU marker The graphical user interface Chapter 5 The input and output status for the WS0 XTIO and WS0 XTDI modules is available only with firmware version V2 00 and higher 5 6 7 CPU markers CPU markers are available as inputs and outputs in the Logic editor They can be used e g for the creation of logic loop backs or to connect an output of a function block that is placed on one page of the logic editor to an input of a function block on another page of the
393. ts of sending repair personnel and shipping parts MELCO is not responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves repairs or replacing of the Products Repairs of Products located outside of Japan are accepted by MELCO s local authorized service facility centers FA Centers Terms and conditions on which each FA Center offers repair services for Products that are out of warranty or not covered by MELCO s limited warranty may vary Subject to availability of spare parts MELCO will offer Product repair services for 4 years after each Product model or line is discontinued at MELCO s or its FA Centers rates and charges and standard terms in effect at the time of repair MELCO usually produces and retains sufficient spare parts for repairs of its Products for a period of four 4 years after production is discontinued MELCO generally announces discontinuation of Products through MELCO s Technical Bulletins Products discontinued and repair parts for them may not be available after their production is discontinued the materials construction criteria functionality use properties or other characteristics of the equipment systems or production lines into which the Products may be incorporated including any safety fail safe and shut down systems using the Products MELCO is not responsible for determining the suitability of the Products for their intended purpose and use including det
394. tween the stations The Flexi Link IDs are a part of the configuration and are transferred and saved with the configuration in the memory plug of each connected WS0 CPU1 or WS0 CPU3 module The Flexi Link IDs for the current configuration in the Setting and Monitoring Tool are always displayed in the Flexi Link menu bar The Flexi Link IDs that are currently stored in the individual stations are displayed in the Flexi Link System overview and compared to the Flexi Link ID of the project on the PC while the station is connected If the Setting and Monitoring Tool detects a Flexi Link ID mismatch a warning sign is displayed On the right side of the screen a recommendation is given how to proceed 80 Chapter 7 Figure 48 Flexi Link IDs display in the Flexi Link System overview 81 Type U System online 3 Download all stations WS0 CPU1 QB Device configuration is invalid pemen LinkID Sevainamber OB Aopicationis idle g Configuration in the device is equal with the Setting and Monitoring 0851 0002 U Fe eortiguation Firmware version FQ Setting and Monitoring Tool configuration is verified 2 00 0 WB Device contigurationionontiod WM Flexi Link IDs EFI 1 not matching device 0 project 26502 2 Flexi Link IDs EFI 2 not matching device 0 project 26503 2 Type G System online a Download all stations WS0 CPU1 A Q Device configuration is invalid NES ID sefulnunber E Aopic
395. ule and one element gt Switch to the Logic editor by clicking the tab of the same name gt In the selection window for Inputs Function block and Outputs click Inputs and drag an input from the list onto the worksheet You can mark several inputs if you click them while holding down the Ctrl key or if you click the first and last in a series while holding down the Shift key Then you can drag all marked inputs to the worksheet simultaneously gt In the selection window for Inputs Function block and Outputs click Function block and drag an application specific or logic function block from the list onto the worksheet The function block will be displayed orange while not all of its inputs have been connected gt In the selection window for Inputs Function block and Outputs click Outputs and drag an output from the list onto the worksheet The inputs and outputs are marked in color in the logic editor depending on their function gray non safe yellow safe blue diagnostics gt Connect the node of the input with an input field of the function block node and an output node of the function block with the node of the output To do so click one node with the left mouse button hold the left mouse button pressed and drag the cursor to the node with which the first node is to be connected Once all inputs of the function block have been connected the function block is displayed yellow
396. umber of outputs Optional Output 140 Chapter 9 Figure 116 Parameter settings dialog for the Fast shut off function block Note Figure 117 Output selection for Fast shut off 141 Logic programming Function blocks gt Choose the number of inputs which you would like to attach to the function block gt Then click the Parameter tab and choose the zone by checking the boxes EE Fast shut off Parameter In Out Settings In Out Comment Info 1 Connect input loment tothe function block 2 Choose zone by checking the boxes 3 Select output o for fast shut off If only AND logic is needed leave the Zone 2 AND function block inputs unchecked If additional OR logic is required in the application the inputs can be combined using the Zone 1 and Zone 2 AND function blocks and subsequently connecting to the internal OR function block gt Finally select the output for Fast shut off E Fast shut off Parameter In Out Settings In Out Comment Info 1 Connect input elements 2 Choose zone by o the function block J caoooxTiof 1112 gt J caooo xTIOn Iai gt o checking the boxes 3 Select output a for fast shut off J caooaxtiop1yI718 gt Ls Re PNP OutputXTIOL110304 v lt b ValveXTIOL 101 J Output X Figure
397. used Revision 2 XX requires at least firmware version 2 00 See also Chapter 3 Configuration area The entire hardware configuration of the MELSEC WS safety controller and of the connected devices is created here and represented graphically The individual modules and connected devices can be named have a tag name assigned and can be parameterized using the context menu of the devices Additionally it is possible to export or import a configuration hardware configuration and logic and if the Setting and Monitoring Tool is connected to the system to change the password or to perform a software reset of the system via the context menu of the CPU module Icons for the following functions are located on the left next to the positioned modules From top Switch view Settings and Edit tag names When a connection to a Flexi Link station is established further functions are also available Log in change the user group Verify read in and compare the configuration and Run or Stop the CPU module Figure 4 The Hardware configuration view Figure 5 Switch view button Figure 6 Settings button Note The graphical user interface Chapter 5 i Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool 1 3 0 New project 5 CPU modules v2 00 FW 1 00 FW 1 00 FWV 1 00 Rev V 290 Rev V 130 Rev V 13 Rev V 100 Revision E E 5 Network Modules Lat A2 So MITSUBISHI GETH GCC1 Revision vix vix sore sere 1 nl
398. using a delay function block in the logic 98 Chapter 7 Flexi Link Routing of data into the Flexi Link network In order to write data into the Flexi Link network so that it can be used by other stations you need to define which bit in the Flexi Link process image shall be set You will find the bits that can be defined for each station in the Outputs panel in the logic editor under the symbol for the used CPU Figure 74 Flexi Link output bits for Station A in the logic editor a f cru A Global Reset 4 CPU1 A EFI 1 2 p Global E Stop 4 CPU1 A EFI 1 E info 05 cPUTALEFI1 BD info 0 6 cPUTALEFI 1 BB info 0 7 CPUT AL EFI 1 pD Info 1 0 CPUT A EFI 1 E 1 0 enor CPUIALEFI 1 4 Inputs Function block Outputs FB preview Note A square with the letter A D within it denotes a bit within the Flexi Link process image e Each output bit can be used once Outputs that are already in use are displayed green e You can edit the tag names of the output bits in the Flexi Link station X view see Section 7 4 5 How to send information into the Flexi Link network gt Drag the bit you want to define on the worksheet and connect it to the output of a function block gt To have the value of an input available directly for all stations in the Flexi Link network use a Routing 1 N or a Routing N N function block as shown in Figure 75 Figure 75 Routing an input into the Flexi Link network Reset XTIO 1 13
399. ut If there is a falling edge of the Dynamic cam input when the Upstroke cam input is Low i e in the Run down phase of the press cycle the Top output will be set to High until a rising edge of the Upstroke cam input is detected The Upstroke output will remain Low for the rest of the press cycle Top output Overrun cam Upstroke cam 4 i 360 0 Dynamic cam Low m High A Upstroke output If the Upstroke cam input is already High when the monitoring of the cam inputs begins e g in the first logic cycle after resetting an error or after enabling monitoring with Disable monitoring input the Upstroke output will remain Low until the first actual transition from Low to High has been detected at the Upstroke cam input Figure 215 Contact monitoring with the Eccentric press contact function block A ATTENTION Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Contact monitoring The input signals for the Overrun cam input Upstroke cam input and the Drive released input have to accord with Figure 215 and the following rules Overrun cam 1 High Upstroke cam 3 Low 1 The overrun must begin during the upstroke phase The rising edge at the Overrun cam input Low High transition must occur while the Upstroke cam input is High 2 The overrun must end after the end of the upstroke phase The falling edge at the Ov
400. ut ESPE State of the muting sensors Run Next action High All muting sensors are Low A normal muting Muting is possible after correct activation sequence of the muting sensors All muting sensors have to return to Low before the OSSDs of the sensor become Low If the OSSDs of the sensors become Low before all muting sensors have become Low Override has to be used The sensor OSSDs have to become High before muting can take place The muting condition is partially fulfilled Diagnostic outputs The muting condition is fulfilled Override is required if configured Error states and information on resetting Resetting the error state Either transition to normal behaviour in case of a cyclically correct sequence of sensor states or the total override time is exceeded Remarks Muting error detection monitoring e Error in the concurrency monitoring function e Error in the total muting time monitoring Error in the direction e Sequence error detected e Error in the sensor gap error exists A complete valid muting cycle has to occur before any muting error can be reset To this purpose either Override has to be used or all muting sensors and OSSDs of the ESPE have to be clear and a subsequent valid muting sequence has to be applied If one of these two conditions is fulfilled the Muting error output returns to Low provided that no other The Enable output
401. utingsensar 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24v 24v 15 16 WS0 XTIO me 24v ov ov ov ov ov Power Supp Motor contactor Motos contactor tp a 7 B Page 8 291 Annex Chapter 15 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM 34 2 XTIO 2Z 34 241 General Information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Address number version version WSO XTIO 0401 0000 v 1 000 0 00 1 30 200V 1x 2 3 422 Inputs Mode Title Tag name ON OFF OFF ON Dis ms 2 mw A 7 wo 2 sensor muting 3 w A 18 no 2 sensor muting 7 i E Intertock Dual channe 8 w 13 E Interiock Dual channe 24v uI 9 ww 5 C4000 Safety Light Curtain 4 3000 ont gl ic Ught Type 4 3423 Outputs 4 ai pene brody QA h 5 A a intestock A 4 Dual channe 6 Q a3 4 Lamp Single channe 34 2 4 Power Supply Title Tag name 1 2 a Al XTIO Power Supply w A2 3 4 2 5 Wiring diagram 292 Report 4 21 2011 11 10 47 AM 7 a 3 2 3 Intedock Salety Switch Inteilock Saety Swich C4000 1MutingSens a 2mutingsensar 24V 24V 24V 24V 2V 24V 24v 24v I5 16 WS0 XTIO Qi 24v OV ov ov ov Power Supply Irtertock with Interlock wath Lamp Locking Locking A A 4 5 6 3 43 XTIO 3 3 43 1 General Information Type Code Serial Firmware Hardware Version Address number version version WSO xXTIO 0401 0000 v 1 000 0 00 13 0 200Vixx 3 3 43 2 Inputs Mode Title Tag name ON OFF OFF ON Dis ms 2 w 13 no Reset Single channel gt A
402. versions and function packages exist that allow different functions This chapter gives an overview which firmware version which function package and or which version of the Setting and Monitoring Tool is required to use a certain function or device Minimum required version inputs 11 to 18 of the WSO XTIO WSO XTDI Revision 3 xx WS0 XTIO i Feature WS0 CPU Serung and WS0 XTDI Monitoring Tool Logic offline simulation V1 2 0 Logic import export V1 3 0 Online edit V1 3 0 Automatic wiring diagrams V1 3 0 Central tag name editor V1 3 0 Flexi Link only with WSO V2 01 _ v1 3 0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 Revision 2 xx ey nee A V3 02 Flexi Line only with WS0 CPU3 Revision 3 0 V1 7 0 Function block documentation within the Setting and Monitoring V1 3 0 Tool Input output relation matrix V1 3 0 Invertable inputs for the AND v2 01 OR RS Flip Flop and Routing Revieion 2 x V1 3 0 N N function blocks f Ramp down detection function V1 11 V1 3 0 block Revision 1 xx aie Adjustable on delay timer and v2 01 adjustable off delay timer Revision 2xx V1 3 0 function blocks Fast Shut Off with Bypass v2 01 v2 00 function block only with WSO Revision 2 xx Revision 2 xx V1 7 0 XTIO i i Deactivation of test pulses on V2 00 Q1 Q4 on the WS0 XTIO Revision 2x V1 3 0 possible i Verification without identical V2 01 2 V1 3 0 h
403. ween the MELSEC WS safety controller and a PC or notebook 6 1 1 Connecting the PC to the MELSEC WS safety controller via RS 232 gt Connect a PC or notebook to the RS 232 interface of the CPU module gt Power on the MELSEC WS safety controller gt Open the Setting and Monitoring Tool installed on the PC gt Click on Com settings to ensure the correct communication interface has been selected The following dialog appears Connection settings gt oes Yoo Add Com connection profile fk Add TCP IP connection profile fk Add USB connection profile W Check all connection profiles 9 Network settings Standard Serial Port COMTI e Yo COMautodetecton Baudrate Auto scan oSv use a use Identifier wS0 CPU3 He PathChain 1 1 1 1 3 H Active connection To configure the connection please proceed as follows P Senda Yoo Sel Port deter ection stat Yo Yo Yo a rial CO Port COMI Baud rate Aui rm Connection profi ed in the project a Eo f noel gt To edit the settings click on the pencil icon to the right The following dialog appears Modify Profile Entry name Serial port COM4 COM auto detection Auto scan gt Modify the settings if required gt Click OK The Connection settings dialog closes gt Click on Connect The Setting and Monitoring Tool will search for connected MELSEC WS modules and load the hardware configuration into the har
404. yed orange The customized function block can not be edited A grouped function block contains a small pencil icon in the upper right corner indicating that it can be edited The customized function block contains a padlock indicating that it is locked against modification Grouped function block Customized function block Note Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 How to edit a customized function block gt Open the customized function block s page by clicking on its tab gt Click on Edit in the toolbar You will be prompted for confirmation If you click on Yes the customized function block will be transformed to a grouped function block which can be edited see Section 9 13 1 gt In order to make the modified function block available for re use in the function block list save it again as a customized function block by clicking Save as CFB in the toolbar How to transfer customized function blocks to another computer e Adding Customized Function Blocks to the function block list Drag and drop the desired Customized Function Blocks into the logic editor and save the project file Open the project file on another computer You will be prompted to accept an import of all Customized Function Blocks used in the project file Click on Yes to import the Customized Function Blocks They will be listed in the function block list and will be available in all new projects on the same P
405. ys e g between the different contacts of mechanical switches Non cascading mode without cascade input If the Switch synchronization function block is configured without the Cascade input it supports the evaluation of up to three input pairs A change of any input signal starts the timer The outputs 1A to 3B keep their values during the configured Hold time for outputs When the timer has elapsed the values of the inputs 1A to 3B at this point of time are applied to output 1A to 3B irrespective of the result of the antivalence check The outputs keep these values until the next synchronization process occurs Note Figure 153 Logic example for two cascaded Switch synchronization function blocks Notes Note Logic programming Function blocks Chapter 9 Cascading mode with cascade input Several Switch synchronization function blocks can be combined to a cascade so that all outputs will be switched at precisely the same time By cascading multiple Switch synchronization function blocks it is possible to synchronize more than six inputs If the function block is configured with Cascade input the Cascade output is present additionally All cascaded function blocks must be configured with the same Hold time for outputs BH Mode 1 XTIO 1 14 T Mode 2 XTIO 1 12 T Mode 3 XTIO 1 13 B Mode 4 XTIO 1 14 T Mode 5 XTIO 1 5 T Mode 6 XTIO I I6 i 2 Marker 0 0 T Mode 7
406. z and a subsequent Override signal has become High Muting begins again and the Enable output becomes High If the muting cycle is stopped because of a faulty input signal of a muting sensor Override required changes to High for the duration of the logic execution time provided that the remaining conditions for Override required are fulfilled If the faulty input of the muting sensor returns to High and subsequently to Low the muting cycle is stopped again and Override required becomes High provided that the remaining conditions for Override required are fulfilled During a valid override state the direction detection sequence monitoring depending on the function block and concurrency monitoring are not carried out for the duration of an override cycle Conveyor input If the movement of the transported material is stopped during the muting cycle the total muting time and other parameters that can result in a muting error may be exceeded This can be avoided by using the Conveyor input This input is used to stop time related functions connected with muting when the material to be transported does not move further The Conveyor input has to fulfill EN 61131 IEC 61131 and has the following properties 0 VDC conveyor belt stopped e g Low 24 V DC conveyor belt running e g High 214 Chapter 9 Table 96 Effects of the conveyor belt monitoring on the timer functions Note Table 97 Output values for muting status Tab

Safety Controller Setting and Monitoring Tool

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents